- Version 2005
- Download 2329
- Tamanho do Arquivo 3.28 MB
- File Count 1
- Data de Criação 19 de junho de 2020
- Ultima Atualização 19 de junho de 2020
I
Thank you for purchasing LG Variable Frequency Drives!
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
To prevent injury and property damage, follow these
instructions. Incorrect operation due to ignoring instructions
will cause harm or damage. The seriousness of which is
indicated by the following symbols.
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
This symbol indicates the possibility of
death or serious injury
This symbol indicates the possibility of
injury or damage to property
This symbol indicates the instant death or
serious injury if you don’t follow instructions
■ The meaning of each symbol in this manual and on your equipment is as
follows.
This is the safety alert symbol.
Read and follow instructions carefully to avoid dangerous situation.
This symbol alerts the user to the presence of “dangerous voltage”
inside the product that might cause harm or electric shock.
■ After reading this manual, keep it in the place that the user always can
contact easily.
■ This manual should be given to the person who actually uses the products
and is responsible for their maintenance.
II
WARNING
n Do not remove the cover while power is applied or the unit is in
operation.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
n Do not run the inverter with the front cover removed.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock due to high voltage terminals or charged
capacitor exposure.
n Do not remove the cover except for periodic inspections or wiring,
even if the input power is not applied.
Otherwise, you may access the charged circuits and get an electric shock.
n Wiring and periodic inspections should be performed at least 10
minutes after disconnecting the input power and after checking the
DC link voltage is discharged with a meter (below DC 30V).
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
n Operate the switches with dry hands.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
n Do not use the cable when its insulating tube is damaged.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
n Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy
loads or pinching.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
III
CAUTION
n Install the inverter on a non-flammable surface. Do not place
flammable material nearby.
Otherwise, fire could occur.
n Disconnect the input power if the inverter gets damaged.
Otherwise, it could result in a secondary accident and fire.
n Do not touch the inverter while the input power is applied or after
removed. It will remain hot for a couple of minutes.
Otherwise, you may get bodily injuries such as skin-burn or damage.
n Do not apply power to a damaged inverter or to an inverter with
parts missing even if the installation is complete.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
n Do not allow lint, paper, wood chips, dust, metallic chips or other
foreign matter into the drive.
Otherwise, fire or accident could occur.
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
(1) Handling and installation
¨ Handle according to the weight of the product.
¨ Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended.
¨ Install according to instructions specified in this manual.
¨ Do not open the cover during delivery.
¨ Do not place heavy items on the inverter.
¨ Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct.
¨ Do not drop the inverter, or subject it to impact.
¨ Use the ground impedance of 100ohm or less for 200 VClass and 10ohm or less for
400V class.
¨ Take protective measures against ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) before touching the
pcb for inspection or installation.
¨ Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions:
IV
| Ambient temp. |
- 10 ~ 40 ℃ (non-freezing) | Environment |
| Relative humidity |
90% RH or less (non-condensing) | |
| Storage temp. |
- 20 ~ 65 ℃ | |
| Location | Protected from corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil mist or dust |
|
| Altitude, Vibration |
Max. 1,000m above sea level, Max. 5.9m/sec2 (0.6G) or less |
|
| Atmospheric pressure |
70 ~ 106 kPa |
(2) Wiring
¨ Do not connect a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor, or RFI filter to
the output of the inverter.
¨ The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect the
direction of rotation of the motor.
¨ Incorrect terminal wiring could result in the equipment damage.
¨ Reversing the polarity (+/-) of the terminals could damage the inverter.
¨ Only authorized personnel familiar with LG inverter should perform wiring and
inspections.
¨ Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock or
have bodily injury.
(3) Trial run
¨ Check all parameters during operation. Changing parameter values might be required
depending on the load.
¨ Always apply permissible range of voltage to the each terminal as indicated in this
manual. Otherwise, it could lead to inverter damage.
(4) Operation precautions
¨ When the Auto restart function is selected, stay away from the equipment as a motor
will restart suddenly after an alarm stop.
¨ The Stop key on the keypad is valid only when the appropriate function setting has
been made. Prepare an emergency stop switch separately.
¨ If an alarm reset is made with the reference signal present, a sudden start will occur.
Check that the reference signal is turned off in advance. Otherwise an accident could
occur.
¨ Do not modify or alter anything inside the inverter.
¨ Motor might not be protected by electronic thermal function of inverter.
¨ Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/stopping of
the inverter.
¨ Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise
nearby electronic equipment may be affected.
V
¨ In case of input voltage unbalance, install AC reactor. Power Factor capacitors and
generators may become overheated and damaged due to potential high frequency
noise transmitted from inverter.
¨ Use an insulation-rectified motor or take measures to suppress the micro surge voltage
when driving 400V class motor with inverter. A micro surge voltage attributable to
wiring constant is generated at motor terminals, and may deteriorate insulation and
damage motor.
¨ Before operating unit and prior to user programming, reset user parameters to default
settings.
¨ Inverter can easily be set to high-speed operations, Verify capability of motor or
machinery prior to operating unit.
¨ Stopping torque is not produced when using the DC-Break function. Install separate
equipment when stopping torque is needed.
(5) Fault prevention precautions
¨ Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the machine
and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
¨ Do not conduct a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the
inverter.
¨ Refer to Chapter 8 for periodic inspection (parts replacement).
(7) Disposal
¨ Handle the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it.
(8) General instructions
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual show the inverter without a circuit
breaker, a cover or partially open. Never run the inverter like this. Always place the cover with
circuit breakers and follow this instruction manual when operating the inverter.
VI
(9) UL Marking
1. Short Circuit Rating
“Suitable For Use On A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than Table1 RMS Symmetrical
Amperes, 240V for 240V rated inverters, 480V for 480V rated inverters Volts Maximum,”
Table 1. RMS Symmetrical Amperes for iS5 series.
| Model | Rating |
| SV008iS5-2, SV008iS5-4, SV015iS5-2, SV015iS5-4, SV022iS5-2, SV022iS5-4, SV037iS5-2, SV037iS5-4,SV055iS5-2, SV055iS5-4, SV075iS5-2, SV075iS5-4, SV110iS5-2, SV110iS5-4, SV150iS5-2, SV150iS5-4,SV185iS5-2, SV185iS5-4, SV220iS5-2, SV220iS5-4, SV3005iS5-2, SV300iS5-4, SV370iS5-2, SV370iS5-4 |
5,000A |
| SV450iS5-2, SV450iS5-4, SV550iS5-2, SV550iS5-4, SV750iS5-4, | 10,000A |
2. OVERLOAD PROTECTION
IOLT: IOLT(inverter Overload Trip) protection is activated at 150% of the inverter rated current for
1 minute and greater.
OLT : Inverter shuts off its output when inverter output current exceeds its overload trip level for
overload trip time. OLT is selected when FU1-56 is set to “Yes”and activated at 120% of FU1-57
[Motor rated current] for 60 sec set in FU1-58.
3. OVER SPEED PROTECTION
“Not Provided With Overspeed Protection”.
4.Risk of Electric Shock
More than one disconnect switch may be required to de-energize the equipment before servicing.
１
CONTENTS
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS I
USER SELECTION GUIDE (IS5 SPECIFICATIONS) ............................................................................... 3
CHAPTER 1 - INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................... 6
1.1 Inspection ........................................................................................................................................................................6
1.2 Environmental Conditions..........................................................................................................................................6
1.3 Mounting ..........................................................................................................................................................................6
1.4 Other Precautions..........................................................................................................................................................7
1.5 Dimensions......................................................................................................................................................................8
1.6 Basic Wiring..................................................................................................................................................................13
1.7 Power Terminals ..........................................................................................................................................................14
1.8 Control Terminals........................................................................................................................................................19
CHAPTER 2 - OPERATION............................................................................................................. 23
2.1 Parameter Groups.......................................................................................................................................................23
2.2 LCD Keypad..................................................................................................................................................................24
2.3 7-Segment Keypad ......................................................................................................................................................28
2.4 Operation Method........................................................................................................................................................32
2.5 Operating Example......................................................................................................................................................33
CHAPTER 3 - VARIOUS FUNCTION SETTING & DESCRIPTION...................................................... 38
3.1 Function Setting...........................................................................................................................................................38
3.2 Operation Example......................................................................................................................................................46
CHAPTER 4 - QUICK-START PROCEDURES ................................................................................. 51
4.1 Operating using keypad.............................................................................................................................................52
4.2 Operation using Control Terminals........................................................................................................................53
4.3 Operation using Keypad and Control Terminals................................................................................................54
CHAPTER 5 - PARAMETER LIST ................................................................................................... 56
5.1 Drive Group [DRV] .......................................................................................................................................................56
5.2 Function 1 Group [FU1]..............................................................................................................................................58
5.3 Function 2 Group [FU2]..............................................................................................................................................60
5.4 Input/Output Group [I/O]............................................................................................................................................64
5.5 External Group [EXT]..................................................................................................................................................70
5.6 Communication Group [COM]..................................................................................................................................74
5.7 Application Group [APP]...........................................................................................................................................75
5.8 Sub-Board Selection Guide According To Function.........................................................................................77
CHAPTER 6 - PARAMETER DESCRIPTION.................................................................................... 79
6.1 Drive group [DRV]........................................................................................................................................................79
6.2 Function 1 Group [FU1]..............................................................................................................................................87
6.3 Function 2 Group [FU2]..............................................................................................................................................99
6.4 Input/Output Group [I/O]..........................................................................................................................................118
6.5 External Group [EXT]................................................................................................................................................136
6.6 Application Group [APP].........................................................................................................................................145
２
CHAPTER 7 - OPTIONS ................................................................................................................153
7.1 Sub-A board................................................................................................................................................................155
7.2 Sub-B Board...............................................................................................................................................................157
7.3 Sub-C Board (Isolated)............................................................................................................................................161
7.4 Communication option boards..............................................................................................................................163
7.5 Keypad .........................................................................................................................................................................165
7.6 DB Resistors..............................................................................................................................................................167
7.7 DB (Dynamic Brake) Unit........................................................................................................................................175
CHAPTER 8 - TROUBLESHOOTING & MAINTENANCE .................................................................181
8.1 Fault Display...............................................................................................................................................................181
8.2 Fault Remedy.............................................................................................................................................................183
8.3 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................................185
8.4 How to Check Power Components......................................................................................................................186
8.5 Maintenance...............................................................................................................................................................187
8.6 Daily and Periodic Inspection Items....................................................................................................................188
APPENDIX A - FUNCTIONS BASED ON USE.....................................................................................189
APPENDIX B - PARAMETERS BASED ON APPLICATION .................................................................190
APPENDIX C- PERIPHERAL DEVICES ..............................................................................................192
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ....................................................................................................194
3
USER SELECTION GUIDE (iS5 SPECIFICATIONS)
230V Class (1 ~ 30HP)
| Model Number (SV xxx iS5 - 2) |
008 | 015 | 022 | 037 | 055 | 075 | 110 | 150 | 185 | 220 | |
| Motor Rating1 |
HP | 1 | 2 | 3 | 5 | 7.5 | 10 | 15 | 20 | 25 | 30 |
| kW | 0.75 | 1.5 | 2.2 | 3.7 | 5.5 | 7.5 | 11 | 15 | 18.5 | 22 | |
| Capacity 2 [kVA] | 1.9 | 3.0 | 4.5 | 6.1 | 9.1 | 12.2 | 17.5 | 22.9 | 28.2 | 33.5 | Output Ratings |
| FLA [A] | 5 | 8 | 12 | 16 | 24 | 32 | 46 | 60 | 74 | 88 | |
| Frequency | 0 ~ 400 Hz (Sensorless Vector Control: 0 ~ 300Hz, Sensored Vector Control: 0 ~ 120 Hz) | ||||||||||
| Voltage | 200 ~ 230 V 3 | ||||||||||
| Input Ratings |
Voltage | 3 Phase, 200 ~ 230 V (± 10 %) | |||||||||
| Frequency | 50 ~ 60 Hz (±5 %) | ||||||||||
| Braking Circuit | On Board | On Board | Optional (DB Resistor) |
Optional (DB Resistor) | Dynamic Braking4 |
||||||
| Max. Braking Torque |
100% | 100% | 100% | 20%, Continuous |
|||||||
| Max. Continuous Baking Time |
5 seconds | 5 seconds | 15 seconds | ||||||||
| Max. Duty | 3 % ED | 2 % ED | 10 % ED | ||||||||
| Weight [kg] | 4.7 | 4.7 | 4.8 | 4.9 | 7.7 | 7.7 | 13.9 | 14.4 | 20 | 20 |
230V Class (40 ~ 75HP)
| Model Number (SV xxx iS5 - 2) |
300 | 370 | 450 | 550 | |
| Motor Rating1 |
HP | 40 | 50 | 60 | 75 |
| kW | 30 | 37 | 45 | 55 | |
| Capacity 2 [kVA] | 46 | 55 | 68 | 84 | Output Ratings |
| FLA [A] | 122 | 146 | 180 | 220 | |
| Frequency | 0 ~ 400 Hz (Sensorless Vector Control: 0 ~ 300Hz, Sensored Vector Control: 0 ~ 120 Hz) | ||||
| Voltage | 200 ~ 230 V 3 | ||||
| Input Ratings |
Voltage | 3 Phase, 200 ~ 230 V (± 10 %) | |||
| Frequency | 50 ~ 60 Hz (±5 %) | ||||
| Braking Circuit | Optional (Braking Unit, Resistor) | Dynamic Braking4 |
|||
| Max. Braking Torque |
20%, Continuous | ||||
| Max. Continuous Baking Time |
|||||
| Max. Duty | |||||
| Weight [kg] | 42 | 42 | 61 | 61 |
1 Indicates the maximum applicable capacity when using a 4-Pole LG motor.
2 Rated capacity (v 3*V*I) is based on 220V for 200V class and 440V for 400V class.
3 Maximum output voltage will not be greater than the input voltage. Output voltage less than the input voltage may be programmed.
4 1~5 HP inverters have internal braking resistors as standard. 7.5~100 HP inverters utilize optional braking resistors.
4
460/480 V Class (1 ~ 30HP)
| Model Number (SV xxx iS5 - 4) |
008 | 015 | 022 | 037 | 055 | 075 | 110 | 150 | 185 | 220 | |
| Motor Rating1 |
HP | 1 | 2 | 3 | 5 | 7.5 | 10 | 15 | 20 | 25 | 30 |
| kW | 0.75 | 1.5 | 2.2 | 3.7 | 5.5 | 7.5 | 11 | 15 | 18.5 | 22 | |
| Capacity 2 [kVA] | 1.9 | 3.0 | 4.5 | 6.1 | 9.1 | 12.2 | 18.3 | 22.9 | 29.7 | 34.3 | Output Ratings |
| FLA [A] | 2.5 | 4 | 6 | 8 | 12 | 16 | 24 | 30 | 39 | 45 | |
| Frequency | 0 ~ 400 Hz (Sensorless Vector Control: 0 ~ 300Hz, Sensored Vector Control: 0 ~ 120 Hz) | ||||||||||
| Voltage | 380 ~ 460 V, 380 ~ 480 V 3 | ||||||||||
| Input Ratings |
Voltage | 3 Phase, 380 ~ 460 V (± 10 %), 380 ~ 480 V (± 10 %) (Special type available from ‘2004) 5 | |||||||||
| Frequency | 50 ~ 60 Hz (±5 %) | ||||||||||
| Braking Circuit | On Board | On Board | Optional (DB Resistor) |
Optional (DB Resistor) | Dynamic Braking4 |
||||||
| Max. Braking Torque |
100% | 100% | 100% | 20% Continuous |
|||||||
| Max. Continuous Baking Time |
5 seconds | 5 seconds | 15 seconds | ||||||||
| Max. Duty | 3 % ED | 2 % ED | 10 % ED | ||||||||
| Weight [kg] | 4.7 | 4.7 | 4.8 | 4.9 | 7.7 | 7.7 | 13.9 | 14.4 | 20 | 20 |
460/480 V Class (40~100HP)
| Model Number (SV xxx iS5 - 4) |
300 | 370 | 450 | 550 | 750 | |
| Motor Rating1 |
HP | 40 | 50 | 60 | 75 | 100 |
| kW | 30 | 37 | 45 | 55 | 75 | |
| Capacity 2 [kVA] | 45 | 56 | 68 | 82 | 100 | Output Ratings |
| FLA [A] | 61 | 75 | 91 | 110 | 152 | |
| Frequency | 0 ~ 400 Hz (Sensorless Vector Control: 0 ~ 300Hz, Sensored Vector Control: 0 ~ 120 Hz) | |||||
| Voltage | 380 ~ 460 V, 380 ~ 480 V 3 | |||||
| Input Ratings |
Voltage | 3 Phase, 380 ~ 460 V (± 10 %), 380 ~ 480 V(± 10 %) (Special type available from ‘2004) 6 | ||||
| Frequency | 50 ~ 60 Hz (±5 %) | |||||
| Braking Circuit | Optional (Braking Unit, Resistor) | Dynamic Braking4 |
||||
| Max. Braking Torque |
20%, Continuous | |||||
| Max. Continuous Baking Time |
||||||
| Max. Duty | ||||||
| Weight [kg] | 45 | 45 | 63 | 63 | 68 |
5 When applying input voltage of 507~528 V range, derate the load 10%. For example, when applying 507 V to 5.5kW inverters (rated
current 12A), the max. rated output current would be 10.8A, calculated by multiplying 12A by 0.9 (90%).
6 Same as above.
5
| Control Method | V/F Control, Sensorless Vector Control, Sensored Vector Control (Velocity, Torque) Selectable | CONTROL | |
| Frequency Setting Resolution |
Digital Reference: 0.01 Hz (Below 100 Hz), 0.1 Hz (Over 100 Hz) Analog Reference: 0.03 Hz / 60 Hz |
||
| Frequency Accuracy | Digital: 0.01 % of Max. Output Frequency Analog: 0.1 % of Max. Output Frequency |
||
| V/F Ratio | Linear, Squared Pattern, User V/F | ||
| Overload Capacity | 150 % of Rated Current for 1 Min., 200% of Rated Current for 0.5 sec. (Characteristic is Inversely Proportional to Time) |
||
| Torque Boost | Manual Torque Boost (0 ~ 15 % ), Auto Torque Boost | ||
| Operation Method | Key / Terminal / Communication Operation | Input Signal | OPERATION |
| Frequency Setting | Analog: 0 ~ 10V / 4 ~ 20mA / Additional port for Sub-Board (0 ~ 10V) Digital: Keypad |
||
| Start Signal | Forward, Reverse | ||
| Multi-Step | Up to 8 Speeds can be Set (Use Multi-Function Terminal) | ||
| Multi Step Accel/Decel Time |
0 ~ 6,000 sec, Up to 4 Types can be Set and Selected for Each Setting (Use Multi- Function Terminal). Accel/Decel Pattern: Linear, U-Curve, S-Curve |
||
| Emergency Stop | Interrupts the Output of Inverter | ||
| Jog | Jog Operation | ||
| Auto Operation | Operates from Internal Sequence by Setting Multi-Function Terminal (5 Way * 8 Step) | ||
| Fault Reset | Trip Status is Removed when Protection Function is Active | ||
| Operating Status | Frequency Detection Level, Overload Alarm, Stalling, Over Voltage, Under Voltage, Inverter Overheating, Running, Stop, Constant Speed, Inverter By-Pass, Speed Searching, Auto Operation Step, Auto-Operation Sequence |
Output Signal | |
| Fault Output | Contact Output (30A, 30C, 30B) – AC250V 1A, DC30V 1A | ||
| Indicator | Choose 1 from Output Frequency, Output Current, Output Voltage, DC Voltage, Output Torque (Output Voltage: 0 ~ 10V) |
||
| Operation Function | DC Braking, Frequency Limit, Frequency Jump, Second Function, Slip Compensation, Reverse Rotation Prevention, Auto Restart, Inverter By-Pass, Auto-Tuning, PID Control |
||
| Inverter Trip | Over Voltage, Under Voltage, Over Current, Fuse Open, Ground Fault, Inverter Overheating, Motor Overheating, Output Phase Open, Overload Protection, External Fault 1, 2, Communication Error, Loss of Speed Command, Hardware Fault, Option Fault, Overspeed, M/C Fail etc. |
Protection | |
| Inverter Alarm | Stall Prevention, Overload Alarm, Temperature Sensor Fault | ||
| Momentary Power Loss | Auto Restart function activated when FU2-21 [Restart after fault reset] set to 1 (Yes) | ||
| Operation Information |
Output Frequency, Output Current, Output Voltage, Frequency Value Setting, Operating Speed, DC Voltage, Output Torque |
Display | Keypad |
| Trip Information | Indicates a Fault when the Protection Function activates, Retains Up to 5 Faults | ||
| Ambient Temperature | -10 °C ~ 40 °C (14 °F ~ 104 °F), CE Certification: 41 °F ~ 104 °F (5 °C ~ 40 °C) | Environment | |
| Storage Temperature | -20 °C ~ 65 °C (-4 °F ~ 149 °F) | ||
| Ambient Humidity | Less Than 90 % RH Max. (Non-Condensing), CE Certification: 5 ~85% (Non-Condensing) | ||
| Altitude - Vibration | Below 1,000mor 3,300ft · Below 5.9m/sec2 (=0.6g) | ||
| Application Site | No Corrosive Gas, Combustible Gas, Oil Mist, or Dust | ||
| Cooling Method | Forced Air Cooling |
6
CHAPTER 1 - INSTALLATION
1.1 Inspection
l Inspect the inverter for any damage that may have occurred during shipping.
l Check the nameplate on the inverter. Verify the inverter unit is the correct one for the application. The numbering
system for the inverter is as shown below.
LG Inverter Motor Capacity Series Name Input Voltage
008: 1 HP 075: 10 HP 2: 200 ~ 230V (± 10%) (50/60Hz)
015: 2 HP 110: 15 HP 4: 380 ~ 460V (± 10%) (50/60Hz)
| UL Listed |
022: 3 HP 150: 20 HP 4: 380 ~ 480V(± 10%) (50/60Hz)
037: 5 HP 185: 25 HP
055: 7.5 HP 220: 30 HP N: Without Keypad
O/E: UL Open/Enclosed Type 1
DB: Built-in DB Unit
1.2 Environmental Conditions
l Verify ambient condition for the mounting location.
- Ambient temperature should not be below 14ºF (-10ºC) or exceed 104ºF (40ºC).
- Relative humidity should be less than 90% (non-condensing).
- Altitude should be below 3,300ft (1,000m).
l Do not mount the inverter in direct sunlight and isolate it from excessive vibration.
l If the inverter is going to be installed in an environment with high probability of penetration of dust, it must be
located inside watertight electrical boxes, in order to get the suitable IP degree.
1.3 Mounting
l The inverter must be mounted vertically with sufficient horizontal and vertical space between adjacent equipment
(A= Over 100mm, B= Over 50mm). However, A= Over 500mm and B= 200mm should be obtained for
inverters with 40Hp and above.
| iS5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE Risk of Injury or Electric Shock Risk of Electric Shock Risk of Electric Shock WARNING EXT RUN SHIFT ESC D R V FU1 FU2 E N T PROG RESET STOP LE-200 I/O |
|
| B | B |
| A | |
| A |
SV 008 iS5 2 XXX U
…
(480)
Chapter 1 – Installation
7
1.4 Other Precautions
l Do not carry the inverter by the front cover.
l Do not install the inverter in a location where excessive vibration is present. Be cautious when installing on
presses or moving equipment.
l The life span of the inverter is greatly affected by the ambient temperature. Install in a location where temperature
are within permissible limits (- 10 ~ 40 ℃ ).
l The inverter operates at high-temperatures - install on a non-combustible surface.
l Do not install the inverter in high-temperature or high-humidity locations.
l Do not install the inverter in a location where oil mist, combustible gas, or dust is present. Install the inverter in a
clean location or in an enclosed panel, free of foreign substance.
l When installing the inverter inside a panel with multiple inverters or a ventilation fan, use caution.
If installed incorrectly, the ambient temperature may exceed specified limits.
l Install the inverter using screws or bolts to insure the inverter is firmly fastened.
| Inverter |
GOOD (O) BAD (X)
| Inverter |
Cooling fan
Panel Panel
| Inverter |
| Inverter |
[When installing several inverters in a panel]
Ventilating fan
GOOD (O) BAD (X)
[When installing a ventilating fan in a panel]
UL Remark (File number: E124949):
“Only intended for use in an enclosure with maximum surrounding air temperature of 45℃ ” or
equivalent: Models SV022iS5-2/4, SV037iS5-2/4, SV055iS5-4 (not -2), SV075iS5-4 (not -2),
SV110iS5-2/4, SV150iS5-2/4, SV185iS5-2/4 and SV220iS5-2/4.
Chapter 1 – Installation
8
1.5 Dimensions
n Frame # 1: 1 ~ 5 HP
n Frame # 2: 7.5 ~ 10 HP
| iS5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE ESC SHIFT LC-200 |
| Risk of Injury or Electric Shock Risk of Electric Shock Risk of Electric Shock WARNING |
| VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE iS5 |
| Risk of Injury or Electric Shock Risk of Electric Shock Risk of Electric Shock WARNING |
EXT
RUN
ESC
SHIFT
DRV FU1 FU2
ENT
PROG
RESET
STOP
LE-200
I / O
mm (inches)
Frame HP Model Number W1 W2 H1 H2 D1
1 SV008iS5-2/4
2 SV015iS5-2/4
Frame # 1 3 SV022iS5-2/4
5 SV037iS5-2/4
150
(5.91)
130
(5.12)
284
(11.18)
269
(10.69)
156.5
(6.16)
| 7.5 | SV055iS5-2/4 SV075iS5-2/4 |
Frame # 2 |
| 10 |
| 200 (7.87) |
| 180 (7.09) |
| 355 (13.98) |
| 340 (13.39) |
| 182.5 (7.19) |
Chapter 1 – Installation
9
n Frame # 3: 15 ~ 20 HP
n Frame # 4: 25 ~ 30 HP
WARNING
Risk of Injury or Electric Shock
Risk of Electric Shock
Risk of Electric Shock
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
iS5
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
WARNING
Risk of Injury or Electric Shock
Risk of Electric Shock
Risk of Electric Shock
iS5
ESC
SHIFT
LC-200
I/O
LE-200
STOP
RESET
PROG
ENT
D R V F U 1 FU2
SHIFT
ESC
R U N
EXT
mm (inches)
| Frame Frame # 3 |
HP 15 |
Model Number W1 SV110iS5-2/4 SV150iS5-2/4 |
| 20 |
W2 H1 H2 D1
| 250 (9.84) |
| 230 (9.06) |
| 385 (15.16) |
| 370 (14.57) |
| 201 (7.91) |
| 25 | SV185iS5-2/4 SV220iS5-2/4 |
Frame # 4 |
| 30 |
| 304 (11.97) |
| 284 (11.18) |
| 460 (18.11) |
| 445 (17.52) |
| 234 (9.21) |
Chapter 1 – Installation
10
n Frame # 5: 40~50HP
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
STARVERT-iS5
ESC
SHIFT
LC-200
Risk of Electric Shock
Risk of Electric Shock
Risk of Injury or Electric Shock
WARNING
mm (inches)
Frame HP Model Number W1 W2 H1 H2 D1
40 SV300iS5-2/4
Frame # 5
50 SV370iS5-2/4
350
(13.78)
270
(10.63)
680
(28.77)
662
(26.06)
311
(12.25)
Chapter 1 – Installation
11
n Frame # 6: 60~75HP(200V)
STARVERT-iS5
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
SHIFT ESC
LC-200
WARNING
Risk of Injury or Electric Shock
Risk of Electric Shock
Risk of Electric Shock
mm (inches)
Frame HP Model Number W1 W2 H1 H2 D1
60 SV450iS5-2
Frame # 6
75 SV550iS5-2
397
(15.63)
275
(10.83)
780
(30.71)
760.5
(29.94)
330
(12.99)
Chapter 1 – Installation
12
n Frame # 7: 60~100HP (400V)
mm (inches)
Frame HP Model Number W1 W2 H1 H2 D1
60 SV450iS5-4
Frame # 7 75 SV550iS5-4
100 SV750iS5-4
375
(14.76)
275
(10.83)
780
(30.71)
760.5
(29.94)
330
(12.99)
STARVERT-iS5
LC-200
SHIFT
ESC
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
WARNING
Risk of Injury or Electric Shock
Risk of Electric Shock
Risk of Electric Shock
Chapter 1 – Installation
13
1.6 Basic Wiring
| 230/460V 50/60Hz U VW G ( ) RS T N1 DB Unit(Optional)5 DB Resistor 3 f MCCB MC (Option) MOTOR P2/ L21 P1/ L11 DC Bus Choke (Optional)4 Dynamic Braking Unit (Optional) P N B1 B2 DC Bus Choke DB Resistor Main Power Circuit |
||
| FX RX BX RST P1 P3 CM VR V1 I 5G FM 5G (N.O.) 30 A AXA AXC P2 Factory Setting: ‘Speed-L’ ‘Speed-M’ ‘Speed-H’ Power supply for speed signal: + 12V, 10mA Speed signal input: 0 ~ 10V Speed signal input: 4 ~20mA (250ohm) Common for VR, V1, I JOG (N.C.) 30 B 30 C |
+ Output Frequency Meter (0~10V Linear)2 Fault output relay less than AC250V, 1A less than DC30V, 1A Multi-function output relay1 less than AC250V, 1A less than DC30V, 1A Factory setting: ‘Run’ FM Control Circuit |
Potentiometer (1 kohm, 1/2W) Speed signal Input3 Forward Run/Stop Reverse Run/Stop Inverter Disable Fault Reset Multi-function Input 1 Multi-function Input 2 Multi-function Input 3 Common Terminal Jog Shield |
Note) Main Circuit Terminals Control Circuit Terminals.
1. The terminal configuration varies depend on the model number. Please refer to the ‘1.7 Power terminals’.
2. Analog output voltage is adjustable up to 12V.
3. Analog speed command may be set by Voltage, Current or both.
4. The Common Busbar between P1/L1 and P2/L2 must be removed before installing DC Reactor.
5. 1 ~ 10 HP inverters have built-in braking circuit. Braking resistors are only included for 1 ~ 5HP inverters.
15~30HP inverters have built-in DB unit. 15 ~ 100 HP inverters need optional braking unit and resistor.
Chapter 1 – Installation
14
1.7 Power Terminals
n Type A Configuration: 1 ~ 5 HP (230/460/480V)
| R | S | T | G | N | B1 | B2 | U | V | W |
| DB Resistor integrated |
n Type B Configuration: 7.5 ~ 10 HP (230/460/480V)
| R | S | T | G | P | N | B1 | B2 | U | V | W |
n Type C Configuration: 15 ~ 30 HP (230/460/480V)
| R | S | T | G | P1 | P2 | N | U | V | W |
n Type C Configuration: 15 ~ 30 HP (230/460/480V), Built-in DBU model
| R | S | T | G | P1 | B1 | B2 | U | V | W |
n Type D Configuration: 40~ 75 HP (230V), 40 ~ 100 HP (460/480V)
| R | S | T | G | U | V | W | P1 | P2 | N |
* Jumper should be removed to connect a DC reactor
| Symbols | Functions |
| R | AC Line Voltage Input (3 Phase, 200 ~ 230VAC or 380 ~ 460/480 VAC) |
| S | |
| T | |
| G | Earth Ground |
| P | Positive DC Bus Terminal DB Unit (P-P7) Connection Terminals (DB Unit may be added when more braking duty (More than 30%ED) is required) |
| P1 | External DC Reactor (P1-P2) and DB Unit (P2-N) Connection Terminals |
| P2 | |
| N | Negative DC Bus Terminal DB Unit (N-N8) Connection Terminal |
| B1 | Dynamic Braking Resistor (B1-B2) Terminals for 1-30HP inverters |
| B2 | |
| U | 3 Phase Power Output Terminals to Motor (3 Phase, 200 ~ 230VAC or 380 ~ 460/480 VAC) |
| V | |
| W |
“Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes,
240 volts maximum for 230V class models and 480 volts maximum for 460V class models.”
7 This P terminal is provided on optional Dynamic Braking Unit.
8 This N terminal is provided on optional Dynamic Braking Unit.
Chapter 1 – Installation
15
1.7.1 Type A Configuration
As standard on the iS5 inverter, this type of configuration has internal dynamic braking resistor of 3% ED. When an
application requires more braking duty, an external dynamic braking resistor may be connected instead of the internal
resistor.
| R | S | T | G | N | B1 | B2 | U | V | W |
| 3 Phase Power Input |
Figure 1 – Type A Dynamic Braking Resistor Installation
1.7.2 Type B Configuration
A Dynamic Braking Resistor or a Dynamic Braking Unit may be added to iS5 series inverters that have a Type B
configuration power terminal strip.
| R | S | T | G | P | N | B1 | B2 | U | V | W |
Figure 2 – Type B Dynamic Braking Resistor Installation
| R | S | T | G | P | N | B1 | B2 | U | V | W |
| 3 Phase Power Input |
Figure 3 – Type B Additional Dynamic Braking Unit and Resistor Installation
Motor
Dynamic Braking Resistor
3 Phase
| Motor |
| Dynamic Braking Resistor |
Power Input
Motor
Dynamic Braking Resistor
Dynamic
Braking Unit
Chapter 1 – Installation
16
1.7.3 Type C Configuration
A Dynamic Braking Unit or a DC Bus Choke or both of them may be added to iS5 series inverters that have a Type A
Configuration power terminal strip.
Jumper Between P1 and P2 Must Be Removedin Order
to Install a DC Bus Choke.
| R | S | T | G | P1 | P2 N U V W |
| 3 Phase ower Input |
|||||
| DC Bus Choke (remove to wire DC Reactor |
Figure 4 – Type C Dynamic Braking Unit, DC Bus Choke Installation
| R | S | T | G | P1 | B1 | B2 | U | V | W |
Figure 5 – Type C Dynamic Braking Resistor
1.7.4 Type D Configuration
R S T G U V W P1 P2 N
Figure 6 – Type D Dynamic Braking Unit, DC Bus Choke Installation
Motor
Dynamic
Braking
Unit
Dynamic Braking Resistor
3 Phase
| Motor |
| Dynamic Braking Resistor |
Power Input
3 Phase Motor
Power Input Dynamic
Braking
Unit
DB Resistor
DC Bus Choke
(remove to wire DC Reactor)
Chapter 1 – Installation
17
1.7.5 Wiring Power Terminals
n Wiring Precautions
l The internal circuits of the inverter will be damaged if the incoming power is connected and applied to output
terminals (U, V, W).
l Use ring terminals with insulated caps when wiring the input power and motor wiring.
l Do not leave wire fragments inside the inverter. Wire fragments can cause faults, breakdowns, and malfunctions.
l For input and output, use wires with sufficient size to ensure voltage drop of less than 2%.
l Motor torque may drop of operating at low frequencies and a long wire run between inverter and motor.
l When more than one motor is connected to one inverter, total wire length should be less than 500m (1,640ft). Do
not use a 3-wire cable for long distances. Due to increased leakage capacitance between wires, over-current
protective feature may operate or equipment connected to the output side may malfunction.
l Connect only recommended braking resistor between the B1 and B2 terminals. Never short B1 and B2
terminals. Shorting terminals may cause internal damage to inverter.
l The main circuit of the inverter contains high frequency noise, and can hinder communication equipment near the
inverter. To reduce noise, install line noise filters on the input side of the inverter.
l Do not use power factor capacitor, surge killers, or RFI filters on the output side of the inverter. Doing so may
damage these components.
l Always check whether the LCD and the charge lamp for the power terminal are OFF before wiring terminals. The
charge capacitor may hold high-voltage even after the power is disconnected. Use caution to prevent the
possibility of personal injury.
n Grounding
l The inverter is a high switching device, and leakage current may flow. Ground the inverter to avoid electrical shock.
Use caution to prevent the possibility of personal injury.
l Connect only to the dedicated ground terminal of the inverter. Do not use the case or the chassis screw for
grounding.
l The protective earth conductor must be the first one in being connected and the last one in being disconnected.
l As a minimum, grounding wire should meet the specifications listed below. Grounding wire should be as short as
possible and should be connected to the ground point as near as possible to the inverter.
| Grounding wire Sizes, AWG (mm² ) | Inverter Capacity | |
| 200V Class | 400VClass | |
| Below 5 HP | 12 (3.5) | 14 (2) |
| 7.5 ~ 10 HP | 10 (5.5) | 12 (3.5) |
| 15 ~ 20 HP | 6 (14) | 8 (8) |
| 25 ~ 30 HP | 4 (22) | 6 (14) |
| 40 ~ 50 HP | 4 (22) | 6 (14) |
| 60 ~ 100 HP | 2 (38) | 4 (22) |
WARNING
Normal stray capacitance between the inverter chassis and the power devices inside the
inverter and AC line can provide a high impedance shock hazard. Do not apply power to the
inverter if the inverter frame (Power terminal G) is not grounded.
Chapter 1 – Installation
18
n Wires and Terminal Lugs
Refer to the following table for wires, terminal lugs, and screws used to connect the inverter power input (R, S, T) and
output (U, V, W). Input and motor output terminal blocks are intended only for use with ring type connectors.
| Wire10 | Ring Terminals | Inverter Capacity | STerminal crew Size | TScre orque w9 (Kgf·cm)/lb-in |
|||||
| mm² | AWG | ||||||||
| R,S,T | U,V,W | R,S,T | U,V,W | R,S,T | U,V,W | ||||
| 1 ~ 3 HP | M3.5 | 15 / 10 | 2-4 | 2-4 | 2 | 2 | 14 | 14 | 200V Class |
| 5 HP | M3.5 | 15 / 10 | 2-4 | 2-4 | 3.5 | 3.5 | 12 | 12 | |
| 7.5 HP | M4 | 15 / 10 | 5.5-5 | 5.5-5 | 5.5 | 5.5 | 10 | 10 | |
| 10 HP | M4 | 15 / 10 | 14-5 | 8-5 | 14 | 8 | 6 | 8 | |
| 15 HP | M5 | 26 / 18 | 14-5 | 14-5 | 14 | 14 | 6 | 6 | |
| 20 HP | M5 | 26 / 18 | 22-6 | 22-6 | 22 | 22 | 4 | 4 | |
| 25 HP | M6 | 45 / 31 | 38-8 | 38-8 | 30 | 30 | 2 | 2 | |
| 30 HP | M6 | 45 / 31 | 38-8 | 38-8 | 38 | 30 | 2 | 2 | |
| 40-50HP | M8 | 100 / 70 | 60-8 | 60-8 | 60 | 60 | 2/0 | 2/0 | |
| 60-75HP | M10 | 200 / 139 | 100-10 | 100-10 | 100 | 100 | 4/0 | 4/0 | |
| 1 ~ 5 HP | M3.5 | 15 / 10 | 2-4 | 2-4 | 2 | 2 | 14 | 14 | 400V Class |
| 7.5 HP | M4 | 15 / 10 | 5.5-5 | 5.5-5 | 3.5 | 2 | 12 | 14 | |
| 10 HP | M4 | 15 / 10 | 14-5 | 8-5 | 3.5 | 3.5 | 12 | 12 | |
| 15 HP | M5 | 26 / 18 | 14-5 | 14-5 | 5.5 | 5.5 | 10 | 10 | |
| 20 HP | M5 | 26 / 18 | 22-6 | 22-6 | 14 | 8 | 6 | 8 | |
| 25 HP | M6 | 45 / 31 | 38-8 | 38-8 | 14 | 8 | 6 | 8 | |
| 30 HP | M6 | 45 / 31 | 38-8 | 38-8 | 22 | 14 | 4 | 6 | |
| 40-50HP | M8 | 100 / 70 | 38-8 | 38-8 | 22 | 22 | 4 | 4 | |
| 60-75HP | M8 | 100 / 70 | 38-8 | 38-8 | 38 | 38 | 2 | 2 | |
| 100HP | M8 | 100 / 70 | 60-8 | 60-8 | 60 | 60 | 2/0 | 2/0 |
n Power andMotor Connection
| R | S | T | G | N | B1 | B2 | U | V | W |
9 Apply the rated torque to terminal screws. Loose screws can cause of short circuit or malfunction. Tightening the screws too much
can damage the terminals and cause a short circuit or malfunction.
10 Use copper wires only with 600V, 75℃ ratings .
3 Phase Motor
Power Input
Power supply must be connected
to the R, S, and T terminals.
Connecting it to the U, V, and W
terminals causes internal damages
to the inverter. Arranging the phase
sequence is not necessary.
Motor should be connected to the
U, V, and W terminals.
If the forward command (FX) is on,
the motor should rotate counter
clockwise when viewed from the load
side of the motor. If the motor rotates
in the reverse, switch the U and V
terminals.
Chapter 1 – Installation
19
1.8 Control Terminals
| P1 | P2 | P3 | FX | RX | NC | VR | V1 |
| JOG | CM | CM | BX | RST | I | FM | 5G |
| 30A | 30C | 30B | AXA | AXC |
| Type | Symbol | Name | Description | |
| P1, P2, P3 | Multi-Function Input 1, 2, 3 |
Used for Multi-Function Input Terminal. (Factory default is set to “Multi-Step Frequency 1, 2, 3”.) |
Starting Contact Function Select | Input signal |
| FX | Forward Run Command | Forward Run When Closed and Stopped When Open. | ||
| RX | Reverse Run Command | Reverse Run When Closed and Stopped When Open. | ||
| JOG | Jog Frequency Reference |
Runs at Jog Frequency when the Jog Signal is ON. The Direction is set by the FX (or RX) Signal. |
||
| BX | Emergency Stop | When the BX Signal is ON the Output of the Inverter is Turned Off. When Motor uses an Electrical Brake to Stop, BX is used to Turn Off the Output Signal. When BX Signal is OFF (Not Turned Off by Latching) and FX Signal (or RX Signal) is ON, Motor continues to Run. |
||
| RST | Fault Reset | Used for Fault Reset. | ||
| CM | Sequence Common | Common Terminal for Contact Inputs. | ||
| NC | - | Not Used. | Analog frequency setting | |
| VR | Frequency Setting Power (+12V) |
Used as Power for Analog Frequency Setting. Maximum Output is +12V, 100mA. |
||
| V1 | Frequency Reference (Voltage) |
Used for 0-10V Input Frequency Reference. Input Resistance is 20 KΩ . | ||
| I | Frequency Reference (Current) |
Used for 4-20mA Input Frequency Reference. Input Resistance is 250 Ω . | ||
| 5G | Frequency Setting Common Terminal |
Common Terminal for Analog Frequency Reference Signal and FM (For Monitoring). |
||
| Analog | FM | Analog Output(0~12V) (For External Monitoring) |
Outputs One of the Following: Output Frequency, Output Current, Output Voltage, DC Link Voltage, and Torque. Default is set to Output Frequency. Maximum Output Voltage and Output Current are 0-12V and 1mA, 500Hz. |
Output signal |
| 30A 30C 30B |
Fault Contact Output | Activates when Protective Function is Operating. AC250V, 1A or less; DC30V, 1A or less. Fault: 30A-30C Closed (30B-30C Open) Normal: 30B-30C Closed (30A-30C Open) |
Contact | |
| AXA, AXC | Multi-Function Output Relay |
Use After Defining Multi-Function Output Terminal. AC250V, 1A or less; DC30V, 1A or less. |
* Tightening torque of control terminal blocks
TER 1 – 140 Kgf·cm/(93.5 in-lb) TER 2 – 8 Kgf·cm/(5.3 in-lb)
Chapter 1 – Installation
20
1.8.1 Wiring Control Terminals
n Wiring Precautions
l CM and 5G terminals are insulated to each other. Do not connect these terminals with each other and do not
connect these terminals to the power ground. Terminal 5G is indicated as CM from 30kW inverters and has the
same potential as CM (Sequence Common Terminal).
l Use shielded wires or twisted wires for control circuit wiring, and separate these wires from the main power circuits
and other high voltage circuits.
l It is recommended to use the cables of 1.25 mm² (22 AWG) for connection to the control circuit terminals.
n Control Circuit Terminal
l The control input terminal of the control circuit is ON when the circuit is configured to the current flows out of the
terminal, as shown in the following illustration. CM terminal is the common terminal for the contact input signals.
CAUTION
Do not apply voltage to any control input terminals (FX, RX, P1, P2, P3, JOG, BX, RST, CM).
24 VDC
| FX RX CM Inverter Circuitry Resistor |
| Current |
Resistor
External Sequence
Chapter 1 – Installation
21
1.8.2 Keypad Connection
Connect keypad to the keypad connector as illustrated below.The LCD output will not be displayed on the keypad if
the keypad is not connected properly.
| Control Board | |
| Relay Output Control Terminal Block Terminal Block |
|
| Keypad Connector (CN3) |
|
| Sub-Board Connector | Power Supply Input, Gate Drive Signal Output Connector Socket |
| Option Board Connector Option Board |
|
| Sub-Board |
Chapter 1 – Installation
22
Notes:
23
CHAPTER 2 - OPERATION
The iS5 series inverter has seven parameter groups separated according to their applications as indicated in the
following table.
The iS5 series inverter provides two kinds of keypad. One is of 32-character alphanumeric LCD keypad and the other
is of 7-Segment LED keypad.
2.1 Parameter Groups
| Parameter Group |
LCD Keypad (Upper left Corner) |
7-segment Keypad (LED is lit) |
Description |
| Drive Group | DRV | ‘DRV’LED | Command Frequency, Accel/Decel Time etc. Basic Parameters |
| Function 1 Group | FU1 | ‘FU1’LED | Max. Frequency, Amount of Torque Boost etc. Basic Related Parameters |
| Function 2 Group | FU2 | ‘FU2’LED | Frequency Jumps,Max./Min. FrequencyLimit etc. Basic Application Related Parameters |
| Input / Output Group |
I/O | ‘I/O’LED | Multi Parameter -Function s needed for TerminalSSequence etting, Auto Opera Operation etc. tion |
| Sub-Board Group | EXT | ‘EXT’LED | Displayed when Sub-Board is Installed. |
| Option Group | COM | ‘I/O’+ ‘EXT ’LED | Displayed when Option Board is Installed. |
| Application Group | APP | ‘FU2’+ ‘I/O’+ ‘EXT ’ LED |
Traverse, MMC (Multi-Motor Control), Draw etc. Application Related Parameters |
Refer to the function descriptions in chapter 6 for detailed description of each group.
Chapter 2 - Operation
24
2.2 LCD Keypad
LCD keypad can display up to 32 alphanumeric characters, and various settings can be checked directly from the
display. The following is an illustration of the keypad.
32 character, back light,
LCD display. The back
light is adjustable.
The Mode Button moves
you through the seven
program groups: DRV,
FUN1, FUN2, I/O, (EXT),
COM, and APP
The Up and Down
Arrows are used to
move through and
change data.
Reverse Run Button.
The Reverse Run LED
blinks when the drive
Accels or Decels.
The Program Button is
used to go into
programming mode to
change data.
The Enter Button is
used to enter changed
data within a parameter.
[SHIFT] This button is
used to move cursor
across display in
programming mode.
[ESC] This button is used
to move the program
code to DRV 00 form any
program code.
Forward Run Button
The Forward Run LED
blinks when the drive
Accels or Decels.
Stop Button is used to
stop the drive from
running.
The Reset Button is
used to reset Faults.
The LED blinks when
there is a fault.
Chapter 2 - Operation
25
2.2.1 LCD Keypad Display
DRV▶T/K 0.0 A
00 STP 0.00 Hz
| Displays | Description |
| 1) Parameter Group | Displays the parameter group. There are DRV, FU1, FU2, I/O, EXT, COM, APP groups. |
| 2) Run/Stop Source | Displays the source of motor Run and Stop K: Run/Stop using FWD, REV buttons on keypad T: Run/Stop using control terminal input FX, RX O: Run/Stop via option board |
| 3) Frequency Setting Source |
Displays the source of command frequency setting K: Frequency setting using keypad V: Frequency setting using V1 (0 ~10V) or V1 + I terminal I: Frequency setting using I (4 ~ 20mA) terminal U: Up terminal input when Up/Down operation is selected D: Down terminal input when Up/Down operation is selected S: Stop status when Up/Down operation is selected O: Frequency setting via Option board X: Frequency setting via Sub board J: Jog terminal input 1 ~ 8: Step frequency operation * During Auto operation, 2) and 3) display the ‘sequence number/step’. |
| 4) Output Current | Displays the Output Current during operation. |
| 5) Parameter Code | Displays the code of a group. Use the ? (Up), ? (Down) key to move through 0~99 codes. |
| 6) Operating Status | Displays the operation information. STP: Stop Status FWD: During Forward operation REV: During Reverse operation DCB: During DC Braking LOP: Loss of Reference from Option Board (DPRAM fault) LOR: Loss of Reference from Option Board (Communication network fault) LOV: Loss of Analog Frequency Reference (V1: 0~10V) LOI: Loss of Analog Frequency Reference (I: 4~20mA) LOS: Loss of Reference from Sub-Board |
| 7) Drive Output Frequency Command Frequency |
Displays the Output Frequency during run. Displays the Command Frequency during stop. |
2) Run/Stop Source 3) Frequency Setting Source
4) Output Current
7) Drive Output Frequency During Run,
6) Operating Status Command Frequency During Stop
5) Parameter Code
1) Parameter group
Chapter 2 - Operation
26
2.2.2 Procedure for Setting Data (LCD Keypad)
1. Press [MODE] key until the desired parameter group is displayed.
2. Press [? ] or [? ] keys to move to the desired parameter code. If you know the desired parameter code, you can
set the code number of each parameter group in “Jump code”, except DRV group.
3. Press [PROG] key to go into the programming mode, the cursor starts blinking.
4. Press [SHIFT/ESC] key to move the cursor to the desired digit.
5. Press [? ] or [? ] keys to change the data.
6. Press [ENT] key to enter the data. The cursor stops blinking.
n Note: Data cannot bechanged when:
1) The parameter is not adjustable during the inverter is running. (Refer to the function table in Chapter 5) or
2) Parameter Lock function is activated inFU2-94 [Parameter Lock].
Chapter 2 - Operation
27
2.2.3 Parameter Navigation (LCD Keypad)
The parameter group moves directly to DRV group by pressing [SHIFT/ESC] key in any parameter code.
| DRV▶ T/K 00 STP |
0.0 A 0.00 Hz |
FU1▶ Jump code
00 1
FU2▶ Jump code
00 30
MODE
◀
FU1▶ Run prohibit
03 None
FU2▶ Last trip-1
01 -------
I/O▶ V1 filter
01 10 ms
DRV▶ Dec. time
02 20.0 sec
FU1▶ Acc. pattern
05 Linear
FU2▶ Last trip-2
02 -------
I/O▶ V1 volt x1
02 0.00 V
FU1▶ Dec. pattern
06 Linear
FU2▶ Last trip-3
03 -------
I/O▶ V1 freq y1
03 0.00 Hz
DRV▶ Freq mode
04 KeyPad-1
FU1▶ Stop mode
07 Decel
FU2▶ Last trip-4
04 -------
I/O▶ V1 volt x2
04 10.00 V
DRV▶ Step freq-1
05 10.00 Hz
FU1▶ DcSt value
08 50 %
FU2▶ Last trip-5
05 -------
I/O▶ V1 freq y2
05 60.00 Hz
FU1▶ Stall Level
60 150 %
FU2▶ Para. lock
94 0
I/O▶ Way1 / 2D
60 Forward
MODE MODE MODE
MODE
I/O▶ Jump code
00 1
▶
MODE
▶ ◀
MODE
▶ ◀
MODE
▶ ◀
MODE
▶ ◀ ▶ ◀ ▶ ◀ ▶ ◀
▶ ◀ ▶ ◀ ▶ ◀ ▶ ◀
▶ ◀ ▶ ◀ ▶ ◀ ▶ ◀
▶ ◀ ▶ ◀ ▶ ◀ ▶ ◀
▶ ◀ ▶ ◀ ▶ ◀
DRV▶ Drive mode
03 Fx/Rx -1
DRV▶ Fault
12 -------
DRV▶ Acc. time
01 10.0 sec
MODE MODE MODE
MODE MODE MODE MODE
MODE MODE MODE MODE
MODE MODE MODE MODE
MODE MODE MODE MODE
▶ ◀
Drive Group FU1 Group FU2 Group I/O Group
.. .
.. .
.. .
.. .
Chapter 2 - Operation
28
2.3 7-Segment Keypad
* Parameter Group Display LEDs – When parameter code is located on DRV 20, DRV 21, DRV 22 and DRV 23, respectively by
rotating the encoder knob, the parameter group display LEDs of DRV, FUN1, FUN2, I/O, EXT blink.
| LED | Parameter Group | Description |
| DRV | Drive Group | Lit in Drive group. |
| FU1 | FUNCTION 1 Group | Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 20 [FUN1]. Lit when FUNCTION 1 group is selected. |
| FU2 | FUNCTION 2 Group | Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 21 [FUN2]. Lit when FUNCTION 2 group is selected. |
| I/O | Input/ Output Group | Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 22 [I/O]. Lit when Input/Outputgroup is selected. |
| EXT | Sub-Board Group | Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 23 [EXT]. Lit when Sub-Board group is selected. This group appears only when a Sub-Board is installed. |
| I/O + EXT | Option Group | Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 24 [EXT]. Lit when Option group is selected. This group appears only when an Option Board is installed. |
| FU2 + I/O + EXT | Application Group | Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 25 [FUN2]. |
| 7-segment |
| display nob ove you rameter parameter used to a by rotating utton is used rogramming ange data. on is used to hanged data. links during ng mode. [SHIFT] Th used to mo across disp programmin [ESC] This to move the code to DR program co Run Butto run the driv direction is 13. The Run L when the d Decels. Stop Butto stop the dri running. Reset Butt reset Faults The LED b there is a fa * Paramete Display LE |
| Encoder k Used to m through pa groups and code. Also, change dat knob. |
| Program B to go into p mode to ch Enter Butt enter the c The LED b programmi |
| is button is ve cursor lay in g mode. button is used program V 00 from any de. |
| n is used to e. The motor set in DRV ED blinks rive Accels or |
| n is used to ve from on is used to . links when ult. |
| r Group Ds. |
Chapter 2 - Operation
29
2.3.1 7-Segment Keypad Display
| Display | Description |
| 1) Parameter Group | Displays the parameter groups of DRV, FU1, FU2, I/O, EXT, COM, APP groups. Each LED is lit when its parameter group is selected and blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 20, DRV 21, DRV 22, DRV 23, DRV 24, and DRV 25. |
| 2) Parameter Code and Operating Status |
Displays the code of a group. Rotate the encoder knob to move through 0 ~ 99 codes. Displays the operation information. [First digit] F: Forward operation r: Reverse operation [Second digit] d: DC Braking J: Jog Terminal Input 1~8: Step Frequency Input (Displays the Step of the Auto operation) [Two digits] - mark the reference is lost. PL: Loss of Reference from the Option Board (DPRAM fault) rL: Loss of Reference from the Option Board (Communication network fault) vL: Loss of Analog Frequency Reference (V1: 0~10V) IL: Loss of Analog Frequency Reference (I: 4~20mA) XL: Loss of Reference from the Sub-Board |
| 3) Output Frequency, Command Frequency |
Displays the Output Frequency during run. Displays the Command Frequency during stop. |
DRV FU1 FU2 I/O EXT
1) Parameter Group
3) Output Frequency during run,
Command Frequency during stop
2) Parameter Code and
Operating Status
Chapter 2 - Operation
30
2.3.2 Procedure for Setting Data (7-Segment Keypad)
n In DRV Group:
1. Rotate the encoder knob until the desired parameter code is displayed.
2. Press [PROG/ENT] key to go into the programming mode, then the display blinks.
3. Press [SHIFT/ESC] key to move the cursor to the desired digit.
4. Rotate the encoder knob to change the data.
5. Press [PROG/ENT] key to enter the changed data.
n In FUN1 Group:
1. Rotate the encoder knob until parameter code ‘20’is displayed in drive group.
2. Press [PROG/ENT] key to go into the FUN1 group.
3. Rotate the encoder knob until the desired parameter code is displayed.
4. Press [PROG/ENT] key to go into the programming mode, then the display blinks.
5. Press [SHIFT/ESC] key to move the cursor to the desired digit.
6. Rotate the encoder knob to change the data.
7. Press [PROG/ENT] key to enter the changed data.
n In FUN2 Group:
1. Rotate the encoder knob until parameter code ‘21’is displayed in drive group.
2. Go to step 2 of ‘In FUN1 Group’above, and follow the rest procedure.
n In I/O Group:
1. Rotate the encoder knob until parameter code ‘22’is displayed in drive group.
2. Go to step 2 of ‘In FUN1 Group’above, and follow the rest procedure.
Chapter 2 - Operation
31
2.3.3 Parameter Navigation (7-Segment Keypad)
The parameter group moves directly to DRV group by pressing [SHIFT/ESC] key in any parameter code.
DRV FU1 FU2 I/O EXT
DRV FU1 FU2
| I/O EXT I/O EXT Encoder Knob |
|
| DRV FU1 FU2 I/O EXT DRV FU1 DRV FU1 FU2 I/O EXT DRV FU1 FU2 I/O EXT DRV FU1 DRV FU1 PROG ENT I/O EXT I/O EXT I/O EXT PROG ENT PROG ENT |
FU2 I/O EXT FU2 I/O EXT FU2 I/O EXT PROG ENT |
DRV FU1 FU2 DRV FU1 FU2 DRV FU1 FU2 DRV FU1 FU2 FU1 Group
| DRV Group |
FU2 Group
I/O Group
SHIFT
ESC
Chapter 2 - Operation
32
2.4 Operation Method
The iS5 has several operationmethods as shown below.
| Operation Method | Function | Function Setting |
| Operation using Keypad | Run/Stop command and frequency are set only through the keypad. |
DRV 03: Keypad DRV 04: Keypad-1 or -2 |
| Operation using Control Terminals |
Closing FX or RX terminal performs Run/Stop. Frequency reference is set through V1 or I or V1+I terminal. |
DRV 03: Fx/Rx-1 or -2 DRV 04: V1 or I or V1+I |
| Run/Stop is performed by the keypad. Frequency reference is set through the V1 or I or V1+I terminal. |
DRV 03: Keypad-1 or -2 DRV 04: V1 or I or V1+I |
Operation using both Keypad and Control Terminals |
| Closing FX or RX terminal performs Run/Stop. Frequency reference is set through the keypad. |
DRV 03: Fx/Rx-1 or -2 DRV 04: Keypad-1 or -2 |
|
| Operation using Option Board |
Operation using option board. The iS5 has five option boards and three sub-boards. Option Boards: RS485, Device-Net, F-Net, ProfiBus and ModBus Sub-Boards: Sub-A Board, Sub-B Board, Sub-C Board (Please refer to ‘Chapter 7 - Options’for more information.) |
Chapter 2 - Operation
33
2.5 Operating Example
2.5.1 Operation via Control terminal + Keypad
1. Check the LCD display when Power ON. Otherwise, change the setting indicated above.
2. Turn the FX (or RX) terminal ON. Then FWD (or REV) LED will be lit.
3. When setting the Ref. Freq to 60 Hz using PROG/ENT/SHIFT, ? keys, motor will rotate at 60Hz.
FWD (or REV) LED will be flickering during Acceleration/ Deceleration.
4. Turn Fx (or Rx) terminal Off. Then Stop LED will be lit.
DRV▶ T/K 0.0 A
00 STP 0.00Hz
DRV▶ T/K 0.0 A
00 FWD 0.00Hz
DRV▶ Cmd. freq
00 0.00Hz
DRV▶ Cmd. freq
00 60.00Hz
DRV▶ T/K 5.0 A
00 FWD 60.00Hz
Note) To enable Run/Stop via keypad & Freq setting via control terminal…
Setting: DRV-03 [Drive Mode (Run/Stop method)] = 0 (Keypad)
DRV-04 [Frequency Mode (Freq. setting method)] = 2 (V1)
Setting: DRV-03 [Drive Mode (Run/Stop method)] = 1 (Fx/Rx-1)
DRV-04 [Frequency Mode (Freq. setting method)] = 0 (Keypad-1)
l With above setting, Freq setting via terminal & Run/Stop via Keypad disabled
DRV▶ T/K 0.0 A
00 STP 60.00Hz
Chapter 2 - Operation
34
| Operation Example (1) |
Freq Setting via Keypad + Run/Stop via Terminal (FX/RX) | ||
| [Operation condition] -. Control mode: V/F control -. Ref. Frequency: 50[Hz] setting via keypad -. Accel/Decel time: Accel – 10 [Sec], Decel – 20 [Sec] -. Drive mode: Run/Stop via FX/RX terminal |
|||
| [Wiring] IM 3P AC input Potentiometer 1[kohm],1/2W |
|||
| Step | Parameter setting | Code | Description |
| 1 | Control Mode Selection | FU2-39 | Set it to 0 {V/F}. |
| 2 | Drive Mode | DRV-3 | Set it to 1 Fx/Rx-1. |
| 3 | Frequency Mode | DRV-4 | Set it to 0 Keypad-1. |
| 4 | 50[Hz] freq command setting |
DRV-0 | Set freq command 50[Hz] via Keypad. |
| 5 | Accel/Decel time | DRV-2 DRV-3 |
Set Accel time to 10 [Sec] in DRV-2. Set Decel time to 20 [Sec] in DRV-3. |
| 6 | Terminal FX | Motor starts to rotate in Forward direction at 50Hz with Accel time 10 [sec] when FX terminal is turned ON. Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 25[sec] when FX terminal is turned OFF. |
|
| 7 | Terminal RX | When RX terminal is turned ON motor starts to rotate in Reverse direction at 50[Hz] with Accel time 10 [Hz]. When it is OFF, motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 20 [Sec]. |
R S T G
U V W
B1 B2
FX
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
P2
P3
CM
VR
V1
5G
FM
5G
30A
30C
30B
AXA
AXC
S/W
Chapter 2 - Operation
35
2.5.2 Operation via Control Terminal
1. Check the LCD display when Power ON. Otherwise, change the setting indicated above.
2. Turn the FX (or RX) terminal ON. Then FWD (or REV) LED will be lit.
3. Set the frequency using V1 (Potentiometer). Output freq (60Hz)., Rotating direction (FWD or REV) and output
current (5A) will be displayed on the LCD.
4. Output freq value is decreasing when turning the potentiometer counterclockwise. Inverter output stops at 0.00Hz
and motor is stopped.
5. Turn FX (or RX) terminal OFF.
Setting: DRV-03 [Drive Mode (Run/Stop method)] = 1 (Fx/Rx-1)
DRV-04 [Frequency Mode (Freq. setting method)] = 2 (V1)
DRV▶ T/V 0.0 A
00 STP 0.00Hz
DRV▶ T/V 0.0 A
00 FWD 0.00Hz
DRV▶ T/V 5.0 A
00 FWD 60.00Hz
DRV▶ T/V 0.0 A
00 FWD 0.00Hz
DRV▶ T/V 0.0 A
00 STP 0.00Hz
Chapter 2 - Operation
36
| Operation Example (2) |
Analog Voltage Input (V1) + Operation via Terminal (FX/RX) | ||
| [Operation condition] -. Control mode: V/F control -. Reference Frequency: 50[Hz] analog input via V1 (Potentiometer) -. Accel/Decel time: Accel – 10 [Sec], Decel – 20 [Sec] -. Drive mode: Run/Stop via FX/RX terminal |
|||
| [Wiring] IM 3P AC input Potentiometer 1[kohm],1/2W |
|||
| Step | Parameter setting | Code | Description |
| 1 | Control Mode Selection | FU2-39 | Set it to 0 {V/F}. |
| 2 | Drive Mode | DRV-3 | Set it to 1 Fx/Rx-1. |
| 3 | Frequency Mode | DRV-4 | Set it to 2 V1 Analog input. |
| 4 | 50[Hz] freq command setting |
DRV-0 | Set freq command 50[Hz] via V1(potentiometer). |
| 5 | Accel/Decel time | DRV-2 DRV-3 |
Set Accel time to 10 [Sec] in DRV-2. Set Decel time to 20 [Sec] in DRV-3. |
| 6 | Terminal FX | Motor starts to rotate in Forward direction at 50Hz with Accel time 10 [sec] when FX terminal is turned ON. Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 20[sec] when FX terminal is turned OFF. |
|
| 7 | Terminal RX | When RX terminal is turned ON motor starts to rotate in Reverse direction at 50[Hz] with Accel time 10 [Hz]. When it is OFF, motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 20 [Sec]. |
R S T G
U V W
B1 B2
FX
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
P2
P3
CM
VR
V1
5G
FM
5G
30A
30C
30B
AXA
AXC
S/W
Chapter 2 - Operation
37
2.5.3 Operation via Keypad
1. Check the LCD display when Power ON. Otherwise, change the setting indicated above.
2. Set the Ref. Freq to 60 Hz using PROG/ENT/SHIFT, ? keys. Setting freq is displayed during stop.
3. When pressing FWD/REV key, motor starts running and output freq and output current are displayed.
4. Press STOP/RESET key. Then motor decelerates to stop. Setting freq 60Hz is displayed.
DRV▶K/K 0.0 A
00 STP 0.00Hz
Setting: DRV-03 [Drive Mode (Run/Stop method)] = 0 (Keypad)
DRV-04 [Frequency Mode (Freq. setting method)] = 0 (Keypad-1)
DRV▶ K/K 0.0 A
00 STP 60.00Hz
DRV▶ K/K 5.0 A
00 FWD 60.00Hz
DRV▶ K/K 0.0 A
00 STP 60.00Hz
38
CHAPTER 3 - VARIOUS FUNCTION SETTING & DESCRIPTION
3.1 Function Setting
3.1.1 Basic function parameter setting
It is the basic function setting. All settings are factory defaults unless users make change. It is recommended to use
factory setting value unless the parameter change is necessary.
1) Common parameter setting
The following table shows common parameter setting that should be checked before use but making change does not
affect inverter control type.
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Motor Selection | FU2-30 | Selects motor and voltage rating suitable to the desired inverter. |
| Motor parameters | FU2-31 ~ 36 | Basic parameter value setting when selecting the motor rating. ☞ Note: If there is any discrepancy between parameter preset value and the actual motor parameter value, change the parameter value according to the actual motor. |
| Drive Mode | DRV-3 | Operation via Keypad, Fx/Rx-1, Fx/Rx-2 setting |
| Frequencyor Torque Mode |
DRV-4 | Frequency/Torque setting parameter It automatically changes to torque mode when FU2 39- [Control mode] is set to Sensorless_T, Vector_TRQ. |
| Accel/Decel time setting |
DRV-1, DRV-2 | Accel/Decel time setting |
2) V/f control
FU2-39 [Control mode] is set to 0 (V/F) as factory setting. Operation via V/F control can be performed after common
parameter settings are done and the followings are set.
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Starting freq. | FU1-22 | Set frequency to start the motor. |
| Torque boost | FU1-26 | Manual or Auto torque boost settable in this parameter |
| Torque boost value | FU1-27, FU1-28 | If FU1-26 [torque boost] is set to manual, user sets the desired value and the direction in code FU1-27 and 28. |
Chapter 3 – Function Settings
39
3) V/F + PG control
If FU2-39 [control mode] is set to V/F with PG (encoder) feedback using SUB-B board, the control type is automatically
changed to V/F + PG. The following parameters should be set accordingly to enable PG feedback using SUB-B board.
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Usage of Pulse Input Signal |
EXT -12 | Defines the use of pulse input mounted. This parameter should be set to 1 {Feed signal with SUB-B -back}. |
| Pulse Signal Input Selection |
EXT -15 | Three types of input (A+B), A, -(A+B) signal settable; |
| Encoder Pulse Number |
EXT -16 | Defines the number of encoders of the motor. |
| P-Gain for ‘Sub-B’ I-Gain for ‘Sub-B’ |
EXT -22, EXT -23 | PI gains for PI controller during PG operation |
| Slip Frequency for ‘Sub-B’Board |
EXT -24 | Set as a percent of FU2-32 [Rated Motor Slip]. |
4) Slip compensation
Operation is done via Slip compensation if FU2-39 is set to 1 {Slip compen}. This control keeps motor speed constant
regardless of load change.
5) Auto-tuning of motor constant
This parameter enables auto-tuning of the motor constants. If set to 1 {All mode}, tuning type varies according to what
control mode is set in [FU2-39]. Auto-tuning can be done in two ways – one is motor non-rotation mode, the other is
motor rotation mode.
① Auto-tuning by non-rotation mode: Rs+Lsigma
② Auto-tuning by rotation mode: All, Enc Test, Tr
Before performing Auto-tuning, set motor rating, motor parameter in common setting and select the desired control
mode in FU2-39 [control mode selection]. However, when auto-tuning parameters related to encoder, detail functions
settings of vector control should be pre-defined. If Enc Test, Tr and control mode are set to vector control, Sub-B board
should be mounted.
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Auto-tuning | FU2-40 | No, All, Rs+Lsigma, Enc Test, Tr |
| Parameter value display |
FU2-34, FU2-41 ~ 44 |
Tuned value monitoring (No-load current, stator/rotor resistance, leakage inductance, rotor filter time constant) |
Chapter 3 – Function Settings
40
| FU2-40 | Description |
| No | Motor constants calculation disabled. |
| All | All constants can be measured in this code but different constants are tuned according to control mode; For V/F, Slip compen, Sensorless_S, Sensorless_T: (No-load current, stator resistance, leakage inductance, stator inductance available) ☞ Note: Only no-load current can be calculated during V/F and Slip compensation. For Vector_SPD, Vector_T: (No-load current, stator resistance, leakage inductance, stator inductance, encoder test, rotor filter time constant) |
| Rs+Lsigma | Calculates stator resistance, leakage inductance. |
| Enc Test | Calculates the encoder status. |
| Tr | Calculates Rotor filter time constant. |
6) Sensorless vector control
Set FU2-39 to 2 {Sensorless_S} or 3 {Sensorless_T} to enable Sensorless vector control. It is strongly recommended
to perform Auto-tuning for Sensorless before starting Sensorless control in order to maximize performance. Two types
of Sensorless vector control are available; Sensorless_S or Sensorless_T.
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Control mode selection | FU2-39 | Select Sensorless_S or Sensorless_T. |
| P, I gain for sensorless control |
FU2-45, FU2-46 | Set gain for Sensorless_S control. |
| Starting freq | FU1-22 | Starting freq of the motor |
7) Vector control
Set FU2-39 to 4 {Vector_SPD} or 5 {Vector_TRQ} to enable Vector control. Encoder should be installed to the motor
with Sub-B board in the inverter to start this control.
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Usage of Pulse Input Signal |
EXT -12 | Defines the method of pulse input with SUB-B board mounted. Vector control setting is valid only after this parameter is set to 1 {Feed-back}. |
| Pulse Input Signal Selection |
EXT -15 | 3 types of pulse input: (A+B), A, -(A+B) |
| Encoder Pulse Number | EXT -16 | Enters the pulse number of encoder in the motor. |
Before selecting Vector control mode, encoder setting should be done as indicated above. If the parameter value of
actual motor is set in common setting, execute Auto-tuning before selecting vector control mode.
Chapter 3 – Function Settings
41
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Control Mode Selection | FU2-39 | Selects Vector_SPD or Vector_TRQ. |
| Forward/ Reverse Torque Limit |
EXT -27, EXT -28 | Sets the FWD/REV limit to the torque current. |
| P-Gain/ I-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD |
EXT -25, EXT -26 | Sets P/I Gain for Vector_SPD control. |
| Speed Limit setting | EXT -50, EXT -51 EXT -52, EXT -53 |
Sets speed limit for Vector_TRQ. |
| Zero Speed Detection Level/ Bandwidth |
EXT -54, EXT -55 | Set motor speed reaches to 0. s on/off of Multi-function output terminal relay when the |
| Torque Detection Level/Bandwidth |
EXT -56, EXT -57 | Detects certain level/bandwidth of Torque. |
3.1.2 Advanced function setting
SV-iS5 inverter features advanced function parameters to maximize efficiency and performance of the motor. It is
recommended to use as factory setting unless parameter value change is necessary.
1) V/F control
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| V/F Pattern | FU1-29 | Use it according to load characteristics. If User V/F is selected, user can select the optimum output V/F characteristic for the application and load characteristics in [FU1-30]~[FU1-37]. |
| Dwell operation | FU2-07 FU2-08 |
Used to output torque in an intended direction. Inverter stops acceleration for the preset [FU2-08] Dwell time while running at Dwell frequency [FU2-07] and starts acceleration at commanded frequency. Setting [FU2-08] Dwell time to 0 disable the Dwell operation. |
| Frequency jump | FU2-10 FU2-11~16 |
When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped. Up to three areas can be set, with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom point of each area. To enable the function, set [FU2-10] to ‘Yes’and set the value in [FU2- 11]~[FU2-16]. |
| S-curve Accel/Decel pattern |
FU2-17/ FU2-18 | This pattern has an effect on the prevention of cargo collapse on conveyor etc and reduction in an acceleration/ deceleration shock. |
Chapter 3 – Function Settings
42
2) Sensorless vector control
Related parameters for starting in Sensorless vector control whenFU2-39 [Control Mode Selection] is set to 2
{Sensorless_S}
| Status | Code | Description |
| FU1-14 | Pre-excitation time setting | When starting |
| I/O12~14 EXT2~4 |
Multi-function input terminal P1- P6 define |
3) Vector control [Vector_SPD, Vector_TRQ]
Related parameters for running/ stopping in Vector control when FU2-39 [Control Mode Selection] is set to 4
{Vector_SPD}
| Status | Code | Description |
| FU1-14 | Pre-excitation time setting | When starting |
| I/O12~14 EXT2~4 |
Multi-function input terminal P1- P6 define | |
| Pre-excitation current | FU1-16 | Pre-excitation current setting |
| FU1-15 | Hold time at a stop setting | When stopping |
| FU1-7 | Stopping method selection |
This parameter can limit the over-speeding (motor running above limit level) of the motor when FU2-39 [Control mode]
is set to 5 {Vector_TRQ}.
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Speed limit level / bias / gain |
EXT -50 ~ EXT -53 |
Function to limit the speed andchange reference torque value according to speed |
4) Parameters to monitor motor and inverter status
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Output current/ motor speed |
DRV-8 ~ 9 | Displays output current and motor rpm. |
| DC link voltage | DRV-10 | Displays DC link voltage. |
| User display selection (Voltage and watt) |
DRV-11 FU2-73 |
Either output voltage or power selected in FU2-73 is displayed in DRV11. |
| Reference/ Feedback frequency display |
DRV-15 | Displays Reference/ Feedback frequency display. |
| Fault display | DRV-14 | Displays the current inverter fault. |
Chapter 3 – Function Settings
43
5) Parameter initialize
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Software version | FU2-79 | Displays the inverter software version. |
| Parameter Read/Write/Initialize/Lock |
FU2-91 FU2-92 FU2-93 FU2-94 |
[FU2-91], [FU2-92]: Copying parameters from other inverter [FU2-93]: Initializing parameters to factory setting values [FU2-94]: Parameter write disabled |
☞ Note: Motor param eters (FU2-31~37, FU2-41~44) are back to factory setting once Parameter Read/Writie is
executed.
6) Protection & Trip level setting
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Electronic thermal | FU1-50 FU1-51 FU1-52 FU1-53 |
Protection of the motor from overheating without the use of external thermal relay. Refer to parameter descriptions for more detail. |
| Overload alarm and trip | FU1-54, FU1-55 FU1-56, FU1-57 FU1-58 |
Warning alarm outputs and displays the trip message when overcurrent above the threshold value keeps on. |
| Stall prevention | FU1-59, FU1-60 | Set the output current level at which the output freq will be adjusted to prevent the motor from stoping due to over current etc. it activates during accel/ constant speed/ decel to prevent the motor stall. |
7) Starting / Accel/ Decel / Stopping pattern setting
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Accel/Decel pattern | FU1-05 FU1-06 |
5 types of Accel/ Decel pattern: ‘Linear’, ‘S-curve’, ’U curve’, ’Minimum ’, ‘Optimum’settable according to appplication and load characteristic. If ‘S-curve’is selected, the desired value of [FU2-17], [FU2-18] is settable. |
| Stopping method | FU1-07 | 3 types of stopping method ‘Decel’, ‘DC-brake’, ‘Free-run’ selectable. If ‘DC-brake’is selected, the desired value of [FU1-8]~ [FU1-11] is settable. |
| Starting DC Injection Braking Voltage/ Time |
FU1-12 FU1-13 |
The motor accelerates after the preset [FU1-12] for the preset [FU1-13] is applied. Starting DC injection braking is inactive when the value is set to 0 in control mode other than V/F and Slip compensation. |
| Frequency Limit selection | FU1-23 FU1-24 FU1-25 |
Limits the active frequency. Inverter operates at the freq range between upper freq limit [FU1-25] and bottom freq limit [FU1-24] and higher/ lower freq value is entered, it is automatically replaced by limit value. Setting range: [FU1- 20] Maximum freq to [FU1-21] Base freq. |
| Dynamic braking | FU2-75 FU2-76 |
Select the DB resistor mode when the regenerative load. Is connected. Refer to DBU manual for more details. |
Chapter 3 – Function Settings
44
8) Operation-starting method
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Starting method | FU2-20 FU2-21 FU2-26 FU2-27 |
Motor starting method: [FU2-20]: Power-on run, [FU2-21] Restart after Fault Reset, [FU2-26] Number of Auto Restart Attempt [FU2-27] Delay Time Before Auto Restart See parameter description for more details. |
| Speed Search Selection | FU2-22 FU2-23 FU2-24 FU2-25 |
Speed search function is available during Accel, trip, instant power failure, restart after fault reset and auto restart. See parameter description for more details. |
3.1.3 Application function setting
1) PID operation
The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or pressure via PID feedback control.
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| PID control setting | FU2-41~ FU2-60 | Parameters for PID control setting |
2) Jog and Multi-speed operation
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Multi function input terminal setting |
I/O-12 ~14 EXT2 ~ 4 |
If I/O-12 ~14 are set to Speed-H, Speed-M, Speed-L, multi- speed operation up to speed 7 is available. |
| Filter time constant for input terminal |
I/O-17 | Effective for eliminating noise in the freq. setting circuit |
| Speed reference value | DRV-05 ~ 7 I/O-21 ~ I/O-24 |
Speed reference value for each step setting |
| Accel/Decel time setting for each step |
I/O-25 ~ 38 | Accel/Decel time for each step setting |
| Jog freq. | I/O-20 | Jog freq for jog operation setting |
| Speed-H | Speed-M | Speed-L | JOG | Speed Signal | Parameter value |
| 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Speed 0 | DRV-00 |
| X | X | X | 1 | Jog freq. | I/O-20 |
| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 | Speed –1 | DRV-05 |
| 0 | 1 | 0 | 0 | Speed –2 | DRV-06 |
| 0 | 1 | 1 | 0 | Speed –3 | DRV-07 |
| 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Speed –4 | I/O-21 |
| 1 | 0 | 1 | 0 | Speed –5 | I/O-22 |
| 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | Speed –6 | I/O-23 |
| 1 | 1 | 1 | 0 | Speed –7 | I/O-24 |
Chapter 3 – Function Settings
45
3) Auto sequence operation
If I/O-50 [Auto (Sequence) Operation selection] is set to 1 {Auto-A} or 2 {Auto-B}, up to 5 sequences can be set with
max of 8 steps (speed) in each sequence. Therefore, max 40 operating steps can be made. Two different types of auto
sequence (A, B) operation are available.
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Auto operation setting | I/O-50 ~ 84 | Sets 8 steps and 5 sequences (Max). |
4) 2nd motor operation
2nd function setting is required to run the two motors by one inverter by exchange. If the terminal defined for 2nd function
signal input is turned ON, 2nd motor operation is valid.
| Parameter Name | Code | Description |
| Multi-function input terminals setting |
I/O-12 ~14 EXT2 ~ 4 |
2nd motor operation is available with Multi-function input terminals P1 ~ P3 or P4 ~ 6 set to 7 {2nd Func}. |
| Parameter setting for 2nd motor operation |
FU2-81 ~ FU2-90 | Setting parameters necessary to operate 2 as base freq., Accel/Decl time, Stall. nd motor such |
5) Energy-saving operation
FU1-39 [Energy Save Level] tunes the inverter output voltage to minimize the inverter output voltage during during
constant speed operation. Appropriate for energy-saving applications such as fan, pump and HVAC.
Chapter 3 – Function Settings
46
3.2 Operation Example
| Operation Example (1) |
V/F Control + Analog Voltage Input (V1) + Operation via Terminal (FX/RX) | ||
| [Operation condition] -. Control mode: V/F control -. Frequency command: 50[Hz] analog input via V1 terminal -. Accel/Decel time: Accel – 15 [Sec], Decel – 25 [Sec] -. Drive mode: Run/Stop via FX/RX terminal |
|||
| [Wiring] IM 3P AC input Potentiometer 1[kohm],1/2W |
|||
| Step | Parameter setting | Code | Description |
| 1 | Control Mode Selection | FU2-39 | Set it to 0 {V/F}. |
| 2 | Drive Mode | DRV-3 | Set it to Fx/Rx-1. |
| 3 | Frequency Mode | DRV-4 | Set V1 Analog input value in frequency mode. |
| 4 | 50[Hz] freq command setting |
DRV-0 | Set freq command 50[Hz] via V1 (potentiometer). |
| 5 | Accel/Decel time | DRV-2 DRV-3 |
Set Accel time to 15 [Sec] in DRV-2. Set Decel time to 25 [Sec] in DRV-3. |
| 6 | Terminal FX | Motor starts to rotate in Forward direction at 50Hz with Accel time 15 [sec] when FX terminal is turned ON. Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 25[sec] when FX terminal is turned OFF. |
|
| 7 | Terminal RX | When RX terminal is turned ON motor starts to rotate in Reverse direction at 50[Hz] with Accel time 15 [Hz]. When it is OFF, motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 25 [Sec]. |
R S T G
U V W
B1 B2
FX
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
P2
P3
CM
VR
V1
5G
FM
5G
30A
30C
30B
AXA
AXC
S/W
Chapter 3 – Function Settings
47
| Operation example (2) |
(V/F + PG) Control + Operation (Run/Stop) via Keypad | ||
| [Operation condition] -. Control mode: V/F + PG control -. Frequency command: 50[Hz] Digital input via Keypad -. Accel time: 15[sec], Decel time: 25 [sec] -. Drive mode: Run/Stop via Keypad -. Wiring block diagram when an Open Collector- type encoder is used. |
|||
| [Wiring] 3P AC Input MODE PROG ENT REV SHIFT ESC STOP RESET F W D LC-200 |
|||
| Step | Parameter setting | Code | Description |
| 1 | Control Mode Selection | FU2-39 | Set it to 0 {V/F}. |
| 2 | Drive mode | DRV-3 | Set it to 0 {KeyPad}. |
| 3 | Frequency Mode | DRV-4 | Set it to 0 {KeyPad-1}. |
| 4 | Digital Command Frequency setting |
DRV-0 | Press PROG key on the keypad to set 50 Hz |
| 5 | Accel/Decel time setting | DRV DRV- -2 3 | Accel time: set DRV Decel time: set DRV--2 to 15[sec] 3 to 25[sec] |
| 6 | Sub-B board setting | EXT-12 EXT-15 EXT-16 |
Set EXT-12 [Usage of Pulse Input Signal] to 1 {Feed-back} and set EXT-15 and EXT-16 after checking encoder rating on the nameplate. |
| 7 | FWD Operation | Motor runs at 50[Hz] in forward direction with Accel time 15[sec] by PG control when pressing FWD key on the keypad. Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 25[sec] when pressing Stop key. |
|
| 8 | REV Operation | Motor runs at 50[Hz] in reverse direction with Accel time 15[sec] by PG control when pressing REV key on the keypad. Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 25[sec] when pressing Stop key. |
AOC
R S T G
U V W
B1 B2
FX
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
P2
P3
CM
VR
V1
5G
IM
BOC
A+
AB+
BFBA
FBB
GND
Encoder E
GND
+5V
+5V
VCC
VCC
Keypad
connector
Sub-B
Power
Supply
12V-15V DC
Chapter 3 – Function Setting
48
| Operation Example (3) |
2nd motor operation | ||
| [Operation condition] -. Control mode: V/F control -. 1st motor + 2nd motor Operation by exchange using [2nd Func] (Values can be set differently) -. Frequency command: Using Multi-step operation (1st motor --- 50[Hz] as main speed, 2nd motor --- 20[Hz] with P1 terminal set as multi- step operation) -. Accel/Decel time: 1st motor --- Accel time: 15[Sec], Decel time: 25 [Sec] 2nd motor --- Accel time: 30[Sec], Decel time: 40 [Sec] -. Drive mode: Run/Stop via FX/RX |
|||
| [Wiring] IM 1st motor IM 2nd motor 1st /2nd motor Switch-over |
|||
| Step | Parameter setting | Code | Description |
| 1 | Control Mode Selection | FU2-39 | Set it to 0 {V/F}. |
| 2 | Drive mode | DRV-3 | Set it to Fx/Rx-1. |
| 3 | Frequency Mode setting | DRV-4 | Set it to 0 {keypad-1}. 1st motor freq setting |
| 4 | Multi-function input terminal P2 | I/O-13 | Set P2 to 2nd Func. |
| 5 | Multi-function input terminal P1 | I/O-12 | Set P1 to Speed-L. 2nd motor freq setting |
| 6 | Freq setting for 1st motor | DRV-0 | Set it to 50[Hz]. |
| 7 | Accel/Decel time setting for 1st motor |
DRV-1, DRV-2 |
Set Accel/Decel time to 15[sec]/25[sec]. |
| 8 | Freq setting for 2nd motor | DRV-5 | Set it to 10[Hz]. |
| 9 | Accel/Decel time setting for 2nd motor |
FU2-81/82 | Set Accel/Decel time to 30[sec]/50[sec]. |
| 10 | 1st motor operation | Set it as main motor by turning P1, P2, output relay OFF. Run the motor in FWD/REV direction using FX/RX terminal. |
|
| 11 | 2nd motor operation | Set 2nd motor parameters by turning terminal P2 ON. Change the freq setting to 20[Hz] by turning terminal P1 ON. Change 2nd motor terminal by turning output relay ON. Run the motor in FWD/REV direction by terminal FX/RX. |
RSTG
U V W
B1 B2
FX
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
P2
P3
CM
VR
V1
5G
FM
5G
30A
30C
30B
AXA
AXC
3P
AC
input
FX
RX
BX
CM
1st / 2nd
motor
select
Chapter 3 – Function Settings
49
| Operation Example (4) |
Sensorless_S Control + Multi-speed operation + Analog output (FM) | ||
| [Operation condition] -. Control mode: Sensorless Speed control -. Frequency command: Multi-function input from SUB-A and 8 step speed operation (Multi-speed 7 + Jog freq 1) -. Accel time: 5 [Sec], Decel time: 5 [Sec] -. Drive mode: Run/Stop and speed output via terminal FX/RX |
|||
| [Wiring] P4 P5 P6 JOG FX RX Output freq [Hz] Output freq meter 0 -10 V, Pulse IM S/W S/W |
|||
| Step | Parameter setting | Code | Description |
| 1 | Control Mode Selection | FU2-39 | Set it to Sensorless_S. |
| 2 | Drive mode | DRV-3 | Set it to FX/RX-1. |
| 3 | Multi-function input | EXT-2 ~ 4 | Set P3, P4, P5 to Speed-L, Speed-M, Speed-H. |
| 4 | FM (Frequency Meter) Output Selection |
I/O-40 | Set it to Frequency output. |
| 5 | FM Output Adjustment | I/O-41 | Output V = 10V x output freq x output gain (ex100%) / (Max freq x 100) |
| 6 | Terminal FX | Motor runs in forward direction at the set freq via P3, 4, 5 if Fx terminal is ON. Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 5 [sec] if FX terminal is OFF. |
|
| 7 | Terminal RX | Motor runs in reverse direction at the set freq via P3, 4, 5 if RX terminal is ON. Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 5 [sec] if RX terminal is OFF. |
I/O-20 Speed 4
I/O-21 Speed 5
I/O-22 Speed 6
I/O-23 Speed 7
Multi-speed freq setting range
DRV-00 Speed 0
DRV-05 Speed 1
DRV-06 Speed 2
DRV-07 Speed 3
ON ON ON ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SPD 0 SPD 1 SPD 2 SPD 3 SPD 4 SPD 5 SPD 6 SPD 7 JOG
R S T G
U V W
B1 B2
FX
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
P2
P3
CM
FM
5G
30C
30B
AXA
AXC
P4
CN5 P5
P6
CM
Sub - A FM
30A
Chapter 3 – Function Setting
50
| Operation Example (5) |
Vector_SPD Control | ||
| [Operation condition] -. Control Mode: Vector_SPD Control, -. Encoder specification: Pulse number (1024), Line Drive type -. Freq command: set 55[Hz] via KPD-1 -. Accel/Decel time: Accel – 15 [sec], Decel – 25 [sec], -. Drive mode: Run/Stop via terminal FX/RX |
|||
| [Wiring] 3P AC Input MODE PROG ENT REV SHIFT ESC STOP RESET FWD LC-200 |
|||
| Step | Parameter setting | Code | Description |
| 1 | Motor related setting | FU2-30 ~ FU2-36 |
Set motor capacity , pole number, rated voltage/ current/slip and efficiency. |
| 2 | Encoder related setting | EXT-12 EXT-15 EXT-16 |
Set EXT-12 to Feed-back, EXT-1 to A+B. Set EXT-16 to 1024. |
| 3 | Control Mode Selection | Fu2-39 | Encoder related setting should be done before setting control mode to Vector_SPD. |
| 4 | Auto-tuning | FU2-40 | Auto-tuning starts when set to ALL. Read the encoder manual carefully to clear the error if the messages ”Enc Err”, “Enc Rev” are displayed. |
| 5 | Keypad input setting | DRV-4 DRV-0 |
Set DRV-4 to KPD-1 and press the Prog key to set 55 [Hz] in Drv- 0. |
| 6 | Accel/Decel time setting | DRV DRV- -2 3 | A Decel time: set 25[Sec] ccel time: set 15[Sec] |
| 7 | Drive mode | DRV-3 | Set it to FX/RX-1. |
| 8 | FX/RX terminal | Motor runs with Accel time 15 [Sec] at 55 [Hz] if FX/RX terminal is turned ON. Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 25 [Sec] if FX/RX terminal is turned OFF. |
AOC
R S T G
U V W
B1 B2
FX
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
P2
P3
CM
VR
V1
5G
IM
BOC
A+
AB+
BFBA
FBB
GND
Encoder E
GND
+5V
+5V
VCC
VCC
Keypad
connector
Sub-B
51
CHAPTER 4 - QUICK-START PROCEDURES
These Quick-Start Up instructions are for those applications where:
l The user wants to get the iS5 inverter started quickly.
l The factory-preset values are suitable for the user application.
The factory-preset values are shown on the ‘Chapter 5 - Parameter List’. The iS5 inverter is configured to operate a
motor at 60Hz (base frequency). If the application requires coordinated control with other controllers, it is
recommended the user become familiar with all parameters and features of the inverter before applying AC power.
1. Mounting the inverter (mount the inverter as described in ‘1.3 Mounting’)
l Install in a clean, dry location.
l Allow a sufficient clearance around top and sides of inverter.
l The ambient temperature should not exceed 40°C (104°F).
l If two or more inverters are installed in an enclosure, add additional cooling.
2. Wiring the inverter (connect wiring as described in ‘1.7 Power Terminals’)
l AC power should be turned OFF.
l Verify the AC power matches the nameplate voltage.
l Remove the screw on the bottom front cover of the inverter for terminal board access (For terminal board
access on 15~ 30HP inverters you must disconnect the keypad cable from the inverter and fully remove the
cover).
Chapter 4 – Quick start procedures
52
4.1 Operating using keypad
1. Apply AC power.
2. LCD: Press [? ] key three times.
7-Seg: Rotate the encoder knob until
‘03’is displayed.
3. LCD: Press [PROG] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
4. LCD: Press [? ] key one time.
7-Seg: Rotate the encoder knob left.
5. LCD: Press [PROG] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
6. Press [PROG/ENT] key.
7. LCD: Press [PROG] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
8. LCD: Press [SHIFT/ESC] key and
press [? ] key to increase the
command frequency.
7-Seg: Rotate the encoder knob right
to change the command frequency.
The changing digit moves by pressing
the [SHIFT/ESC] key.
9. LCD: Press [ENT] key to save the
data.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key to
save the data.
10. LCD: Press [FWD] or [REV] key to
start motor.
7-Seg: Press [RUN] key to start
motor.
11. Press [STOP/RESET] key to stop
motor.
LCD Display 7-Segment Display
DRV?T/K 0.0 A
00 STP 0.00Hz
DRV? Cmd. freq
00 0.00Hz
DRV? Cmd. freq
00 60.00Hz
DRV?K/K 0.0 A
00 STP 60.00Hz
DRV? Drive mode
03 Fx/Rx-1
DRV? Drive mode
03 Fx/Rx-1
DRV? Drive mode
03 Keypad
DRV? Drive mode
03 Keypad
The PROG/ENT LED turned ON.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
The DRV LED is ON.
The DRV LED is turned ON.
DRV?K/K 0.0 A
00 STP 0.00Hz
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
The FWD or REV LED starts blinking. The RUN LED starts blinking.
To change the motor running
direction, change DRV 13 to ‘1’.
The STOP/RESET LED starts blinking. The STOP/RESET LED starts blinking.
Chapter 4 – Quick start procedures
53
4.2 Operation using Control Terminals
1. Install a potentiometer on terminals
V1, VR, 5G and connect wiring as
shown below.
2. Apply AC power.
3. Confirm that the DRV 03 is set at
‘Fx/Rx-1’.
4. LCD: Press [? ] key to move DRV 04.
7-Seg: Rotate encoder knob until ‘04’
is displayed.
5. LCD: Press [PROG] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
6. LCD: Press [? ] key and set at ‘V1’.
7-Seg: Rotate encoder knob and set
at ‘2’.
7. LCD: Press [ENT] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
8. Press [SHIFT/ESC] key.
9. Set the frequency by rotating the
potentiometer.
10. Close the FX or RX contact to run the
motor.
11. Open the FX or RX contact to stop the
motor.
LCD Display 7-Segment Display
DRV?T/K 0.0 A
00 STP 0.00Hz
The DRV LED is ON.
DRV? Drive mode
03 Fx/Rx-1
DRV? Freq mode
04 Keypad-1
DRV? Freq mode
04 Keypad-1
DRV? Freq mode
04 V1
DRV? Freq mode
04 V1
DRV?T/V 0.0 A
00 STP 0.00Hz
DRV?T/V 0.0 A
00 STP 60.00Hz
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned OFF.
The FWD or REV LED starts blinking. The RUN LED starts blinking.
The STOP/RESET LED starts blinking. The STOP/RESET LED starts blinking.
1 ㏀ , 1/2 W
P1 P2
| JOG CM CM BX RST I FM 5G |
P3 FX RX NC
VR VI
Chapter 4 – Quick start procedures
54
4.3 Operation using Keypad and Control Terminals
4.3.1 Frequency set by External Source and Run/Stop by Keypad
1. Install a potentiometer on terminals V1, VR, 5G and connect wiring as shown below left.
When a ‘4 to 20mA’current source is used as the frequency reference, use terminals I and 5G as shown below.
2. Apply AC power.
3. LCD: Press [? ] key to move DRV 03.
7-Seg: Rotate encoder knob until ‘03’is
displayed.
4. LCD: Press [PROG] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
5. LCD: Press [? ] key one time.
7-Seg: Rotate encoder knob and set at ‘0’.
6. LCD: Press [ENT] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
7. Confirm that the DRV 04 is set at ‘V1’.
8. Press [SHIFT/ESC] key.
Set the frequency by rotating the
potentiometer.
9. LCD: Press [FWD] or [REV] key.
7-Seg: Press [RUN] key.
| P1 | P2 | P3 | FX | RX | NC | VR | VI |
| JOG | CM | CM | BX | RST | I | FM | 5G |
4 to 20mA signal
1 ㏀ , 1/2 W
P1 P2
| JOG CM CM BX RST I FM 5G |
P3 FX RX NC
VR VI
DRV 04 must be set at V1. DRV 04 must be set at I.
DRV?T/K 0.0 A
00 STP 0.00Hz
The DRV LED is ON.
DRV? Drive mode
03 Fx/Rx-1
DRV? Drive mode
03 Fx/Rx-1
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
DRV? Drive mode
03 Keypad
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
DRV? Drive mode
03 Keypad
The PROG/ENT LED is turned OFF.
DRV? Freq mode
04 V1
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
DRV?T/V 0.0 A
00 STP 60.00Hz
The FWD or REV LED starts blinking.
The RUN LED starts blinking.
To change the motor running
direction, change DRV 13 to ‘1’.
Chapter 4 – Quick start procedures
55
4.3.2 Frequency set by Keypad and Run/Stop by External Source.
1. Connect wiring as shown below.
2. Apply AC power.
3. Confirm that the DRV 03 is set at ‘Fx/Rx-1’.
4. Confirm that the DRV 04 is set at
‘Keypad-1’.
5. Press [SHIFT/ESC] key.
6. LCD: Press [PROG] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
7. LCD: Set the frequency using [SHIFT/ESC]
and [? ] key.
7-Seg: Set the frequency by rotating the
encoder knob.
8. LCD: Press [ENT] key to save the data.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key to save the
data.
9. Close the FX or RX contact to run the motor.
10. Open the FX or RX contact to stop the
motor.
LCD Display 7-Segment Display
| P1 | P2 | P3 | FX | RX | NC | VR | VI |
| JOG | CM | CM | BX | RST | I | FM | 5G |
DRV?T/K 0.0 A
00 STP 0.00Hz
DRV? Drive mode
03 Fx/Rx-1
DRV? Freq mode
04 Keypad-1
DRV?T/K 0.0 A
00 STP 0.00Hz
DRV? Cmd. freq
00 0.00Hz
DRV?T/V 0.0 A
00 STP 60.00Hz
The FWD or REV LED starts blinking.
DRV? Cmd. freq
00 60.00Hz
The FWD or REV LED starts blinking.
The DRV LED is ON.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
The RUN LED starts blinking.
The RUN LED starts blinking.
56
CHAPTER 5 - PARAMETER LIST
5.1 Drive Group [DRV]
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| DRV-0011 | Command Frequency or Command Torque (Output Frequency/ Torque during motor run, Reference Frequency/ Torque during motor stop) Output Current (LCD) |
Cmd. freq or Cmd. Trq F or r (DRV-13) |
0 to FU1-20 (Max. freq) | 0.01 | 0.00 [Hz] | Yes | 79 |
| DRV-01 | Acceleration Time | Acc. time 01 | 0 to 6000 | 0.1 | 20.0 [sec] | Yes | 80 |
| DRV-02 | Deceleration Time | Dec. time 02 | 0 to 6000 | 0.1 | 30.0 [sec] | Yes | 81 |
| Keypad 0 | DRV-03 | Drive Mode (Run/Stop Method) |
Drive mode 03 | - | Fx/Rx -1 | No | 81 |
| Fx/Rx -1 1 | |||||||
| Fx/Rx -2 2 | |||||||
| Keypad-1 0 | DRV-04 | Frequency Mode or Torque Mode (Frequency/Torque setting Method) |
Freq mode or Torque mode 04 |
- | Keypad-1 | No | 82 |
| Keypad-2 1 | |||||||
| V1 2 | |||||||
| I 3 | |||||||
| V1+I 4 | |||||||
| DRV-05 | Step Frequency 1 | Step freq-1 05 | 10.00 [Hz] | 0 to FU1-20 (0 to Max. freq) |
0.01 | Yes | 83 |
| DRV-06 | Step Frequency 2 | Step freq-2 06 | 20.00 [Hz] | ||||
| DRV-07 | Step Frequency 3 | Step freq-3 07 | 30.00 [Hz] | ||||
| DRV-08 | Output Current | Current 08 | Load Current in RMS | - | [A] | - | 84 |
| DRV-09 | Motor Speed | Speed 09 | Motor Speed in rpm | - | [rpm] | - | 84 |
| DRV-10 | DC link Voltage | DC link Vtg 10 | DC Link Voltage inside inverter | - | [V] | - | 84 |
| DRV-11 | User Display Selection | User disp 11 | Selected in FU2-73 (User Disp) | - | - | - | 84 |
| DRV-12 | Fault Display | Fault 12 | - - | - | None nOn |
- | 84 |
| 0 [Forward] Not available 1 [reverse] |
DRV-13 | Motor Direction Set | Not displayed in LCD keypad 13 |
- | 0 | Yes | 85 |
| DRV-14 | Target/Output Frequency Display |
Tar/Out Freq. 14 | - - | - | 0.00 [Hz] | Yes | 85 |
| DRV-1512 | Reference/Feedback Frequency Display |
Ref/Fbk Freq. 15 | - - | - | 0.00 [Hz] | Yes | 85 |
| Hz disp 0 Rpm disp 1 |
DRV-16 | Speed Unit Selection | Hz/Rpm Disp 16 | - | - | Yes | 85 |
| DRV-20 | FU1 Group Selection | 20 21 22 Not displayed in LCD keypad 23 |
85 | Not available Press [PROG/ENT] key |
- | 1 | Yes |
| DRV-21 | FU2 Group Selection | 85 | |||||
| DRV-22 | I/O Group Selection | 85 | |||||
| DRV-2313 | EXT Group Selection | 85 |
11 The speed unit is changed to [%] when FU2-39 is set to ‘Sensorless_T’or ‘Vector_TRQ’.
12 Code DRV-15 appears only when FU2-47 is set to ‘Yes’.
13 Code DRV-23 through DRV-24 appears only when a Sub-Board or an Option Board is installed.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
57
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| DRV-24 | COM Group Selection | 24 25 |
- | 1 | Yes | 85 | |
| DRV-25 | APP Group Selection | - | 1 | Yes | 85 |
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
58
5.2 Function 1 Group [FU1]
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| FU1-00 | Jump to Desired Code # | Jump code Not displayed | 1 to 99 Not available | 1 | 1 | Yes | 87 |
| None 0 Forward Prev 1 Reverse Prev 2 |
FU1-03 | Run Prevention | Run Prev. 03 | - | None | No | 87 |
| Linear 0 S-curve 1 U-curve 2 Minimum 3 Optimum 4 |
FU1-05 | Acceleration Pattern | Acc. pattern 05 | - | Linear | No | 87 |
| Linear 0 S-curve 1 U-curve 2 Minimum 3 Optimum 4 |
FU1-06 | Deceleration Pattern | Dec. pattern 06 | - | Linear | No | 87 |
| Decel 0 DC-brake 1 Free-run 2 |
FU1-07 | Stop Mode | Stop mode 07 | - | Decel | No | 88 |
| FU1-0814 | DC Injection Braking Frequency |
DcBr freq 08 | FU1-22 to 60 [Hz] | 0.01 | 5.00 [Hz] | No | 89 |
| FU1-09 | DC Injection Braking On-delay Time |
DcBlk time 09 | 0 to 60 [sec] | 0.01 | 0.1 [sec] | No | |
| FU1-10 | DC Injection Braking Voltage |
DcBr value 10 | 0 to 200 [%] | 1 | 50 [%] | No | |
| FU1-11 | DC Injection Braking Time |
DcBr time 11 | 0 to 60 [sec] | 0.1 | 1.0 [sec] | No | |
| FU1-12 | Starting DC Injection Braking Voltage |
DcSt value 12 | 0 to 200 [%] | 1 | 50 [%] | No | 90 |
| FU1-13 | Starting DC Injection Braking Time |
DcSt time 13 | 0 to 60 [sec] | 0.1 | 0.0 [sec] | No | |
| FU1-14 | Pre-excitation Time | PreExTime 14 | 0 to 60 [sec] | 0.1 | 1.0 [sec] | No | 90 |
| FU1-15 | Hold Time | Hold Time 15 | 0 to 1000 [ms] | 1 | 1000 [ms] | No | 91 |
| FU1-16 | Pre-excitation Current | Flux Force 16 | 100 to 500 [%] | 0.1 | 100.0 [%] | No | 91 |
| FU1-20 | Maximum Frequency | Max freq 20 | 40 to 400 [Hz] | 0.01 | 60.00 [Hz] | No | 91 |
| FU1-21 | Base Frequency | Base freq 21 | 30 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 60.00 [Hz] | No | |
| FU1-22 | Starting Frequency | Start freq 22 | 0.01 to 10 [Hz] | 0.01 | 0.50 [Hz] | No | |
| No 0 Yes 1 |
FU1-23 | Frequency Limit selection | Freq limit 23 | - | No | No | 92 |
| FU1-2415 | Low Limit Frequency | F-limit Lo 24 | 0 to FU1-25 | 0.01 | 0.50 [Hz] | Yes | |
| FU1-25 | High Limit Frequency | F-limit Hi 25 | FU1-24 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 60.00 [Hz] | No | |
| Manual 0 Auto 1 |
FU1-26 | Manual/Auto Torque Boost Selection |
Torque boost 26 | - | Manual | No | 92 |
14 Code FU1-08 through FU1-11 appears only when FU1-07 is set to ‘DC-Brake’.
15 Code FU1-24 through FU1-25 appears only when FU1-23 is set to ‘Yes’.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
59
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| FU1-27 | Torque Boost in Forward Direction |
Fwd boost 27 | 0 to 15 [%] | 0.1 | 2.0 [%] | No | |
| FU1-28 | Torque Boost in Reverse Direction |
Rev boost 28 | 0 to 15 [%] | 0.1 | 2.0 [%] | No | |
| Linear 0 Square 1 User V/F 2 |
FU1-29 | Volts/Hz Pattern | V/F pattern 29 | - | Linear | No | 93 |
| FU1-3016 | User V/F – Frequency 1 | User freq 1 30 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 15.00 [Hz] | No | 94 |
| FU1-31 | User V/F – Voltage 1 | User volt 1 31 | 0 to 100 [%] | 1 | 25 [%] | No | |
| FU1-32 | User V/F – Frequency 2 | User freq 2 32 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 30.00 [Hz] | No | |
| FU1-33 | User V/F – Voltage 2 | User volt 2 33 | 0 to 100 [%] | 1 | 50 [%] | No | |
| FU1-34 | User V/F – Frequency 3 | User freq 3 34 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 45.00 [Hz] | No | |
| FU1-35 | User V/F – Voltage 3 | User volt 3 35 | 0 to 100 [%] | 1 | 75 [%] | No | |
| FU1-36 | User V/F – Frequency 4 | User freq 4 36 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 60.00 [Hz] | No | |
| FU1-37 | User V/F – Voltage 4 | User volt 4 37 | 0 to 100 [%] | 1 | 100 [%] | No | |
| FU1-38 | Output Voltage Adjustment |
Volt control 38 | 40 to 110 [%] | 0.1 | 100.0 [%] | No | 94 |
| FU1-39 | Energy Save Level | Energy save 39 | 0 to 30 [%] | 1 | 0 [%] | Yes | 94 |
| No 0 Yes 1 |
FU1-50 | Electronic Thermal Selection |
ETH select 50 | - | No | Yes | 95 |
| FU1-5117 | Electronic Thermal Level for 1 Minute |
ETH 1 min 51 | FU1-52 to 200 [%] | 1 | 180 [%] | Yes | |
| FU1-52 | Electronic Thermal Level for Continuous |
ETH cont 52 | 50 to FU1-51 (Maximum 150%) | 1 | 120 [%] | Yes | |
| Self-cool 0 Forced-cool 1 |
FU1-53 | Electronic Thermal Characteristic Selection (Motor Type) |
Motor type 53 | - | Self-cool | Yes | |
| FU1-54 | Overload Warning Level | OL level 54 | 30 to 150 [%] | 1 | 150 [%] | Yes | 96 |
| FU1-55 | Overload Warning Hold Time |
OL time 55 | 0 to 30 [sec] | 0.1 | 10.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| No 0 Yes 1 |
FU1-56 | Overload Trip Selection | OLT select 56 | - | Yes | Yes | 96 |
| FU1-57 | Overload Trip Level | OLT level 57 | 30 to 200 [%] | 1 | 180 [%] | Yes | |
| FU1-58 | Overload Trip Delay Time | OLT time 58 | 0 to 60 [sec] | 1 | 60.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| FU1-59 | Stall Prevention Mode Selection |
Stall prev. 59 | 000 to 111 (Bit Set) |
bit | 000 | No | 97 |
| FU1-60 | Stall Prevention Level | Stall level 60 | 30 to 250 [%] | 1 | 180 [%] | No | |
| FU1-99 | Return Code | Not displayed 99 | Not available 1 | - | 1 | - | 98 |
16 Code FU1-30 through FU1-37 appears only when FU1-29 is set to ‘User V/F’.
17 Code FU1-51 through FU1-53 appears only when FU1-50 is set to ‘Yes’.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
60
5.3 Function 2 Group [FU2]
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| FU2-00 | Jump to desired code # | Jump code Not displayed | 1 to 99 Not available | 1 | 1 | Yes | 99 |
| FU2-01 | Previous Fault History 1 | Last trip-1 01 | By pressing [PROG] and [? ] key, the frequency, current, and operational status at the time of fault can be seen. |
- | None | - | 99 |
| FU2-02 | Previous Fault History 2 | Last trip-2 02 | |||||
| FU2-03 | Previous Fault History 3 | Last trip-3 03 | |||||
| FU2-04 | Previous Fault History 4 | Last trip-4 04 | |||||
| FU2-05 | Previous Fault History 5 | Last trip-5 05 | |||||
| No 0 Yes 1 |
FU2-06 | Erase Fault History | Erase trips 06 | - | No | Yes | |
| FU2-07 | Dwell Frequency | Dwell freq 07 | FU1-22 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 5.00 [Hz] | No | 100 |
| FU2-08 | Dwell Time | Dwell time 08 | 0 to 10 [sec] | 0.1 | 0.0 [sec] | No | |
| No 0 Yes 1 |
FU2-10 | Frequency Jump Selection |
Jump freq 10 | - | No | No | 100 |
| FU2-1118 | Jump Frequency 1 Low | Jump lo 1 11 | 0 to FU2-12 | 0.01 | 10.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| FU2-12 | Jump Frequency 1 High | Jump Hi 1 12 | FU2-11 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 15.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| FU2-13 | Jump Frequency 2 Low | Jump lo 2 13 | 0 to FU2-14 | 0.01 | 20.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| FU2-14 | Jump Frequency 2 High | Jump Hi 2 14 | FU2-13 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 25.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| FU2-15 | Jump Frequency 3 Low | Jump lo 3 15 | 0 to FU2-16 | 0.01 | 30.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| FU2-16 | Jump Frequency 3 High | Jump Hi 3 16 | FU2-15 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 35.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| FU2-17 | Start Curve for S-Curve Accel/Dedel Pattern |
Start Curve 17 | 0 to 100 [%] | 1 | 40% | No | 101 |
| FU2-18 | End Curve for S-Curve Accel/Dedel Pattern |
End Curve 18 | 0 to 100 [%] | 1 | 40% | No | 101 |
| FU2-19 | Input/Output Phase Loss Protection |
Trip select 19 | 00 to 11 (Bit Set) |
- | 00 | Yes | 101 |
| No 0 Yes 1 |
FU2-20 | Power ON Start Selection | Power-on run 20 | - | No | Yes | 101 |
| No 0 Yes 1 |
FU2-21 | Restart after Fault Reset | RST restart 21 | - | No | Yes | 102 |
| FU2-22 | Speed Search Selection | Speed Search 22 | 0000 to 1111 (Bit Set) |
- | 0000 | No | 102 |
| FU2-23 | Current Limit Level During Speed Search |
SS Sup-Curr 23 | 80 to 200 [%] | 1 | 150 [%] | Yes | |
| FU2-24 | P Gain During Speed Search |
SS P-gain 24 | 0 to 9999 | 1 | 100 | Yes | |
| FU2-25 | I Gain During speed search |
SS I-gain 25 | 0 to 9999 | 1 | 200 | Yes | |
| FU2-26 | Number of Auto Restart Attempt |
Retry number 26 | 0 to 10 | 1 | 0 | Yes | 103 |
| FU2-27 | Delay Time Before Auto Restart |
Retry Delay 27 | 0 to 60 [sec] | 0.1 | 1.0 [sec] | Yes | 103 |
| FU2-28 | Speed Search Hold Time | SS blk time 28 | 0 to 60 [sec] | 0.1 | 1.0 [sec] | No | 104 |
| FU2-30 | Rated Motor Selection | Motor select 30 | 0.75kW 0 | - | 19 | No | 104 |
18 Code FU2-11 through FU2-16 appears only when FU2-10 is set to ‘Yes’.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
61
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| 1.5kW 1 2.2kW 2 3.7kW 3 5.5kW 4 7.5kW 5 11.0kW 6 15.0kW 7 18.5kW 8 22.0kW 9 30.0 kW 10 37.0 kW 11 45.0 kW 12 55.0 kW 13 75.0 kW 14 |
|||||||
| FU2-31 | Number of Motor Poles | Pole number 31 | 2 to 12 | 1 | 4 | No | 104 |
| FU2-32 | Rated Motor Slip | Rated-Slip 32 | 0 t o10 [Hz] | 0.01 | No | 104 | 20 |
| FU2-33 | Rated Motor Current (RMS) |
Rated-Curr 33 | 1 to 200 [A] | 1 | No | 104 | |
| FU2-34 | No Load Motor Current (RMS) |
Noload-Curr 34 | 0.5 to 200 [A] | 1 | No | 104 | |
| FU2-35 | Motor Rated Voltage | Motor Volt 35 | 180..460 [V] | No | 104 | ||
| FU2-36 | Motor Efficiency | Efficiency 36 | 70 to 100 [%] | 1 | No | 104 | |
| FU2-37 | Load Inertia | Inertia rate 37 | 0 to 1 | 1 | 0 | No | 104 |
| FU2-38 | Carrier Frequency | Carrier freq 38 | 1 to 15 [kHz] | 1 | 5 [kHz] | Yes | 106 |
| V/F 0 Slip comp 1 Sensorless_S 2 Sensorless_T 3 Vector_SPD 4 Vector_TRQ 5 |
FU2-39 | Control Mode Selection | Control mode 40 | - | V/F | No | 106 |
| No 0 All 1 Rs + Lsigma 2 Enc Test 3 Tr 4 |
FU2-40 | Auto Tuning | Auto tuning 41 | - | No | No | 108 |
| FU2-4121 | Stator Resistance of Motor |
Rs 42 | 0 to (depend on FU2-30) [ohm] | 0.001 | No | 22 | |
| FU2-42 | Leakage Inductance of Motor |
Lsigma 44 | 0 to (depend on FU2-30) [mH] | 0.001 | No | ||
| FU2-43 | Stator Inductance of Motor |
Ls 43 | 0 to (depend on FU2-30) [mH] | No |
19 The rated motor is automatically set according to the inverter model name. If different, set the motor capacity connected.
20 This value is automatically entered according to the rated motor set in FU2-30. If different, set the correct value of the motor.
21 Code FU2-41 through FU2-46 appears only when FU2-39 is set to ‘Sensorless_X’or ‘Vector_XXX’.
22 This value is automatically entered according to the rated motor set in FU2-30. If different, set the correct value of the motor.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
62
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| FU2-44 | Rotor Time Constant | Tr 44 | 0 to (depend on FU2-30) [mS] | No | |||
| FU2-45 | P Gain for Sensorless Control |
SL P-gain 45 | 0 to 32767 | 1 | 1000 | Yes | 109 |
| FU2-46 | I Gain for Sensorless Control |
SL I-gain 46 | 0 to 32767 | 1 | 100 | Yes | 109 |
| No 0 Yes 1 |
FU2-47 | PID Operation Selection | Proc PI mode 47 | - | No | No | 110 |
| FU2-4823 | PID F Gain | PID F-gain 48 | 0 to 999.9 [%] | 0.1 | 0 [%] | Yes | 110 |
| None 0 | FU2-49 | PID Auxiliary Reference Mode Selection |
Aux Ref Mode 49 | - | None | No | |
| Keypad-1 1 | |||||||
| Keypad-2 2 | |||||||
| V1 3 | |||||||
| I 4 | |||||||
| V2 5 | |||||||
| FU2-50 | PID Output Direction Selection |
PID Out Dir 50 | Target freq. 0 | - | Target freq. | No | |
| I 0 V1 1 V2 2 |
FU2-51 | PID Feedback Signal Selection |
PID F/B 51 | - | I | No | 110 |
| FU2-52 | P Gain for PID Control | PID P-gain 52 | 0 to 999.9 [%] | 0.1 | 1.0 [%] | Yes | |
| FU2-53 | I Gain for PID Control | PID I-time 53 | 0 to 32.0 [sec] | 0.1 | 10.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| FU2-54 | D Gain for PID Control | PID D-time 54 | 0 to 1000 [msec] | 0.1 | 0.0 [msec] | Yes | |
| FU2-55 | High Limit Frequency for PID Control |
PID limit-H 55 | 0 to 300.00 [Hz] | 0.01 | 60.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| FU2-56 | Low Limit Frequency for PID Control |
PID limit-L 56 | 0 to 300.00 [Hz] | 0.01 | 0.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| No 0 Yes 1 |
FU2-57 | PID Output Inversion | PID Out Inv. 57 | - | No | No | 111 |
| FU2-58 | PID Output Scale | PID Out Scale 58 | 0.1 to 999.9 [%] | 0.1 | 100 [%] | No | |
| FU2-59 | PID P2 Gain | PID P2-gain 59 | 0 to 999.9 [%] | 0.1 | 100 [%] | No | |
| FU2-60 | P Gain Scale | P-gain Scale 60 | 0 to 100 [%] | 0.1 | 100 [%] | No | |
| FU2-69 | Accel/Decel Change Frequency |
Acc/Dec ch F 69 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.00 [Hz] | No | 114 | |
| Max freq 0 Delta freq 1 |
FU2-70 | Reference Frequency for Accel and Decel |
Acc/Dec freq 70 | - | Max freq | No | 114 |
| 0.01 [sec] 0 0.1 [sec] 1 1 [sec] 2 |
FU2-71 | Accel/Decel Time Scale | Time scale 71 | 0.01 | 0.1 [sec] | Yes | 114 |
| FU2-72 | Power On Display | PowerOn disp 72 | 0 to 12 | 1 | 0 | Yes | 114 |
| Voltage 0 Watt 1 |
FU2-73 | User Display Selection | User disp 73 | - | Voltage | Yes | 115 |
| FU2-74 | Gain for Motor Speed Display |
RPM factor 74 | 1 to 1000 [%] | 1 | 100 [%] | Yes | 115 |
23 Code FU2-48 through FU2-62 appears only when FU2-47 is set to ‘Yes’.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
63
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| None 0 Int. DB-R 1 Ext. DB-R 2 |
FU2-75 | DB (Dynamic Braking) Resistor Mode Selection |
DB mode 75 | - | Int. DB-R | Yes | 115 |
| FU2-7624 | Duty of Dynamic Braking Resistor |
DB %ED 76 | 0 to 30 [%] | 1 | 10 [%] | Yes | 115 |
| FU2-79 | Software Version | S/W version 79 | Ver x.xx | - | - | - | 116 |
| FU2-8125 | 2nd Acceleration Time | 2nd Acc time 81 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 5.0 [sec] | Yes | 116 |
| FU2-82 | 2nd Deceleration Time | 2nd Dec time 82 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 10.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| FU2-83 | 2nd Base Frequency | 2nd BaseFreq 83 | 30 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 60.00 [Hz] | No | |
| Linear 0 Square 1 User V/F 2 |
FU2-84 | 2nd V/F Pattern | 2nd V/F 84 | - | Linear | No | |
| FU2-85 | 2nd Forward Torque Boost | 2nd F-boost 85 | 0 to 15 [%] | 0.1 | 2.0 [%] | No | |
| FU2-86 | 2nd Reverse Torque Boost |
2nd R-boost 86 | 0 to 15 [%] | 0.1 | 2.0 [%] | No | |
| FU2-87 | 2nd Stall Prevention Level | 2nd Stall 87 | 30 to 150 [%] | 1 | 150[%] | No | |
| FU2-88 | 2nd Electronic Thermal Level for 1 minute |
2nd ETH 1min 88 | FU2-89 to 200 [%] | 1 | 150 [%] | Yes | |
| FU2-89 | 2nd Electronic Thermal Level for continuous |
2nd ETH cont 89 | 50 to FU2-88 (Maximum 150%) |
1 | 100 [%] | Yes | |
| FU2-90 | 2nd Rated Motor Current | 2nd R-Curr 90 | 1 to 200 [A] | 0.1 | 3.6 [A] | No | |
| No 0 Yes 1 |
FU2-91 | Read Parameters into Keypad from Inverter |
Para. Read 91 | - | No | No | 116 |
| No 0 Yes 1 |
FU2-92 | Write Parameters to Inverter from Keypad |
Para. Write 92 | - | No | No | |
| No 0 All Groups 1 DRV 2 FU1 3 FU2 4 I/O 5 EXT 6 |
FU2-93 | Initialize Parameters | Para. Init 93 | - | No | No | 117 |
| FU2-94 | Parameter Write Protection |
Para. Lock 94 | 0 to 255 | 1 | 0 | Yes | 117 |
| FU2-99 | Return Code | Not displayed 99 | Not available [PROG/ENT] or [SHIFT/ESC] |
- | 1 | Yes | 117 |
☞ Note: FU2-41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46 not displayed when FU2-39 is set to V/f or Slip compen.
24 Code FU2-76 appears only when FU2-75 is set to ‘Ext. DB-R’.
25 Code FU2-81 through FU2-90 appear only when one of I/O-12 ~ I/O-14 is set to ‘2nd function’.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
64
5.4 Input/Output Group [I/O]
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| I/O-00 | Jump to Desired Code # | Jump code Not displayed | 1 to 99 Not available | 1 | 1 | Yes | 118 |
| I/O-01 | Filtering Time Constant for V1 Signal Input |
V1 filter 01 | 0 to 9999 [ms] | 1 | 10 [ms] | Yes | 118 |
| I/O-02 | V1 Input Minimum Voltage |
V1 volt x1 02 | 0 to 10 [V] | 0.01 | 0.00 [V] | Yes | |
| I/O-03 | Frequency Corresponding to V1 Input Minimum Voltage |
V1 freq y1/ V1 [%] y1 03 |
0 to FU1-20 [Hz]/ 0-150 [%] |
0.01 | 0.0 [Hz]/ 0[%] |
Yes | |
| I/O-04 | V1 Input Maximum Voltage |
V1 volt x2 04 | 0 to 10 [V] | 0.01 | 10.00 [V] | Yes | |
| I/O-05 | Frequency Corresponding to V1 Input Maximum Voltage |
V1 freq y2/ V1 [%] y2 05 |
0 to FU1-20/ 0-150 [%] |
0.01 | 60.00 [Hz]/ 100[%] |
Yes | |
| I/O-06 | Filtering Time Constant for I Signal Input |
I filter 06 | 0 to 9999 [ms] | 1 | 10 [ms] | Yes | 118 |
| I/O-07 | I Input Minimum Current | I curr x1 07 | 0 to 20 [mA] | 0.01 | 4.00 [mA] | Yes | |
| I/O-08 | Frequency Corresponding to I Input Minimum Current |
I freq y1/ I [%] y1 08 |
0 to FU1-20 0-150 [%] |
0.01 | 0.0 [Hz]/ 0[%] |
Yes | |
| I/O-09 | I Input Maximum Current | I curr x2 09 | 0 to 20 [mA] | 0.01 | 20.00 [mA] | Yes | 118 |
| I/O-10 | Frequency Corresponding to I Input Maximum Current |
I freq y2/ I [%] y2 10 |
0 to FU1-20/ 0-150 [%] |
0.01 | 60.00 [Hz]/ 100[%] |
Yes | |
| None 0 half of x1 1 below x1 2 |
I/O-11 | Criteria for Analog Input Signal Loss |
Wire broken 11 | - | None | Yes | 119 |
| Speed-L 0 Speed-M 1 Speed-H 2 XCEL-L 3 XCEL-M 4 XCEL-H 5 Dc-brake 6 2nd Func 7 Exchange 8 - Reserved - 9 Up 10 Down 11 3-Wire 12 Ext Trip-A 13 Ext Trip-B 14 iTerm Clear 15 Open-loop 16 Main-drive 17 |
I/O-12 | Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P1’Define |
P1 define 12 | - | Speed-L | Yes | 120 |
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
65
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| Analog hold 18 XCEL stop 19 P Gain2 20 SEQ-L 21 SEQ-M 22 SEQ-H 23 Manual 24 Go step 25 Hold step 26 Trv Off.Lo 27 Trv Off.Hi 28 Interlock1 29 Interlock2 30 Interlock3 31 Interlock4 32 Speed-X 33 Reset 34 BX 35 JOG 36 FX 37 RX 38 Ana Change 39 Pre excite 40 Spd/Trq 41 ASR P/PI 42 |
|||||||
| I/O-13 | Multi-function Input Terminal ‘P2’Define |
P2 define 13 | - | Speed-M | Yes | Same as Above | 120 |
| I/O-14 | Multi-function Input Terminal ‘P3’Define |
P3 define 14 | - | Speed-H | Yes | ||
| I/O-15 | Terminal Input Status | In status 15 | 000000000 to 111111111 | - | - | - | 126 |
| I/O-16 | Terminal Output Status | Out status 16 | 0000 to 1111 | - | - | - | |
| I/O-17 | Filtering Time Constant for Multi-Function Input Terminals |
Ti Filt Num 17 | 2 to 50 | 1 | 15 | Yes | 126 |
| I/O-20 | Jog Frequency Setting | Jog freq 20 | 10.00 [Hz] | Yes | 126 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 |
| I/O-21 | Step Frequency 4 | Step freq-4 21 | 40.00 [Hz] | Yes | 126 | ||
| I/O-22 | Step Frequency 5 | Step freq-5 22 | 50.00 [Hz] | Yes | |||
| I/O-23 | Step Frequency 6 | Step freq-6 23 | 40.00 [Hz] | Yes | |||
| I/O-24 | Step Frequency 7 | Step freq-7 24 | 30.00 [Hz] | Yes | |||
| I/O-25 | Acceleration Time 1 for Step Frequency |
Acc time-1 25 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 20.0 [sec] | Yes | 127 |
| I/O-26 | Deceleration Time 1 for Step Frequency |
Dec time-1 26 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 20.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| I/O-27 | Acceleration Time 2 | Acc time-2 27 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 30.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| I/O-28 | Deceleration Time 2 | Dec time-2 28 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 30.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| I/O-29 | Acceleration Time 3 | Acc time-3 29 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 40.0 [sec] | Yes |
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
66
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| I/O-30 | Deceleration Time 3 | Dec time-3 30 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 40.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| I/O-31 | Acceleration Time 4 | Acc time-4 31 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 50.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| I/O-32 | Deceleration Time 4 | Dec time-4 32 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 50.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| I/O-33 | Acceleration Time 5 | Acc time-5 33 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 40.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| I/O-34 | Deceleration Time 5 | Dec time-5 34 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 40.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| I/O-35 | Acceleration Time 6 | Acc time-6 35 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 30.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| I/O-36 | Deceleration Time 6 | Dec time-6 36 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 30.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| I/O-37 | Acceleration Time 7 | Acc time-7 37 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 20.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| I/O-38 | Deceleration Time 7 | Dec time-7 38 | 0 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 20.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| Frequency 0 Current 1 Voltage 2 DC link Vtg 3 Torque 4 |
I/O-40 | FM (Frequency Meter) Output Selection |
FM mode 40 | - | Frequency | Yes | 128 |
| I/O-41 | FM Output Adjustment | FM adjust 41 | 10 to 200 [%] | 1 | 100 [%] | Yes | |
| I/O-42 | Frequency Detection Level |
FDT freq 42 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 30.00 [Hz] | Yes | 128 |
| I/O-43 | Frequency Detection Bandwidth |
FDT band 43 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 10.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| FDT-1 0 FDT-2 1 FDT-3 2 FDT-4 3 FDT-5 4 OL 5 IOL 6 Stall 7 OV 8 LV 9 OH 10 Lost Command 11 Run 12 Stop 13 Steady 14 INV line 15 COMM line 16 Ssearch 17 Step pulse 18 Seq pulse 19 Ready 20 Trv. ACC 21 Trv. DEC 22 MMC 23 Zspd Dect 24 Torq Dect 25 |
I/O-44 | Multi-Function Auxiliary Contact Output Define (AXA, AXC) |
Aux mode 44 | - | Run | Yes | 129 |
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
67
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| I/O-45 | Fault Output Relay Setting (30A, 30B, 30C) |
Relay mode 45 | 000 to 111 (Bit Set) |
- | 010 | Yes | 133 |
| I/O-4626 | Inverter Number | Inv No. 46 | 1 to 31 | 1 | 1 | Yes | 133 |
| 1200 bps 0 2400 bps 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 |
I/O-47 | Baud Rate | Baud rate 47 | - | 9600 bps | Yes | 133 |
| None 0 FreeRun 1 Stop 2 |
I/O-48 | Operating selection at Loss of Freq. Reference |
Lost command 48 | - | None | Yes | 133 |
| I/O-49 | Waiting Time after Loss of Freq. Reference |
Time out 49 | 0.1 to 120 [sec] | 0.1 | 1.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| None 0 Auto-A 1 Auto-B 2 |
I/O-50 | Auto (Sequence) Operation selection |
Auto mode 50 | - | None | No | 134 |
| I/O-51 | Sequence Number Selection |
Seq select 51 | 1 to 5 | 1 | 1 | Yes | |
| I/O-52 | The Number of Steps of Sequence Number # |
Step number 52 | 1 to 8 | 1 | 2 | Yes | |
| I/O-5327 | 1st Step Frequency of Sequence 1 |
Seq1 / 1F 53 | 0.01 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 11.00 [Hz] | Yes | 135 |
| I/O-54 | Transient Time to 1st Step of Sequence 1 |
Seq1 / 1T 54 | 0.1 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 1.1 [sec] | Yes | |
| I/O-55 | Steady Speed Time at 1st Step of Sequence 1 |
Seq1 / 1S 55 | 0.1 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 1.1 [sec] | Yes | |
| Reverse 0 Forward 1 |
I/O-56 | Motor Direction of 1st Step of Sequence 1 |
Seq1 / 1D 56 | - | Forward | Yes | |
| I/O-57 | 1st Step Frequency of Sequence 2 |
Seq1 / 2F 57 | 0.01 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 21.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| I/O-58 | Transient Time to 1st Step of Sequence 2 |
Seq1 / 2T 58 | 0.1 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 1.1 [sec] | Yes | 135 |
| I/O-59 | Steady Speed Time at 1st Step of Sequence 2 |
Seq1 / 2S 59 | 0.1 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 1.1 [sec] | Yes | |
| Reverse 0 Forward 1 |
I/O-60 | Motor Direction of 1st Step of Sequence 2 |
Seq1 / 2D 60 | - | Forward | Yes | |
| I/O-85 | Step Frequency 8 | Step freq-8 85 | 20.00 [Hz] | Yes | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 126 |
| I/O-86 | Step Frequency 9 | Step freq-9 86 | 10.00 [Hz] | Yes | |||
| I/O-87 | Step Frequency 10 | Step freq-10 87 | 20.00 [Hz] | Yes | |||
| I/O-88 | Step Frequency 11 | Step freq-11 88 | 30.00 [Hz] | Yes | |||
| I/O-89 | Step Frequency 12 | Step freq-12 89 | 40.00 [Hz] | Yes |
26 Code I/O-46 through I/O-49 are used in Option Board like RS485, Device, Net and F-net etc.
27 The ‘Seq#’of code I/O-53 through I/O-60 varies according to the sequence number selected in I/O-51.
The parameter code may be extended to I/O-84 depending the number of steps set in I/O-52 because the steps can be set up to 8.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
68
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| I/O-90 | Step Frequency 13 | Step freq-13 90 | 50.00 [Hz] | Yes | |||
| I/O-91 | Step Frequency 14 | Step freq-14 91 | 40.00 [Hz] | Yes | |||
| I/O-92 | Step Frequency 15 | Step freq-15 92 | 30.00 [Hz] | Yes | |||
| Speed-L 0 Speed-M 1 Speed-H 2 XCEL-L 3 XCEL-M 4 XCEL-H 5 Dc-brake 6 2nd Func 7 Exchange 8 - Reserved - 9 Up 10 Down 11 3-Wire 12 Ext Trip-A 13 Ext Trip-B 14 iTerm Clear 15 Open-loop 16 Main-drive 17 Analog hold 18 XCEL stop 19 P Gain2 20 SEQ-L 21 SEQ-M 22 SEQ-H 23 Manual 24 Go step 25 Hold step 26 Trv Off.Lo 27 Trv Off.Hi 28 Interlock1 29 Interlock2 30 Interlock3 31 Interlock4 32 Speed-X 33 Reset 34 BX 35 JOG 36 FX 37 RX 38 Ana Change 39 Pre excite 40 Spd/Trq 41 ASR P/PI 42 |
I/O-93 | Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘RST’Define |
RST define 93 | - | Reset | Yes | 120 |
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
69
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| I/O-94 | Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘BX’Define |
BX define 94 | BX | Yes | 120 | Same as Above | - |
| I/O-95 | Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘JOG’Define |
JOG define 95 | JOG | Yes | 120 | ||
| I/O-96 | Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘FX’Define |
FX define 96 | FX | Yes | 120 | ||
| I/O-97 | Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘RX’Define |
RX define 97 | RX | Yes | 120 | ||
| I/O-99 | Return Code | Not Displayed 99 | Not available [PROG/ENT] or [SHIFT/ESC] |
- | 1 | Yes |
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
70
5.5 External Group [EXT]
EXT group appears only when the corresponding Sub-Board is installed.
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| EXT-00 | Jump to Desired Code # | Jump code Not displayed | 0 to 99 Not av ailable | 1 | 1 | Yes | 136 |
| None 0 SUB-A 1 SUB-B 2 SUB-C 3 SUB-D 4 SUB-E 5 SUB-F 6 SUB-G 7 SUB-H 8 |
EXT-01 | Sub Board Type Display | Sub B/D 01 | - | None | Automa tically set |
136 |
| Speed-L 0 Speed-M 1 Speed-H 2 XCEL-L 3 XCEL-M 4 XCEL-H 5 Dc-brake 6 2nd Func 7 Exchange 8 - Reserved - 9 Up 10 Down 11 3-Wire 12 Ext Trip-A 13 Ext Trip-B 14 iTerm Clear 15 Open-loop 16 Main-drive 17 Analog hold 18 XCEL stop 19 P Gain2 20 SEQ-L 21 SEQ-M 22 SEQ-H 23 Manual 24 Go step 25 Hold step 26 Trv Off.Lo 27 Trv Off.Hi 28 Interlock1 29 Interlock2 30 Interlock3 31 Interlock4 32 |
EXT-02 | Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P4’Define |
P4 define 02 | - | XCEL-L | Yes | 136 |
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
71
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| Speed-X 33 Reset 34 BX 35 JOG 36 FX 37 RX 38 Ana Change 39 Pre excite 40 Spd/Trq 41 ASR P/PI 42 |
|||||||
| EXT-03 | Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P5’Define |
P5 define 03 | - | XCEL-M | Yes | Same as Above | 136 |
| EXT-04 | Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P6’Define |
P6 define 04 | - | XCEL-H | Yes | ||
| None 0 Override 1 Reference 2 |
EXT-05 | V2 Mode Selection | V2 mode 05 | - | None | No | 137 |
| EXT-06 | Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal |
V2 filter 06 | 0 to 9999 [ms] | 1 | 10 [ms] | Yes | 137 |
| EXT-07 | V2 Input Minimum Voltage |
V2 volt x1 07 | 0 to V2 volt x2 [V] | 0.01 | 0.00 [V] | Yes | |
| EXT-08 | Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input Minimum Voltage |
V2 freq y1 08 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 0.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| EXT-09 | V2 Input Maximum Voltage |
V2 volt x2 09 | V2 volt x1 to 10 [V] | 0.01 | 10.00 [V] | Yes | |
| EXT-10 | Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input Maximum Voltage |
V2 freq y2 10 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 60.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| None 0 Feed-back 1 Reference 2 |
EXT-12 | Usage of Pulse Input Signal |
F mode 12 | - | None | No | 138 |
| Reverse 0 Forward 1 |
EXT-13 | Real Speed Direction | RealSpdDir 13 | - | - | - | 138 |
| EXT-14 | Encoder Feedback Frequency |
ENC FeedBack 14 | * [Hz] | - | - | - | 138 |
| A+B 0 A 1 - (A+B) 2 |
EXT-15 | Pulse Input Signal Selection |
F pulse set 15 | - | A+B | No | 139 |
| EXT-16 | Encoder Pulse Number | F pulse num 16 | 10 to 4096 | 1 | 1024 | No | 139 |
| EXT-17 | Filtering Time Constant for Pulse Input Signal |
F filter 17 | 0 to 9999 [ms] | 1 | 10 [ms] | Yes | 139 |
| EXT-18 | Pulse Input Minimum Frequency |
F pulse x1 18 | 0 to 10 [kHz] | 0.01 | 0.00 [kHz] | Yes | 139 |
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
72
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| EXT-19 | Frequency Output Corresponding to Pulse Input Minimum Frequency |
F freq y1 19 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 0.00 [Hz] | Yes | 139 |
| EXT-20 | Pulse Input Maximum Frequency |
F pulse x2 20 | 0 to 100 [kHz] | 0.01 | 10.00 [kHz] | Yes | |
| EXT-21 | Frequency Output Corresponding to Pulse Input Maximum Frequency |
F freq y2 21 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 60.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| EXT-22 | P-Gain for ‘Sub-B’ | PG P-gain 22 | 0 to 9999 | 1 | 3000 | Yes | 140 |
| EXT-23 | I-Gain for ‘Sub-B’ | PG I-gain 23 | 0 to 9999 | 1 | 50 | Yes | |
| EXT-24 | Slip Frequency for ‘Sub-B’Board |
PG Slip Freq 24 | 0 to 200 [%] | 1 | 100 [%] | Yes | 140 |
| EXT-25 | P-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD |
ASR P-Gain 25 | 10 to 500 [%] | 0.1 | 100.0 [%] | Yes | - |
| EXT-26 | I-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD |
ASR I-Gain 26 | 10 to 9999 [ms] | 1 | 200 [ms] | Yes | |
| EXT-27 | Forward Torque Limit | Trq + Limit 27 | 0 to 200 [%] | 1 | 180 [%] | Yes | |
| EXT-28 | Reverse Torque Limit | Trq - Limit 28 | 0 to 200 [%] | 1 | 180 [%] | Yes | |
| FDT-1 0 FDT-2 1 FDT-3 2 FDT-4 3 FDT-5 4 OL 5 IOL 6 Stall 7 OV 8 LV 9 OH 10 Lost Command 11 Run 12 Stop 13 Steady 14 INV line 15 COMM line 16 Ssearch 17 Step pulse 18 Seq pulse 19 Ready 20 Trv. ACC 21 Trv. DEC 22 MMC 23 Zspd Dect 24 Torq Dect 25 |
EXT-30 | Multi-Function Output Terminal ‘Q1’Define |
Q1 define 30 | - | FDT-1 | Yes | 140 |
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
73
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| EXT-31 | Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q2’Define |
Q2 define 31 | - | FDT-2 | Yes | Same as Above | 140 |
| EXT-32 | Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q3’Define |
Q3 define 32 | - | FDT-3 | Yes | ||
| Frequency 0 Current 1 Voltage 2 DC link Vtg 3 Torque 4 |
EXT-34 | LM (Load Meter) Output Selection |
LM mode 34 | - | Current | Yes | 140 |
| EXT-35 | LM Output Adjustment | LM adjust 35 | 10 to 200 [%] | 1 | 100 [%] | Yes | 140 |
| Frequency 0 Current 1 Voltage 2 DC link Vtg 3 Torque 4 |
EXT-40 | AM1 (Analog Meter 1) Output Selection |
AM1 mode 40 | - | Frequency | Yes | 141 |
| EXT-41 | AM1 Output Adjustment | AM1 adjust 41 | 10 to 200 [%] | 1 | 100 [%] | Yes | |
| Frequency 0 Current 1 Voltage 2 DC link Vtg 3 Torque 4 |
EXT-42 | AM2 (Analog Meter 2) Output Selection |
AM2 mode 42 | - | DC link Vtg | Yes | |
| EXT-43 | AM2 Output Adjustment | AM2 adjust 43 | 10 to 200 [%] | 1 | 100 [%] | Yes | |
| EXT-50 | Speed Limit Level | Speed Limit 44 | 0 to 100 [%] | 0.1 | 100 [%] | No | 142 |
| EXT-51 | Speed Limit Bias | Speed Bias 45 | 0 to 200 [%] | 0.1 | 100 [%] | No | |
| EXT-52 | Speed Limit Gain | Speed Gain 46 | 1 to 10 | 1 | 1 | No | |
| Reverse 0 Forward 1 |
EXT-53 | Speed Limit Direction | Speed Dir 47 | - | Forward | No | |
| EXT-54 | Zero Speed Detection Level |
ZSD Level 48 | 0 to 120 [Hz] | 0.01 | 2 [Hz] | Yes | 144 |
| EXT-55 | Zero Speed Detection Bandwidth |
ZSD Band 49 | 0 to 5 [Hz] | 0.01 | 1 [Hz] | Yes | |
| EXT-56 | Torque Detection Level | TD Level 50 | 0 to 150 [%] | 0.1 | 100 [%] | Yes | 144 |
| EXT-57 | Torque Detection Bandwidth |
TD Band 51 | 0 to 10 [%] | 0.1 | 5 [%] | Yes | |
| EXT-99 | Return Code | Not displayed 99 | Not available | - | 1 | Yes | - |
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
74
5.6 Communication Group [COM]
COM group appears only when the corresponding Option Boards are installed. Please refer to the option manual for
detail.
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| COM-00 | Jump to Desired Code # | Jump code Not displayed | 0 to 99 Not available | 1 | 1 | Yes | |
| None 0 Device Net 1 Synchro 2 PLC-GF 3 Profibus-DP 4 Digital-In 5 RS485 6 Modbus-RTU 7 |
COM-01 | Option Board Type | Opt B/D 01 | - | None | Yes | |
| None 0 Command 1 Freq 2 Cmd + Freq 3 |
COM-02 | Option Mode | Opt Mode 02 | - | None | No | |
| COM-03 | Option Version | Opt Version 03 | - - | - | - | No | |
| 8 Bit Bin 0 8 BCD 1% 1 8 BCD 1Hz 2 12 Bit Bin 3 12 BCD 0.1% 4 12 BCD 0.1Hz 5 12 BCD 1Hz 6 |
COM-04 | Binary Option Input Selection |
D-In Mode 04 | - | 8 Bit Bin | No | |
| COM-05 | Binary Input Filter Value | Digital Ftr 05 | 2-50 | 1 | 15 | Yes | |
| None 0 TrqLmt 1 |
COM-06 | Input Torque Limit (Option) |
Opt TrqLmt 06 | None | Yes | ||
| None 0 Opt Control 1 |
COM-07 | Control Mode Select (Option) |
Opt CntlMode 07 | None | No | ||
| COM-10 | Device Net ID | MAC ID 10 | 0-63 | 1 | 0 | Yes | |
| 125 kbps 0 250 kbps 1 500 kbps 2 |
COM-11 | Device Net Communication Speed |
Baud Rate 11 | - | 125 kbps | Yes | |
| 20 0 21 1 100 2 101 3 |
COM-12 | Device Net Output Instance |
Out Instance 12 | - | 20 | No | |
| 70 0 71 1 110 2 111 3 |
COM-13 | Device Net Input Instance | In Instance 13 | - | 70 | No | |
| COM-17 | PLC Option Station Number |
Station ID 17 | 0 to 63 | 1 | 1 | Yes | |
| COM-20 | Profibus ID | Profi MAC ID 20 | 0 to 127 | 1 | 1 | Yes | |
| COM-30 | Output Number | Output Num 30 | 0 to 8 | 1 | 3 | Yes |
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
75
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| COM-31 | Output 1 | Output 1 31 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 000A(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-32 | Output 2 | Output 2 32 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 000E(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-33 | Output 3 | Output 3 33 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 000F(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-34 | Output 4 | Output 4 34 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 0000(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-35 | Output 5 | Output 5 35 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 0000(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-36 | Output 6 | Output 6 36 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 0000(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-37 | Output 7 | Output 7 37 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 0000(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-38 | Output 8 | Output 8 38 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 0000(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-40 | Input Number | Input Num 40 | 0 to 8 | 1 | 2 | Yes | |
| COM-41 | Input 1 | Input 1 41 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 0005(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-42 | Input 2 | Input 2 42 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 0006(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-43 | Input 3 | Input 3 43 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 0000(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-44 | Input 4 | Input 4 44 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 0000(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-45 | Input 5 | Input 5 45 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 0000(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-46 | Input 6 | Input 6 46 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 0000(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-47 | Input 7 | Input 7 47 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 0000(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-48 | Input 8 | Input 8 48 | 0000-57FF(HEX) | 0000(HEX) | Yes | ||
| COM-52 | ModBus Option Selection | ModBus Mode 52 | ModBus RTU | ModBus RTU |
Yes | ||
| COM-99 | Return Code | Not displayed 99 | Not available [PROG/ENT] or [SHIFT/ESC] |
- | 1 | Yes |
5.7 Application Group [APP]
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| APP-00 | Jump to Desired Code # | Jump code Not displayed | 0 to 99 Not available | 1 | 1 | Yes | 145 |
| None 0 Traverse 1 MMC 2 DRAW 3 |
APP-01 | Application Mode Selection |
App Mode 01 | - | None | No | 145 |
| APP-0228 | Traverse Amplitude | Trv. Amp 02 | 0.0 to 20.0 [%] | 0.1 | 0.0 [%] | Yes | 146 |
| APP-03 | Traverse Scramble Amplitude |
Trv. Scr 03 | 0.0 to 50.0 [%] | 0.1 | 0.0 [%] | Yes | 146 |
| APP-04 | Traverse Accel Time | Trv Acc Time 04 | 0.1 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 2.0 [sec] | Yes | 146 |
| APP-05 | Traverse Decel Time | Trv Dec Time 05 | 0.1 to 6000 [sec] | 0.1 | 3.0 [sec] | Yes | 146 |
| APP-06 | Traverse Offset (Hi) Setting |
Trv Off Hi 06 | 0.0 to 20.0 [%] | 0.1 | 0.0 [%] | Yes | 147 |
| APP-07 | Traverse Offset (Lo) Setting |
Trv Off Lo 07 | 0.0 to 20.0 [%] | 0.1 | 0.0 [%] | Yes | 147 |
| APP-0829 | Running Auxiliary Motor Number Display |
Aux Mot Run 08 | - | - | - | - | 147 |
28 Code APP-02 through APP-07 appears only when APP-01 is set to ‘Traverse’.
29 Code APP-08 through APP-31 appears only when APP-01 is set to ‘MMC’.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
76
| Keypad Display | Setting Range | Code | Description | Units | Factory Default |
Adj. During Run |
Page |
| LCD 7-Segment | LCD 7-Segment | ||||||
| APP-09 | Starting Aux. Motor Selection |
Starting Aux 09 | 1 to 4 | 1 | 1 | Yes | 147 |
| APP-10 | Operation Time Display on Auto Change |
Auto Op Time 10 | - | - | - | - | 147 |
| APP-11 | Start Frequency of Aux. Motor 1 |
Start freq 1 11 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 49.99 [Hz] | Yes | 147 |
| APP-12 | Start Frequency of Aux. Motor 2 |
Start freq 2 12 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 49.99 [Hz] | Yes | |
| APP-13 | Start Frequency of Aux. Motor 3 |
Start freq 3 13 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 49.99 [Hz] | Yes | |
| APP-14 | Start Frequency of Aux. Motor 4 |
Start freq 4 14 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 49.99 [Hz] | Yes | |
| APP-15 | Stop Frequency of Aux. Motor 1 |
Stop freq 1 15 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 15.00 [Hz] | Yes | 148 |
| APP-16 | Stop Frequency of Aux. Motor 2 |
Stop freq 2 16 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 15.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| APP-17 | Stop Frequency of Aux. Motor 3 |
Stop freq 3 17 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 15.00 [Hz]] | Yes | |
| APP-18 | Stop Frequency of Aux. Motor 4 |
Stop freq 4 18 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 15.00 [Hz] | Yes | |
| APP-19 | Delay Time before Operating Aux Motor |
Aux start DT 19 | 0 to 9999 [sec] | 0.1 | 60.0 [sec] | Yes | 148 |
| APP-20 | Delay Time before Stopping Aux Motor |
Aux stop DT 20 | 0 to 9999 [sec] | 0.1 | 60.0 [sec] | Yes | |
| APP-21 | The Number of Aux Motor | Nbr Aux’s 21 | 0 to 4 | 1 | 4 | Yes | 148 |
| No 0 Yes 1 |
APP-22 | PID Bypass Selection | Regul Bypass 22 | - | No | Yes | 148 |
| APP-23 | Sleep Delay Time | Sleep Delay 23 | 0 to 9999 [sec] | 0.1 | 60.0 [sec] | Yes | 149 |
| APP-24 | Sleep Frequency | Sleep Freq 24 | 0 to FU1-20 | 0.01 | 0.19 [Hz] | Yes | 149 |
| APP-25 | Wake-Up Level | WakeUp Level 25 | 0 to 100 [%] | 1 | 35.0 [%] | Yes | 149 |
| APP-26 | Auto Change Mode Selection |
AutoCh-Mode 26 | 0 to 2 | 1 | 1 | Yes | 149 |
| APP-27 | Auto Change Time | AutoEx-intv 27 | 00:00 to 99:00 | 00:01 | 72:00 | Yes | 150 |
| APP-28 | Auto Change Level | AutoEx-level 28 | 0 to 100 [%] | 0.1 | 20 [%] | Yes | |
| No 0 Yes 1 |
APP-29 | Inter-Lock Selection | Inter-lock 29 | - | No | Yes | 150 |
| APP-30 | Feedback Freq/ Percentage Display |
Fbk/PER 30 | [Hz] / [%] - | 150 | |||
| APP-31 | Actual Value Display | Prs 31 | [Bar]/[Pa] - | - | - | - | 151 |
| APP-32 | Pressure Display Scale | Scale Disp 32 | 0 to 50000 | - | 1000 | Yes | 151 |
| None 0 V1_Draw 1 I_Draw 2 V2_Draw 3 |
APP-3330 | Draw Mode Selection | Draw Mode 33 | - | None | Yes | 151 |
| APP-34 | Draw Size Setting | DrawPerc 34 | 0 to 150 [%] | 0.1 | 100 [%] | Yes | 151 |
30 Code APP-32 through APP-33 appears only when APP-01 is set to ‘Draw’.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
77
5.8 Sub-Board Selection Guide According To Function
| Sub-Board Type | Code | Function Description | LCD Display | |
| SUB-A Board | SUB-B Board | SUB-C Board | ||
| EXT-02 | Multi-function Input Terminal ‘P4’ | P4 define | ● | ● |
| EXT-03 | Multi-function Input Terminal ‘P5’ | P5 define | ● | ● |
| EXT-04 | Multi-function Input Terminal ‘P6’ | P6 define | ● | ● |
| EXT-05 | V2 Mode Selection | V2 mode | ● | ● |
| EXT-06 | Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal | V2 filter | ● | ● |
| EXT-07 | V2 Input Minimum Voltage | V2 volt x1 | ● | ● |
| EXT-08 | Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input Minimum Voltage |
V2 freq y1 | ● | ● |
| EXT-09 | V2 Input Maximum Voltage | V2 volt x2 | ● | ● |
| EXT-10 | Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input Maximum Voltage |
V2 freq y2 | ● | ● |
| EXT-14 | Usage for Pulse Input Signal | F mode | ● | |
| EXT-15 | Pulse Input Signal Selection | F pulse set | ● | |
| EXT-16 | Encoder Pulse Selection | F pulse num | ● | |
| EXT-17 | Filtering Time Constant for Pulse Input Signal | F filter | ● | |
| EXT-18 | Pulse Input Minimum Frequency | F pulse x1 | ● | |
| EXT-19 | Frequency Output corresponding to Pulse Input Minimum Frequency |
F freq y1 | ● | |
| EXT-20 | Pulse Input Maximum Frequency | F pulse x2 | ● | |
| EXT-21 | Frequency Output corresponding to Pulse Input Maximum Frequency |
F freq y2 | ● | |
| EXT-22 | P-Gain for PG Option | PG P-gain | ● | |
| EXT-23 | I-Gain for PG Option | PG I-gain | ● | |
| EXT-24 | Slip Frequency for PG Option | PG Slip freq | ● | |
| EXT-30 | Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q1’ | Q1 define | ● | ● |
| EXT-31 | Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q2’ | Q2 define | ● | |
| EXT-32 | Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q3’ | Q3 define | ● | |
| EXT-34 | LM (Load Meter) Output Selection | LM mode | ● | |
| EXT-35 | LM Output Adjustment | LM adjust | ● | |
| EXT-40 | AM1 (Analog Meter 1) Output Selection | AM1 mode | ● | |
| EXT-41 | AM1 Output Adjustment | AM1 adjust | ● | |
| EXT-42 | AM2 (Analog Meter 2) Output Selection | AM2 mode | ● | |
| EXT-43 | AM2 Output Adjustment | AM2 adjust | ● | |
| EXT-50 | Speed Limit Level | Speed Limit | ● | |
| EXT-51 | Speed Limit Bias | Speed Bias | ● | |
| EXT-52 | Speed Limit Gain | Speed Gain | ● | |
| EXT-53 | Speed Limit Direction | Speed Dir | ● | |
| EXT-54 | Zero Speed Detection Level | ZSD Level | ● | |
| EXT-55 | Zero Speed Detection Bandwidth | ZSD Band | ● | |
| EXT-56 | Torque Detection Level | TD Level | ● | |
| EXT-57 | Torque Detection Bandwidth | TD Band | ● |
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
78
Notes:
79
CHAPTER 6 - PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
| 6.1 Drive group [DRV] DRV-00: Command Frequency or Command Torque/ Output Current (LCD) DRV? Cmd. Freq* 00 0.00 Hz F * 0.00 |
| * In Torque mode: LCD display - Cmd. Trq 7 Segment - r (Rpm) l In FU2-39 [Control Mode Selection], 4 (Sensorless_T) 6 (Vector_TRQ) is torque mode. l DRV-00 [Command Frequency or Command Torque] has two functions. 1) Digital frequency setting - When DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode] is set to 0 (KeyPad-1) or 1 (KeyPad-2), command freq is not settable above FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency]. 2) Monitoring function setting - Command frequency displayed during stop - Output current/frequency displayed during run. Analog/digital frequency command setting in DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode]: l DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode] is set to 2 (V1),3 (I) or 4 (V1+I), frequency command is set via I/O-01~10 [Analog Frequency command/Torque]. Refer to I/O-01~10 for detail description. l DRV-16 [Speed Unit Selection] is set to 1 (Rpm), speed is displayed in Rpm. l If FU2-39 is set to 4 (Sensorless_T) or 6 (Vector_TRQ), speed is displayed as the percent [%] to the rated torque. Torque command is settable in DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode]. * Factory default setting = 100[%] (Up to 150[%] settable) |
| Factory Default: 0.00 Hz 0.00 |
l Setting the DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode]
☞ Note: In torque mode, speed unit is automatically
displayed in [%].
| Setti ng |
DRV-04 | Parameter Name |
Programming Description |
| 0 | KeyPad-1 | 1. In DRV-00, press the [PROG] key. 2. Enter the desired freq. 3. Press the [ENT] key to write the new value into memory. |
Digital freq. command |
| 1 | KeyPad-2 | 1. In DRV-00, press the [PROG] key. 2. Press the [ñ(Up)] or [ò(Down)] key to set the desired freq., while the inverter keeps running. 3. Press the [ENT] key to write the new value into memory. |
|
| 2 | V1 | Control terminal “V1”Voltage analog input(0 to 10V) See the description of I/O-01~05. |
Analog freq. command |
| 3 | I | Control terminal “I”Current analog input (4 to 20mA) See the description of I/O-06~10. |
|
| 4 | V1+I | Control terminal “V1”+“I” (0-10V/4-20mA) Analog input. See the description of I/O-01~10. |
l Command Freq/Torque setting via “V1”input
terminal when set DRV-04 [Frequency/Torque
mode] to 2 (V1) or 4 (V1+I)
| Code | Default setting | Setting range |
| I/O-01 | 10 [msec] | 0 ~ 10000 [msec] |
| I/O-02 | 0 [V] | 0 ~ 10 [V] |
| I/O-03 | 0 [Hz] | 0 ~ Max. freq |
| I/O-04 | 10 [V] | 0 ~ 10 [V] |
| I/O-05 | 60 [Hz] | 0 ~ Max freq |
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
80
| Code | Keypad Display | Parameter Name |
| I/O-01 | V1 filter | Filter Time Constant for V1 Signal Input |
| I/O-02 | V1 volt x1 | V1 Input Minimum Voltage |
| I/O-03 | V1 freq y1 | Frequency Corresponding to V1 Input Minimum Voltage |
| I/O-04 | V1 volt x2 | V1 Input Maximum Voltage |
| I/O-05 | V1 freq y2 | Frequency Corresponding to V1 Input Maximum Voltage |
| è Important: Increase I/O-01-[Filter Time Constant for V1 Signal Input] if the V1 signal is affected by noise causing unstable operation. Increasing this value makes response time slower. I/O-06~10 [Analog Current Input “I “Signal adjustment] l Command Freq/Torque setting via “I”input terminal when set DRV-04 [Frequency/Torque mode] to 3 (I) or 4 (V1+I) V1 analog input (0~10V) Set freq. I/O-02 V1 Minimum V I/O-03 I/O-05 I/O-04 V1 Maximum V |
||
| Code | Default setting | Setting range |
| I/O-06 | 10 [msec] | 0 ~ 10000 [msec] |
| I/O-07 | 4 [mA] | 0 ~ 20 [mA] |
| I/O-08 | 0 [Hz] | 0 ~ Max. freq |
| I/O-09 | 20 [mA] | 0 ~ 20 [mA] |
| I/O-10 | 60 [Hz] | 0 ~ Max. freq |
| Code | Keypad display | Parameter Name |
| I/O-06 | I filter | Filter time constant for I signal Input |
| I/O-07 | I curr x1 | I Input Minimum Current |
| I/O-08 | I freq y1 | Frequency Corresponding to I Input Minimum Current |
| I/O-09 | I curr x2 | I Input Maximum Current |
| I/O-10 | I freq y2 | Frequency Corresponding to I Input Maximum Current |
è Important: Increase I/O-06-[Filter time constant for I
signal Input] if the I signal is affected by noise causing
unstable operation. Increasing this value makes
response time slower.
DRV-01: Acceleration Time
Terminal I ( 0 ~ 20 mA )
Set freq
I/O-07
I Minimum
current
I/O-08
I/O-10
I/O-09
I Maximum
current
DRV? Acc. time
01 20.0 sec 01 20.0
Factory Default: 20.0 sec 20.0
Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode]
DRV-16 [Speed Unit Selection]
FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency]
FU2-39 [Control Mode Selection]
I/O-1~10 [Analog Frequency
Command/Torque]
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
81
| DRV-02: Deceleration Time DRV? Dec. time 02 30.0 sec 02 30.0 |
| The inverter targets the FU2-70 when accelerating or decelerating. When the FU2-70 is set to “Maximum Frequency”, the acceleration time is the time taken by the motor to reachFU1-20 from 0 Hz. The deceleration time is the time taken by the motor to reach 0 Hz from FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency]. When the FU2-70 is set to ‘Delta Frequency’, the acceleration and deceleration time is the time taken to reach a targeted frequency (instead the maximum frequency) from a frequency. The acceleration and deceleration time can be changed to a preset transient time via multi-function inputs. By setting the multi-function inputs (P1, P2, P3) to ‘XCEL-L’, ‘XCEL-M’, ‘XCEL-H’respectively, the Accel and Decel time set in I/O-25 to I/O-38 are applied according to the binary inputs of the P1, P2, P3. ☞ Note: I/O-12 to I/O-14: Sets the terminal function of P1, P2, P3 terminal inputs. FU2-71 [Accel/Decel time scale] I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Multi-function input terminal P1, P2, P3] I/O-25 to I/O-38 [Acc/Dec time for step frequency] n FU2-70: Selects the frequency to be targeted for acceleration and deceleration. [Max Freq, Delta Freq] n FU2-71: Selects the time scale. [0.01, 0.2, 1] n I/O-12 to I/O-14: Sets the terminal function of P1, P2, P3 terminal inputs. n I/O-25 to I/O-38: Presets the Accel/Decel time activated via multifunction inputs (P1, P2, P3) Output Frequency Max. Freq. Time Acc. time Dec. time |
| Factory Default: 30.0 sec 30.0 |
| Code | LCD display |
Description | XCEL H - | XCEL M - | XCEL L - | Factory setting |
| DRV- 01 |
Acc time | Acc time 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 10 sec |
| DRV- 02 |
Dec time | Dec time 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 20 sec |
| I/O-25 | ACC-1 | Acc time 1 | 0 | 0 | 1 | 20 sec |
| I/O-26 | DEC-1 | Dec time 1 | 0 | 0 | 1 | 20 sec |
| I/O-27 | ACC-2 | Acc time 2 | 0 | 1 | 0 | 30 sec |
| I/O-28 | DEC-2 | Dec time 2 | 0 | 1 | 0 | 30 sec |
| I/O-29 | ACC-3 | Acc time 3 | 0 | 1 | 1 | 40 sec |
| I/O-30 | DEC-3 | Dec time 3 | 0 | 1 | 1 | 40 sec |
| I/O-31 | ACC-4 | Acc time 4 | 1 | 0 | 0 | 50 sec |
| I/O-32 | DEC-4 | Dec time 4 | 1 | 0 | 0 | 50 sec |
| I/O-33 | ACC-5 | Acc time 5 | 1 | 0 | 1 | 40 sec |
| I/O-34 | DEC-5 | Dec time 5 | 1 | 0 | 1 | 40 sec |
| I/O-35 | ACC-6 | Acc time 6 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 30 sec |
| I/O-36 | DEC-6 | Dec time 6 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 30 sec |
| I/O-37 | ACC-7 | Acc time 7 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 20 sec |
| I/O-38 | DEC-7 | Dec time 7 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 20 sec |
FU2-71 [Accel/Decel time scale]
l Set the Accel / Decel time unit.
| Setting | Unit | Description |
| 0 | 0.01 sec | Minimum 0 sec settable Maximum 60 sec settable |
| 1 | 0.1 sec | Minimum 0 sec settable Maximum 600 sec settable (Factory setting) |
| 2 | 1 sec | Minimum 0 sec settable Maximum 6000 sec settable* |
* Up to 6000 sec setting is available via LE-200 keypad.
DRV-03: Drive Mode (Run/Stop Method)
Select the source of run/stop command.
| Setting Range | Description | |
| LCD | 7-Seg | |
| Keypad | 0 | Run/Stop is controlled by Keypad. |
| Fx/Rx-1 | 1 | Control Terminals FX, RX and 5G control Run/Stop. (Method 1) |
| Fx/Rx-2 | 2 | Control Terminals FX, RX and 5G control Run/Stop. (Method 2) |
Related Functions: FU1-20 [Max freq]
FU2-70 [Reference freq. for Accel/Decel]
DRV? Drive mode
03 Keypad 03 1
Factory Default: Fx/Rx-1 1
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
82
[Drive Mode: ‘Fx/Rx-1’]
[Drive Mode: ‘Fx/Rx-2’]
DRV-04: Frequency or Torque Mode (Frequency
/ Torque Setting Method)
* In Torque mode: LCD display: “Torque mode”
7 Segment: “04”
l If the DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode] is set to
2 (V1), 3 (I), 4 (V1+I), see the description of I/O-
01~10 [Analog Voltage/Current input signal
adjustment].
l If FU2-39 is set to 4 (Sensorless_T) or 6
(Vector_TRQ), speed is displayed as the percent
[%] to the rated torque. Torque command is
settable in DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode].
l DRV-04 setting value is separately saved according
to which control mode (Speed or Torque) is
selected in FU2-39 [Control mode selection].
| Setting Range | Description | |
| LCD | 7-Seg | |
| Keypad-1 | 0 | Frequency is set at DRV-00. The frequency is changed by press key and entered by pressing The inverter does not output the changed frequency until the ENT key is pressed. |
| Keypad-2 | 1 | Frequency is set at DRV-00. Press key and then by pressing the ? , , the inverter immediately outputs the changed frequency. Pressing the ENT key saves the changed frequency. |
| V1 | 2 | Input the frequency reference (0-10V) to the “V1”control terminal. Refer to the I/O- 01 to I/O-05 for scaling the signal. |
| I | 3 | Input the frequency reference (4~20mA) to the “I”control terminal. Refer to the I/O-06 to I/O-10 for scaling the signal. |
| V1+I | 4 | Input the frequency reference (0~10V, 4~20mA) to the “V1”,“I”control terminals. The ‘V1’signal overrides the ‘I’signal. |
ing PROG
ENT key.
PROG ? keyOutput Frequency
FX-CM
Time
| ON |
| ON |
RX-CM Forward
Reverse
Forward Run
Reverse Run
Output Frequency
FX-CM
Time
| ON |
| ON |
RX-CM Forward
Reverse
Run/Stop
Direction
DRV? Freq mode*
04 Keypad-1 04 0
Factory Default: Keypad-1 0
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
83
| [Freq Mode: ‘V1’] [Freq Mode: ‘I’] [Freq Mode: V1+’I’] Output Frequency Analog Signal Input (V1) Freq. max 0V 10V Reference Freq. Range Output Frequency Freq. Max 4mA 20mA Reference Freq. Range Analog Signal Input (I) Output Frequency Freq. Max 0V+4mA Reference Freq. Range 10V+20mA Analog Signal Input (‘V1+I’) |
| Related functions: DRV-00 [Digital Command Frequency or Command Torque] FU2~39 [Control Mode Selection] I/O-01~10 [Analog Voltage/Current input signal adjustment] |
DRV-05 ~ DRV-07: Step Frequency 1 ~ 3
The inverter outputs preset frequencies set in these
codes according to the multi-function terminals
configured as ‘Speed-L’, ‘Speed-M’and ‘Speed-H’. The
output frequencies are decided by the binary
combination of P1, P2, P3 configured in I/O-12 to I/O-17.
Refer to the following table for the preset frequency
outputs.
| Binary Combination of P1, P2, P3 |
Output Frequency |
Step Speed | ||
| Speed-L | Speed-M | Speed-H | ||
| 0 | 0 | 0 | DRV-00 | Speed 0 |
| 1 | 0 | 0 | DRV-05 | Speed 1 |
| 0 | 1 | 0 | DRV-06 | Speed 2 |
| 1 | 1 | 0 | DRV-07 | Speed 3 |
[Step Frequency Output]
DRV? Step freq-1
05 10.00 Hz 05 10.00
Factory Default: 10.00 Hz 10.00
DRV? Step freq-2
06 20.00 Hz 06 20.00
Factory Default: 20.00 Hz 20.00
DRV? Step freq-3
07 30.00 Hz 07 30.00
Factory Default: 30.00 Hz 30.00
P1-CM
| ON | ON |
| ON |
Output Frequency
Time
Time
P2-CM Time
P3-CM
Time
Speed 3
Speed 0
Speed 2
Speed 1
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
84
| ☞ Note: The frequency setting method of ‘Speed 0’is decided by DRV-04. DRV-08: Output Current This code displays the output current of the inverter in RMS. DRV-09: Motor Speed This code displays the motor speed in RPM while the motor is running. Use the following equation to scale the mechanical speed using FU2-74 [Gain for Motor Speed display] if you want to change the motor speed display to rotation speed (r/min) or mechanical speed (m/min). Motor speed = 120 * (F/P) * FU2-74 Where, F= Output Frequency and P= the Number of Motor Poles DRV-10: DC Link Voltage This code displays the DC link voltage inside the inverter. DRV? Current 08 0.0 A 08 0.0 Factory Default: 0.0 A 0.0 DRV? Speed 09 0rpm 09 0 Factory Default: 0rmp 0 DRV? DC link vtg 10 ----- V 10 ---- Factory Default: ---- V ---- |
| This code display Voltage, Watt and Torque This code inverter. Use the PROG, the RESET key to check time of The fault when the RESET please refer to Chapter 7. [Fault Contents] Factory Default: DRV? Fault 12 None Factory Default: None |
| Related Functions: I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Reference Inputs] I/O-17 [Filtering Time Constant] I/O-21 to I/O-21 [Step Frequency 4~7] n I/O-01 to I/O-10: Scaling the analog input signals (V1 and I) for frequency reference. n I/O-17: Adjusts the response sensibility of the input terminal to eliminate contact noise. n I/O-21 to I/O-24: Sets the step frequency from 4 to 7. |
| DRV? User disp 11 Out 0.0 V |
DRV-11: User Display Selection
s the parameter selected in FU2-73
[User Display]. There are types of parameters in FU2-73:
DRV-12: Fault Display
displays the current fault (trip) status of the
? and ? key before pressing
the fault content(s), output
frequency, output current, and whether the inverter was
accelerating, decelerating, or in constant speed at the
the fault occurred. Press the ENT key to exit.
content will be stored in FU2-01 to FU2-05
key is pressed. For more detail,
| Fault (Trip) | Keypad display | |
| LCD | 7-Segment | |
| Over-Current 1 | Over Current 1 |
OC |
| Over-Voltage | Over Voltage | OV |
| External Trip Input A | External-A | EXTA |
| Emergency Stop (Not Latched) | BX | BX |
| Low-Voltage | Low Voltage | LV |
| Fuse Open | Fuse Open | FUSE |
| Ground Fault | Ground Fault | GF |
| Over-Heat on Heat sink | Over Heat | OH |
| Electronic Thermal Trip | E-Thermal | ETH |
| Over-Load Trip | Over Load | OLT |
| Inverter H/W Fault - EEP Error - ADC Offset - WDOG Error - In-Phase Open |
HW-Diag | HW |
| External Trip Input B | External-B | EXTB |
| Over-Current 2 | Arm Short | ASHT |
| Option Error | Option | OPT |
| Output Phase Loss | Phase Open | PO |
| Inverter Over-Load | Inv. OLT | IOLT |
11 0.0
0.0 V 0.0
12 nOn
nOn
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
85
☞ Note: There are WDOG error, EEP error, and ADC
Offset for the inverter Hardware Fault- the inverter will
not reset when H/W fault occurs. Repair the fault before
turning on the power.
☞ Note: Only the highest-level fault will be displayed when
multiple faults occur.
DRV-13: Motor Direction Set (7-Segment
Keypad)
This code sets the motor direction when using the 7-
Segment keypad.
| 7-Segment Display | Description |
| 0 | Run to forward direction |
| 1 | Run to reverse direction |
DRV-14: Command/Output Frequency Display
(LCD Keypad)
This code shows the Command (Target) Frequency set
in DRV00 and inverter Output Frequency.
DRV-15: Reference/Feedback Frequency Display
(LCD Keypad)
This code shows the Reference Frequency and
Feedback Frequency while PID operation.
This code appears only when ‘PID’is selected in FU2-47.
| DRV-16: Speed Unit Selection |
| Set this parameter to 0 [Hz] to display frequency, or to 1[Rpm] to display speed. |
| DRV-20: FU1 Group Selection (7-Segment keypad) |
| DRV-21: FU2 Group Selection (7-Segment keypad) |
| DRV-22: I/O Group Selection (7-Segment keypad) |
| DRV-23: EXT Group Selection (7-Segment keypad) |
| DRV-24: COM Group Selection (7-Segment keypad) |
| DRV-25: APP Group Selection (7-Segment keypad) |
| Select the desired group and press the PROG/ENT key to move into the desired group. The parameter in the group can be read and written after moving into the desired group. |
| Related Functions: Changing the Hz/Rpm display affects the following parameter display. n DRV-00, 05, 06, 07, 14 n FU1-20, 21,22, 24, 25, 32 n FU2-32 n I/O-03, 05, 08, 10, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 42, 43 n EXT-08, 10 |
| DRV? Hz/Rpm Disp 16 Hz |
| 16 0 |
| Factory Default: Hz Hz |
| Related Functions: | FU2-01 to FU2-05 [Previous Fault History] FU2-06 [Erase Fault History] |
n FU2-01 to FU2-05: There are up to 5 faults saved.
n FU2-06: Erases the faults saved in FU2-01 to FU2-05.
13 0
Factory Default: 0
DRV?TAR 0.00Hz
14 OUT 0.00Hz
Factory Default: 0.00Hz
DRV?REF 0.00Hz
15 FBK 0.00Hz
Factory Default: 0.00Hz
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
86
Notes:
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU1]
87
| 6.2 Function 1 Group [FU1] FU1-00: Jump to Desired Code # FU1? Jump code 00 1 |
||
| Jumping directly to any parameter code can be accomplished by entering the desired code number. This code is available only with LCD keypad. FU1-03: Run Prevention FU1? Run prev. 03 None 03 0 |
||
| This function prevents reverse operation of the motor. This function may be used for loads that rotate only in one direction such as fans and pumps. |
||
| Setting Range | Description | |
| LCD | 7-Seg | |
| None | 0 | Forward and Reverse run is available. |
| Forward Prev | 1 | Forward run is prevented. |
| Reverse Prev | 2 | Reverse run is prevented. |
| FU1-05: Acceleration Pattern FU1-06: Deceleration Pattern FU1?Acc. pattern 05 Linear 05 0 |
||
| Factory Default: 1 | ||
| Factory Default: None 0 | ||
| Factory Default: Linear 0 | ||
| FU1?Dec. pattern 06 Linear 06 0 |
||
| Factory Default: Linear 0 |
Different combinations of acceleration and deceleration
patterns can be selected according to the application.
| Setting Range | Description | |
| LCD | 7-Seg | |
| Linear | 0 | This is a general pattern for constant torque applications. |
| S-curve | 1 | This pattern allows the motor to accelerate and decelerate smoothly. The actual acceleration and deceleration time takes longer- about 40% than the time set in DRV-01 and DRV-02. This setting prevents shock during acceleration and deceleration, and prevents objects from swinging on conveyors or other moving equipment. |
| U-curve | 2 | This pattern provides more efficient control of acceleration and deceleration in typical winding machine applications. |
| Minimum | 3 | The inverter makes shorten the acceleration time by accelerating with a current rate of about 150% of its rated current and reduces the deceleration time by decelerating with a DC voltage rate of 95% of its over-voltage trip level. Appropriate application: When the maximum capability of the inverter and the motor are required. Inappropriate application: The current limit function may operate for a long period of time for loads that have high inertia such as fans. |
| Optimum | 4 | The inverter accelerates with a current rate of about 120% of its rated current and decelerates with a DC voltage rate of 93% of its over-voltage trip level. |
☞ Note: In case of selecting the ‘Minimum’or ‘Optimum’,
the DRV-01 and DRV-02 is ignored.
☞ Note: ‘Minimum’and ‘Optimum’functions operate
normally when the load inertia is less than 10 times
compared to the motor inertia. (FU2-37)
☞ Note: ‘Optimum’is useful when the motor capacity is
smaller than the inverter capacity.
☞ Note: ‘Minimum’and ‘Optimum’functions are not
appropriate for down operation in an elevator application.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU1]
88
| [Accel/Decel Pattern: ‘Linear’] [Accel/Decel Pattern: ‘S-curve’] [Accel/Decel Pattern: ‘U-curve’] FU1-07: Stop Mode Output Frequency Time Acc. Pattern Dec. Pattern Output Frequency Time Acc. Pattern Dec. Pattern Output Frequency Time Acc. Pattern Dec. Pattern FU1? Stop mode 07 Decel 07 0 |
| Sets the stopping method for the inverter. |
| Factory Default: Decel 0 |
| Setting Range | Description | |
| LCD | 7-Seg | |
| Decel | 0 | Inverter stops by the deceleration pattern. |
| Dc-brake | 1 | Inverter stops with DC injection braking. Inverter outputs DC voltage when the frequency reached the DC injection braking frequency set in FU1-08 during decelerating. |
| Free-run (Coast to stop) |
2 | Inverter cuts off its output immediately when the stop signal is commanded. |
[Stop Mode: ‘Decel’]
[Stop Mode: ‘D c-brake’]
Output Frequency
Time
FX-CM
| ON |
| Stop Command |
Output Voltage
Time
Time
Output Frequency
Time
FX-CM
| ON |
| Stop Command t1 t2 |
| t1: FU1- t2: FU1- |
Output Voltage
Time
Time
FU1-08
FU1-10
[DCBr Value]
09
11
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU1]
89
| [[Stop Mode: ‘Free-run’] FU1-08: DC Injection Braking Frequency FU1-09: DC Injection Braking On-delay Time FU1-10: DC Injection Braking Voltage FU1-11: DC Injection Braking Time Output Frequency Time FX-CM Output Voltage Time Time Output Cutoff FU1? DcBr freq 08 5.00 Hz 08 5.00 |
| Factory Default: 5.00 Hz 5.00 |
| FU1? DcBlk time 09 0.10 sec 09 0.10 |
| Factory Default: 0.10 sec 0.10 |
| FU1? DcBr value 10 50 % 10 50 |
| Factory Default: 50 % 50 |
| FU1? DcBr time 11 1.0 sec 11 1.0 |
| Factory Default: 1.0 sec 1.0 |
By introducing a DC voltage to the motor windings this
function stops the motor immediately. Selecting ‘DCBrake’in FU1-07 activates FU1-08 through FU1-11.
FU1-08 [DC Injection Braking Frequency] is the
frequency at which the inverter starts to output DC
voltage during deceleration.
FU1-09 [DC Injection Braking On-delay Time] is the
inverter output blocking time before DC injection braking.
FU1-10 [DC Injection Braking Voltage] is the DC voltage
applied to the motor and is based on FU2-33 [Rated
Current of Motor].
FU1-11 [DC Injection Braking Time] is the time the DC
current is applied to the motor.
[DC Injection Braking Operation]
ON
Stop Command
Output Cutoff
Output Frequency
Time
FX-CM
| ON |
| Stop Command t1 t2 |
| t1: FU1- t2: FU1- |
Output Voltage
Time
Time
FU1-08
[DCBr Freq]
FU1-10
[DCBr Value]
09
11
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU1]
90
| FU1-12: Starting DC Injection Braking Time FU1-13: Staring DC Injection Braking Time FU1? DcSt value 12 50 % 12 50 |
| Inverter holds the starting frequency for Starting DC Injection Braking Time. It outputs DC voltage to the motor for FU1-13 [Starting DC Injection Braking Time] with the FU1-12 [Starting DC Injection Braking Voltage] before accelerating. [Starting DC Injection Braking Operation] Output Frequency Time FX-CM Output Voltage Time Time Run Command FU1-22 FU1-12 on Output Current Time |
| Factory Default: 50 % 50 |
| FU1? DcSt time 13 0.0 sec 13 0.0 |
| Factory Default: 0.0 sec 0.0 |
☞ Note: The DC injection braking function does not function
when either FU1-12 or FU1-13 is set to “0”.
☞ Note: FU1-12 [Starting DC Injection Braking Voltage] is
also used as the DC Injection Braking Voltage for the
multifunction input when the multifunction input is set to
“DC braking”.
FU1-14: Pre-excitation Time
When you set ON to the operation command (FWD,
REV), the inverter conducts pre-exciting automatically
for the time specified by this parameter.
l After FU1-14 [Pre-excitation Time] elapses the
inverter starts normal operation in the following
graph.
| Code | LCD display | Factory setting | Setting range |
| FU1-14 | PreExTime | 1 [sec] | 0 ~ 60 [sec] |
ON
t1 t1: FU1-13 [Starting DC InjectiBraking Time]
Related Functions: FU2-33 [Rated Current of Motor]
n FU2-33: the DC current is limited by this parameter.
FX-CM
Output freq
[Hz]
Output
voltage
[V]
| T1 | = Pre- |
excitation time
Related function: FU2-34 [No Load Motor Current (RMS)]
FU1-16 [Pre-excitation Current]
FU1? PreExTime
14 1.0 sec 14 1.0
Factory Default: 1.0 sec 1.0
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU1]
91
| FU1-15: Hold Time FU1? Hold Time 15 1000 ms 15 1000 |
| To set the time to maintain holding torque at zero speed and stop the operation in a shortest time during Vector_SPD mode operation l The inverter runs to maintain speed 0 for the hold time in Vector_SPD mode and decelerates to stop after the hold time elapse. à Operation method during Hold Time: FU1-7 [Stop mode] Decel: zero speed control FU1-7 [Stop mode] DC-brake FU1-16: Pre-excitation Current FU1-16 [Pre-excitation Current] is applied during FU1-14. When the motor magnetic flux increases to match the rated magnetic flux, pre-excitation current starts to decrease. When the motor magnetic flux reaches to the rated magnetic flux, the pre-excitation current matches the rated pre-excitation current. Output Voltage [V] Output Speed [Hz or Rpm] Hold time FU1? Flux Force 16 100.0 % 16 1 00.0 Factory Default: 100.0 % 100.0 |
| Factory Default: 1000 ms 1000 |
| Code | LCD display | Factory setting | Setting range |
| FU1-16 | Flux Force | 100 [%] | 100 ~ 500 [%] |
FU1-20: Maximum Frequency
FU1-21: Base Frequency
FU1-22: Starting Frequency
FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency] is the maximum output
frequency of the inverter. Make sure this maximum
frequency does not exceed the rated speed of the motor.
FU1-21 [Base Frequency] is the frequency where the
inverter outputs its rated voltage. In case of using a
50Hz motor, set this to 50Hz.
FU1-22 [Starting Frequency] is the frequency where the
inverter starts to output its voltage.
FX-CM
Motor magnetic flux
Exciting current
FU1? Max freq
20 60.00 Hz 20 60.00
Factory Default: 60.00 Hz 60.00
FU1? Base freq
21 60.00 Hz 21 60.00
Factory Default: 60.00 Hz 60.00
FU1? Start freq
22 0.50 Hz 22 0.50
Factory Default: 0.50 Hz 0.50
Related Functions: FU2-34 [No Load Motor Current (RMS)]
FU1-14 [Pre-excitation Time]
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU1]
92
☞ Note: If the command frequency is set lower than the
starting frequency, inverter does not output voltage to
motor.
FU1-23: Frequency Limit Selection
FU1-24: Low Limit Frequency
FU1-25: High Limit Frequency
FU1-23 selects the limits for the inverter operating
frequency. If FU1-23 is set to ‘Yes’, inverter operates
within the upper and lower limit setting.The inverter
operates at the upper or the lower limit when the
frequency reference is outside the frequency limit range.
| [Freq. limit: ‘Yes’] ☞ Note: Frequency limit does not work during accelerating and decelerating. Output Frequency Freq. Max Time FU1-24 FU1-25 Reference Frequency Curve Output Frequency Curve |
| FU1-26: Manual/Auto Boost Selection FU1-27: Torque Boost in Forward Direction FU1-28: Torque Boost in Reverse Direction |
| This function is used to increase the starting torque at low speed by increasing the output voltage of the inverter. If the boost value is set too high than required, it may cause the motor flux to saturate, causing over current trip. Increase the boost value when there is excessive distance between inverter and motor. [Manual Torque Boost]: The forward and reverse torque boost is set separately in FU1-27 and FU1-28. ☞ Note: The torque boost value is the percentage of inverter rated voltage. ☞ Note: When FU1-29 [Volts/Hz Pattern] is set to ‘User V/F’, this function does not work. ☞ Note: When FU2-40 [Control Mode] is set to ‘Sensorless’, the torque boost value is the rate per thousand of inverter rated voltage. |
| FU1?Torque boost 26 Manual |
| 26 0 |
| Factory Default: Manual 0 |
| FU1? Fwd boost 27 2.0 % |
| 27 2.0 |
| Factory Default: 2.0 % 2.0 |
| FU1? Rev boost 28 2.0 % |
| 28 2.0 |
| Factory Default: 2.0 % 2.0 |
Output Voltage
Rated
Voltage
Output
Frequency
FU1-22. FU1-21.
FU1-20
FU1? Freq limit
23 --- No --- 23 0
Factory Default: No 0
FU1? F-limit Lo
24 0.50 Hz 24 0.50
Factory Default: 0.50 Hz 0.50
FU1? F-limit Hi
25 60.00 Hz 25 60.00
Factory Default: 60.00 Hz 60.00
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU1]
93
| [Auto Torque Boost]: Inverter outputs high starting torque by automatic boosting according to the load. ☞ Note: Auto torque boost is only available for the 1st motor. Manual torque boost must be used for the 2nd motor. ☞ Note: The auto torque boost value is added to the manual torque boost value. ☞ Note: Auto torque boost is available only when FU2-40 [Control Mode] is set to ‘V/F’. ☞ Note: Conduct Auto tuning in FU2-41 [Auto tuning] to use Auto torque boost effectively. [ConstantTorque Loads: Conveyor, Moving Equip. etc.] [Ascending and Descending Loads: Parking, Hoist etc.] Output Voltage Output Frequency Freq. Base 100% Manual Boost Value Forward and Reverse direction (Set the same value for FU1-27 Output Voltage Output Frequency FU1-21 100% Manual Boost Value |
| FU1-29: Volts/Hz Pattern FU1? V/F pattern 29 Linear 29 0 |
| This is the pattern of voltage/frequency ratio. Select the proper V/F pattern according to the load. The motor torque is dependent on this V/F pattern. |
| Factory Default: Linear 0 |
| Related Functions: FU1-29 [Volts/Hz Pattern] FU2-40 [Control Mode selection] |
[Linear] pattern is used where constant torque is
required. This pattern maintains a linear volts/frequency
ratio from zero to base frequency. This pattern is
appropriate for constant torque applications.
[Square] pattern is used where variable torque is
required. This pattern maintains squared volts/hertz ratio.
This pattern is appropriate for fans, pumps, etc.
[User V/F] pattern is used for special applications. Users
can adjust the volts/frequency ratio according to the
application. This is accomplished by setting the voltage
and frequency, respectively, at four points between
starting frequency and base frequency. The four points
of voltage and frequency are set in FU1-30 through FU1-
37.
[V/F Pattern: ‘Linear’]
[V/F Pattern: ‘Square’]
[V/F Pattern: ‘User V/F’]
and FU1-28)
Forward Direction - Motoring
(Set FU1-27 to a value)
Reverse Direction - Regenerating
(Set FU1-28 to ‘0’)
Output Voltage
Output
Frequency
Freq. Base
100%
Output Voltage
Output
Frequency
Freq. Base
100%
Output Voltage
Output
Frequency
Freq. Base
100%
FU1-31
FU1-30
FU1-34
FU1-33
FU1-35
FU1-37
FU1-36
FU1-32
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU1]
94
FU1-30 ~ FU1-37: User V/F Frequency and
Voltage
□□□
These functions are available only when ‘User V/F’is
selected in FU1-29 [V/F pattern]. Users can make the
custom V/F pattern by setting four points between FU1-
22 [Starting Frequency] and FU1-21 [Base Frequency].
[User V/F]
☞ Note: When the ‘User V/F’is selected, the torque boost
of FU1-26 through FU1-28 is ignored.
| FU1-38: Output Voltage Adjustment |
| This function is used to adjust the output voltage of the inverter. This is useful when using a motor with a lower rated voltage than the main input voltage. When this is set at 100%, inverter outputs its rated voltage. ☞ Note: The inverter output voltage does not exceed the main input voltage, even though FU1-38 is set at 110%. Output Voltage Output Frequency FU1-21 [Base Freq] 100% 50% |
| FU1-39: Energy Save Level |
| This function is used to reduce the output voltage in applications that do not require high torque and current at its steady speed. The inverter reduces its output voltage after accelerating to the reference frequency (steady speed) if the energy save level is set at 20%. This function may cause over-current trip due to the lack of output torque in a fluctuating load. This function does not work with 0% set point value. |
| Related Functions: FU1-21 [Base Frequency] FU1-22 [Starting Frequency] FU1-29 [Volts/Hz Pattern] |
| FU1?Volt control 38 100.0 % |
| 38 100 |
| Factory Default: 100.0 % 100 |
| FU1? Energy save 39 0 % |
| 39 0 |
| Factory Default: 0 % 0 |
FU1? User freq 1
30 15.00 Hz 30 15.00
Factory Default: 15.00 Hz 15.00
FU1? User volt 1
31 25 % 31 25
Factory Default: 25 % 25
FU1? User volt 4
37 100 % 37 100
Factory Default: 100 % 100
FU1? User freq 4
36 60.00 Hz 36 60.00
Factory Default: 60.00 Hz 60.00
Output Voltage
Output
Frequency
Freq. Base
100%
FU1-31
FU1-30
FU1-34
FU1-33
FU1-35
FU1-37
FU1-36
FU1-32
When set at 50%
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU1]
95
[When Energy Save Level is set at 20%]
☞ Note: This function is not recommended for a large load
or for an application that need frequent acceleration and
deceleration.
☞ Note: This function does not work when ‘Sensorless’is
selected in FU2-40 [Control Mode].
FU1-50: Electronic Thermal (Motor i2t) Selection
FU1-51: Electronic Thermal Level for 1 Minute
FU1-52: Electronic Thermal Level for
Continuous
FU1-53: Electronic Thermal Characteristic
(Motor type) selection
These functions are to protect the motor from
overheating without using additional thermal overload
relay. Inverter calculates the temperature rising of the
motor using several parameters and determines whether
or not the motor is overheated. Inverter will turn off its
output and display a trip message when the electronic
thermal feature is activated.
This function activates the ETH parameters by setting
‘Yes’.
This is the reference current when the inverter
determines the motor has overheated. It trips in one
| minute when 150% of rated motor current established in FU2-33 flows for one minute. ☞ Note: The set value is the percentage of FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current]. FU1? ETH cont 52 120 % 52 120 |
| This is the current at which the motor can run continuously. Generally, this value is set to ‘100%’and which means the rated motor current set in FU2-33. This value must be set less than FU1-52 [ETH 1min]. ☞ Note: The set value is the percentage of FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current]. [Motor i2t Characteristic Curve] Load Current [%] Trip Time FU1-51 [ETH 1min] 1 minute FU1-52 [ETH cont] FU1? Motor type 53 Self-cool 53 0 |
| To make the ETH function (Motor i2t) work correctly, the motor cooling method must be selected correctly according to the motor. [Self-cool] is a motor that has a cooling fan connected directly to the shaft of the motor. Cooling effects of a self-cooled motor decrease when a motor is running at low speeds. The motor current is derated as the motor speed decreases. [Forced-cool] is a motor that uses a separate motor to power a cooling fan. As the motor speed changes, the cooling effect does not change. |
| Factory Default: 120 % 120 |
| Factory Default: Self-cool 0 |
Output Voltage
Output
Frequency
Reference Frequency
(Steady Speed)
100%
80%
FU1? ETH select
50 --- No --- 50 0
Factory Default: No 0
FU1? ETH 1min
51 180 % 51 180
Factory Default: 180 % 180
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU1]
96
[Load Current Derating Curve]
☞ Note: Despite the motor current changing frequently due
to load fluctuation or acceleration and deceleration, the
inverter calculates the i2t and accumulates the value to
protect the motor.
FU1-54: Overload Warning Level
FU1-55: Overload Warning Time
The inverter generates an alarm signal when the output
current has reached the FU1-54 [Overload Warning
Level] for the FU1-55 [Overload Warning Time].The
alarm signal persists for the FU1-55 even if the current
has become the level below the FU1-54.
Multi-function output terminal (AXA-AXC) is used as the
alarm signal output. To output the alarm signal, set I/O
44 [Multifunction Auxiliary Contact Output] to ‘OL’.
☞ Note: Inverter is not tripped by this function.
☞ Note: The set value is the percentage of FU2-33 [Rated
Motor Current].
| [Overload Warning] t1: FU1-55 [Overload Warning Time] Output Current Time Time FU1-54 [OL Level] FU1-54 [OL Level] AXA-AXC t1 t1 |
| FU1-56: Overload Trip Selection FU1-57: Overload Trip Level FU1-58: Overload Trip Delay Time |
| Inverter cuts off its output and displays fault message when the output current persists over the FU1-57 [Overload Trip Level] for the time of FU1-58 [Overload Trip Time]. This function protects the inverter and motor from abnormal load conditions. |
| Related Functions: FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current] I/O-44 [Multi-function Auxiliary Contact Output] |
| FU1? OLT select 56 --- Yes --- |
| 56 1 |
| Factory Default: Yes 1 |
| FU1? OLT level 57 180 % |
| 57 180 |
| Factory Default: 180 % 180 |
| FU1? OLT time 58 60.0 sec |
| 58 60.0 |
| Factory Default: 60.0 sec 60.0 |
100%
95%
65%
Output Current
20Hz 60Hz
| Self-Cool |
Forced-Cool
Related Functions: FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current]
FU1? OL level
54 150 % 54 150
Factory Default: 150 % 150
FU1? OL time
55 10.0 sec 55 10.0
Factory Default: 10.0 sec 10.0
ON
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU1]
97
☞ Note: The set value is the percentage of FU2-33 [Rated
Motor Current].
[Overload Trip Operation]
FU1-59: Stall Prevention Mode Selection (Bit set)
FU1-60: Stall Prevention Level
This bit set parameter follows the conventions used in
I/O-15 and I/O-16 to show the ON (bit set) status.
This function is used to prevent the motor from stalling
by reducing the inverter output frequency until the motor
current decreases below the stall prevention level. This
function can be selected for each mode of acceleration,
steady speed, and deceleration via bit combination.
☞ Note: The set value is the percentage of FU2-33 [Rated
Motor Current].
| FU1-59 [Stall Prevention Mode Selection] When FU1-59 is set to ‘111’, stall prevention works during accelerating, steady speed and decelerating. ☞ Note: The acceleration and deceleration time may take longer than the time set in DRV-01, DRV-02 when Stall Prevention is selected. ☞ Note: If stall prevention status persists, inverter may stop during acceleration. |
| [Stall Prevention during Acceleration] [Stall Prevention during Steady Speed] Output Current Time Output Frequency Time FU1-60 [Stall level] FU1-60 [Stall Level] Output Current Time Output Frequency Time FU1-60 [Stall Level] FU1-60 [Stall Level] |
| Related Functions: FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current] |
Setting Range
3rd bit 2nd bit 1st bit FU1-59 Description
0 0 1 001 Stall Prevention during
Acceleration
0 1 0 010 Stall Prevention during Steady
Speed
1 0 0 100 Stall Prevention during
Deceleration
Output Current
Time
Time
FU1-57
[OLT Level]
FU1-57
[OLT Level]
Output Frequency
| FU1- 58 [OLT Time] |
Overload Trip
Related Functions: FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current]
FU1? Stall prev.
59 000 59 000
Factory Default: 000 000
FU1? Stall level
60 180 % 60 180
Factory Default: 180 % 180
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU1]
98
[Stall Prevention during Deceleration]
FU1-99: Return Code (7-Segment Keypad)
This code is used to exit a group when using a 7-
| segment keypad. After pressing value to ‘1’and press the |
key, set the again to exit. |
| PROG/ENT | |
| PROG/ENT | key |
Time
DC Link Voltage
Time
Output Frequency
390VDC or
680V DC
99 1
Factory Default: 1
Related Functions: FU2-99 [Return Code]
I/O-99 [Return Code]
EXT-99 [Return Code]
COM-99 [Return Code]
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
99
6.3 Function 2 Group [FU2]
FU2-00: Jump to desired code #
Jumping directly to any parameter code can be
accomplished by entering the desired code number. This
code is available only with LCD keypad.
FU2-01: Previous Fault History 1
FU2-02: Previous Fault History 2
FU2-03: Previous Fault History 3
FU2-04: Previous Fault History 4
FU2-05: Previous Fault History 5
FU2-06: Erase Fault History
□□□
This code displays up to five previous fault (trip) status of
| the inverter. pressing the |
, ? and ? key before key to check the fault content(s), |
| Use the | PROG |
| RESET |
output frequency, output current, and whether the
inverter was accelerating, decelerating, or in constant
speed at the time of the fault occurred. Press the ENT
key to exit. The fault content will be stored in FU2-01
through FU2-05 when the RESET key is pressed. For
more detail, please refer to Chapter 7.
| [Fault Contents] ☞ Note: There are WDOG error, EEP error, and ADC Offset for the inverter Hardware Fault, and the inverter will not reset when H/W fault occurs. Repair the fault before turning on the power. ☞ Note: When multiple faults occur, only the highest-level fault will be displayed. |
| This function erases all fault histories of FU2-01 to FU- 05 from the memory. |
| Related Functions: DRV-12 [Fault Display] displays current fault status. |
| FU2? Erase trips 06 --- No --- |
| 06 0 |
| Factory Default: No 0 |
Fault (Trip) Keypad Display
LCD 7-Segment
Over-Current 1 Over Current 1 OC
Over-Voltage Over Voltage OV
External Trip Input A External-A EXTA
Emergency Stop
(Not Latched) BX BX
Low-Voltage Low Voltage LV
Fuse Open Fuse Open FUSE
Ground Fault Ground Fault GF
Over-Heat on Heat sink Over Heat OH
Electronic Thermal Trip E-Thermal ETH
Over-Load Trip Over Load OLT
Inverter H/W Fault
- EEP Error
- ADC Offset
- WDOG Error
- In-Phase Open
HW-Diag HW
External Trip Input B External-B EXTB
Over-Current 2 Arm Short ASHT
Option Error Option OPT
Output Phase Loss Phase Open PO
Inverter Over-Load Inv. OLT IOLT
FU2? Jump code
00 1
Factory Default: 1
FU2? Last trip-1
01 None 01 0
Factory Default: None 0
FU2? Last trip-5
05 None 05 0
Factory Default: None 0
05 None
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
100
| FU2-07: Dwell Frequency FU2-08: Dwell Time FU2? Dwell freq 07 5.00 Hz 07 5.00 |
| This function is used to output torque in an intended direction. It is useful in hoisting applications to get enough torque before a releasing mechanical brake. If the dwell time is set at ‘0’, this function is not available. In dwell operation, the inverter outputs AC voltage not a DC voltage. ☞ Note: DC Injection Braking does not output torque to an intended direction. It is just to hold the motor. ☞ Note: Do not set the Dwell frequency above run frequency. Otherwise, it may lead to operation fault. [Dwell Operation] FX-CM Output Frequency Time Time FU1-07 Output Current Time Mechanical Brake Time |
| Factory Default: 5.00 Hz 5.00 |
| FU2? Dwell time 08 0.0 sec 08 0.0 |
| Factory Default: 0.0 sec 0.0 |
FU2-10 ~ FU2-16: Frequency Jump
□□
To prevent undesirable resonance and vibration on the
structure of the machine, this function locks out the
potential resonance frequency from occurring. Three
different jump frequency ranges may be set. This
avoidance of frequencies does not occur during
accelerating or decelerating. It only occurs during
continuous operation.
[Frequency Jump]
ON
Run Command
t1 t1: FU2-08 [Dwell Time]
Release FU2? Jump freq
10 --- No --- 10 0
Factory Default: No 0
Output Frequency
Freq. Max
Reference
10Hz 20Hz 30Hz Frequency
FU2-12
FU2-11
FU2-14
FU2-13
FU2-16
FU2-15
FU2? jump lo 1
11 10.00 Hz 11 10.00
Factory Default: 10.00 Hz 10.00
FU2? jump Hi 1
12 15.00 Hz 12 15.00
Factory Default: 15.00 Hz 15.00
FU2? jump lo 3
15 30.00 Hz 15 30.00
Factory Default: 30.00 Hz 30.00
FU2? jump Hi 3
16 35.00 Hz 16 35.00
Factory Default: 35.00 Hz 35.00
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
101
☞ Note: When the reference frequency is set inside the jump
frequency, the output frequency goes to the frequency
marked by “n”symbol.
☞ Note: If one frequency jump range is required, set all
ranges to the same range.
FU2-17: Start Curve for S-Curve Accel/Decel
Pattern
FU2-18: End Curve for S-Curve Accel/Decel
Pattern
This parameter is used to adjust the Accel and Decel
pattern when ‘S-Curve’is selected in FU1-05 and FU1-
06 respectively. To use this function, the Reference
Frequency for Accel and Decel set in FU2-70 should be
set to ‘Delta freq’.
[S-Curve Adjustment]
Actual Accel Time = DRV-01 + (DRV-01 * FU2-17)/2 +
(DRV-01*FU2-18)/2
Actual Decel Time = DRV-02 + (DRV-02 * FU2-17)/2 +
(DRV-02*FU2-18)/2
Ex) If DRV-10: 1 sec, FU2-17: 40%, FU2-18: 20%,
Actual Accel Time = 1 sec + (1sec*0.4)/2 + (1sec*0.2)/2
= 1.3 sec
| FU2-19: Input/Output Phase Loss Protection (Bit Set) |
| This function is used to cut the inverter output off in case of phase loss in either input power or inverter output. FU2-19 [Phase Loss Protection Select] |
| FU2-20: Power ON Start Selection |
| If FUN-20 is set to ‘No’, restart the inverter by cycling the FX or RX terminal to CM terminal after power has been restored. If FUN-20 is set to ‘Yes’, the inverter will restart after power is restored. If the motor is rotating by inertia at the time power is restored, the inverter may trip. To avoid this trip, use ‘Speed Search’function by setting FU2-22 to ‘1xxx’. |
| FU2? Trip select 19 00 |
| 19 00 |
| Factory Default: 00 00 |
| FU2?Power-on run 20 --- No --- |
| 20 0 |
| Factory Default: No 0 |
| Related Functions: FU2-22 to FU2-25 [Speed Search] |
Setting Range
2nd bit 1st bit FU2-19 Description
0 0 00 Phase loss protection does not work
0 1 01 Protect inverter from output phase loss
1 0 10 Protect inverter from input phase loss
1 1 11 Protect inverter from input and output
phase loss
FU2? Start Curve
17 40 % 17 40
Factory Default: 40% 40
FU2? End Curve
18 40 % 18 40
Factory Default: 40% 40
Output Frequency
Time
Max. Freq./2
| FU2-17 | FU2-18 | FU2-17 | FU2-18 |
Linear Linear
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
102
[Power ON Start: ‘No’]
[Power ON Start: ‘Yes’]
☞ Note: In case of using ‘Power ON Start’to ‘Yes’, make
sure to utilize appropriate warning notices to minimize the
potential for injury or equipment damage.
FU2-21: Restart After Fault Reset
If FU2-21 is set to ‘Yes’, inverter will restart after the
RST (reset) terminal has been reset a fault.
If FU2-21 is set to ‘No’, restart the inverter by cycling the
FX or RX terminal to CM terminal after the fault has
been reset. If the motor is rotating by inertia at the time
power is restored, the inverter may trip. To avoid this trip,
use ‘Speed Search’function by setting FU2-22 to ‘xx1x’.
| [Reset restart: ‘No’] [Reset restart: ‘Yes’] ☞ Note: In case of using ‘Reset Restart’to ‘Yes’, make sure to utilize appropriate warning notices to minimize the potential for injury or equipment damage. Output Frequency Time FX-CM Time RST-CM Time Tripped Output Frequency Time FX-CM Time RST-CM Time Tripped |
| FU2-22: Speed Search Selection (Bit Set) FU2-23: Current Limit Level During Speed Search FU2-24: P Gain During Speed Search FU2-25: I Gain During Speed Search |
| Related Functions: FU2-22 ~ FU2-25 [Speed Search] |
| FU2?Speed Search 22 0000 |
| 22 0000 |
| Factory Default: 0000 0000 |
| FU2? SS Sup-Curr 23 150 % |
| 23 150 |
| Factory Default: 150 % 150 |
Input Power
Time
FX-CM
| ON | ON |
| No Effect | Start |
Time
Power On
Output Frequency
Time
Input Power
Time
FX-CM
| ON |
| Start |
Time
Power On
Output Frequency
Time
FU2? RST restart
21 --- No --- 21 0
Factory Default: No 0
ON ON ON
No Effect Start
ON
ON
Start
Related Functions: FU2-22 ~ FU2-25 [Speed Search]
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
103
| This function is used to permit automatic restarting after Power ON, Fault Reset, and Instant Power Failure without waiting for the motor to stop. The speed search gain should be set after considering the inertia moment (GD2) and magnitude of torque of the load. FU2-37 [Load Inertia] must be set at the correct value to make this function operate correctly. FU2-22 [Speed Search Select] When FU2-22 is set to ‘1111’, Speed Search works for all conditions. FU2-22 [Speed Search Selection] selects the speed search function. FU2-23 [Current Limit Level] is the current that the inverter limits its current rise during speed searching. (The set value is the percentage of FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current]) FU2-24 [P Gain] is the proportional gain used for speed search. Set this value according to load inertia set in FU2-37. FU2-25 [I Gain] is the Integral gain used for speed search. Set this value according to load inertia set in FU2-37. |
| FU2? SS P-gain 24 100 24 100 |
| Factory Default: 100 100 |
| FU2? SS I-gain 25 200 25 200 |
| Factory Default: 200 200 |
Setting Range
4th bit 3rd bit 2nd bit 1st bit Description
0 0 0 0 Speed search function does not work
0 0 0 1 Speed search during Accelerating
0 0 1 0
Speed search during a Fault Reset
restarting (FU2-21) and Auto
restarting (FU2-26)
0 1 0 0 Speed search during Instant Power
Failure restarting.
1 0 0 0 Speed search during Power ON
starting (FU2-20)
[Speed Search Operation]
FU2-26: Number of Auto Restart Attempt
FU2-27: Delay Time Before Auto Restart
This function is used to allow the inverter to reset itself
for a selected number of times after a fault has occurred.
The inverter can restart itself automatically when a fault
occurs. To use the speed search function during auto
restarting set FU2-22 to ‘xx1x’. See FU2-22 ~ FU2-25.
When an under voltage (LV) fault, inverter disable (BX)
Input Power
Time
Motor Speed
Time
Output Frequency
Output Voltage
Time
Time
Input Power loss
FU2?Retry number
26 0 26 0
Factory Default: 0 0
FU2?Retry delay
27 1.0 sec 27 1.0
Factory Default: 1.0 sec 1.0
Related Functions: FU2-20 [Power ON Start]
FU2-21 [Restart after Fault Reset]
FU2-26 ~ FU2-27 [Auto Restart]
FU2-30 ~ FU2-37 [Motor Parameters]
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
104
or Arm short occurs, the drive does not restart
automatically.
☞ Note: Inverter decreases the retry number by one as a
fault occurs. When restarted without a fault during 30
seconds, the inverter increases the retry number by one.
FU2-28: Speed search hold time
The inverter starts speed search func tion after the preset
time t1 elapses. Set the desired time for inverter to
restart the previous operation using Speed search
function. Speed search function [FU2-22] is activated
automatically during exchanging function.
| Code | Keypad display | Description | Factory setting |
Setting Range |
| FU2-28 | SS blk time | Speed search hold time during speed search |
1 sec | 0 ~ 60 sec |
| ☞ Note: This parameter is not valid when low voltage (LV) fault or instant power loss (within 15msec) occurs. FU2-30: Rated Motor Selection FU2-31: Number of Motor Pole FU2-32: Rated Motor Slip FU2-33: Rated Motor Current FU2-34: No Load Motor Current FU2-36: Motor Efficiency FU2-37: Load Inertia If you do not set these values, inverter will use its default values. Input power [v] Time [sec] Motor speed [rpm] Output vtg [V] Time [sec] Time [sec] FU2?Motor select 30 0.75kW 30 0 |
| This parameter sets the motor capacity. Other motor related parameters are changed automatically according to motor capacity. The motor related parameters are FU2-32 [Rated Motor Slip], FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current], FU2-34 [No Load Motor Current], FU2-42 |
| Factory Default: 0.75 kW 0 (This value is set according to the inverter model automatically) |
Output Frequency
Time
1st Fault 2nd Fault
Restart with
Speed Search
Restart with
Speed Search
| t t t: FU2-27 |
t1 t2 t3
t1 : Ssearch wait time
t2 : Ssearch Accel time
t3 : Ssearch Decel time
FU2? SS blk time
28 1.0 sec 28 1.0
Factory Default: 1.0 sec 1. 0
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
105
| [Stator Resistance], FU2-43 [Rotor Resistance], and FU2-44 [Leakage Inductance]. If you know the motor parameters, set the values in the relevant codes for better control performance. FU2? Pole number 31 4 31 4 |
| This is used to display the motor speed. If you set this value to 2, inverter will display 3600 rpm instead 1800rpm at 60Hz output frequency. (See motor nameplate) FU2? Rated-Slip 32 3.00 Hz 32 3.00 |
| This is used in ‘Slip Compensation’control. If you set this value incorrectly, motor may stall during slip compensation control. (See motor nameplate) FU2? Rated-Curr 33 3.6 A 33 3.6 |
| This is very importance parameter that must be set correctly. This value is referenced in many other inverter parameters. (See motor nameplate) FU2? Noload-Curr 34 1.8 A 34 1.8 |
| This parameter is only displayed when ‘Slip Compen’is selected in FU2-40 [Control Method]. This function is used to maintain constant motor speed. To keep the motor speed constant, the output frequency varies within the limit of slip frequency set in FU2-32 according to the load current. For example, when the motor speed dec reases below the reference speed (frequency) due to a heavy load, the inverter increases the output frequency higher than the reference frequency to increase the motor speed. The inverter increases or decreases the output by delta frequency shown below. |
| Factory Default: 4 4 |
| Factory Default: 3.00 Hz 3.00 |
| Factory Default: 3.6 A 3.6 (This value is set according to the motor capacity set in FU2-30) |
| Factory Default: 1.8 A 1.8 (This value is set according to the motor capacity set in FU2-30) |
Output frequency = Reference freq. + Delta freq.
This value is used for calculating the output wattage
when FU2-72 is set to ‘Watt’.
This parameter is used for sensorless control, minimum
Accel/Decel, optimum Accel/Decel and speed search.
For better control performance, this value must be set as
exact as possible.
Set ‘0’for loads that has load inertia less than 10 times
that of motor inertia.
Set ‘1’for loads that have load inertia about 10 times
that of motor inertia.
Delta
Freq.
=
Output current – No load current
Rated current – No load current
× Rated Slip
FU2? Efficiency
36 72 % 36 72
Factory Default: 72% 72
(This value is set according to the motor capacity set in FU2-30)
FU2?Inertia rate
37 0 37 0
Factory Default: 0 0
FU2? Motor Volt
35 % 35 -
Factory Default: % -
(This value is set according to the motor capacity set in FU2-30)
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
106
| FU2-38: Carrier Frequency FU2?Carrier freq 38 5 kHz 38 5 |
||||
| Code | LCD Display |
Description | Setting | Setting range |
| FU2- 38 |
Carrier freq | Carrier Frequency | 5 [kHz] | 1 ~ 15 [kHz] |
| This parameter affects the audible sound of the motor, noise emission from the inverter, inverter termperature, and leakage current. If the ambient temperature where the inverter is installed is high or other equipment may be affected by potential inverter noise, set this value lower. If set above 10kHz, use it by reducing 5%[1kHz] of the rated current. Setting Carrier freqeuncy set below 2.5[kHz] when the FU2-39 [Control mode selection] is set to Vector_SPD, Vector_TRQ could weaken the control performance. Note) Max carrier frequency for inverters above 40HP(30kW) are indicated as below; Max carrier frequency for DB integrated models (11~22kW/15~30HP) is 10kHz. FU2-39: Control mode selection l Selects the control mode of the inverter FU2?Control mode 39 V/F 39 0 Factory Default: V/F 0 |
||||
| FU2-40 setting |
LCD Display | Description | ||
| 0 | V/F | V/F Control | ||
| 1 | Slip compen | Slip compensation | ||
| 2 | Sensorless_S | Sensorless vector control speed operation |
||
| 3 | Sensorless_T | Sensorless vector control torque operation |
||
| 4 | Vector_SPD | Vector control speed operation |
||
| 5 | Vector_TRQ | Vector control torque operation |
||
| Factory Default: 5 kHz 5 |
200V 400V
30/37kW (40/50HP) 10kHz 10kHz
45/55kW (60/75HP) 8kHz 8kHz
75kW (100HP) - 7kHz
☞ Note: Setting Vector_SPD, Vector_TRQ is only valid
when the inverter is equipped with SUB-B board and
EXT-12 [F mode] is set to Feed-back. Vector control
comprises of Vector_SPD, Vector_TRQ with
Sensorless_S and Sensorless_T.
l V/F control:
This parameter controls the voltage/frequency ratio
constant. It is recommended to use the torque boost
function when a greater starting torque is required.
Related function: FU1-26~28 [Torque boost]
l Slip compensation:
This function is used to maintain constant motor speed.
To keep the motor speed constant, the output frequency
varies within the limit of slip frequency set in FU2-32
according to the load current. For example, when the
motor speed decreases below the reference speed
(frequency) due to a heavy load, the inverter increases
the output frequency higher than the reference
frequency to increase the motor speed. The inverter
increases or decreases the output by delta frequency
shown below.
Delta freq = Rated slip * (Output current - Motor
No load current) / rated current - Motor No load
current)
Output freq = Reference freq + Delta freq
☞ Note: Motor parameters must be set correctly for
optimal performance of control.
FU2-32~36 [Motor related parameters] is automatically
determined by FU2-30 [Rated Motor selection]. Most
suitable motor capacity corresponding inverter capacity
is set as factory setting, but the following setting value
can be adjusted if necessary.
Related parameter: FU2-30~37 [Motor related
parameters]
| Code | LCD Display | Description |
| FU2-30 | Motor select | Select motor capacity |
| FU2-32 | Rated-Slip | Motor rated slip (Hz) |
| FU2-33 | Rated-Curr | Motor rated current (rms) |
| FU2-34 | Noload-Curr | Motor no load current (rms) |
| FU2-36 | Efficiency | Motor efficiency (%) |
| FU2-37 | Inertia rate | Motor inertia rate |
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
107
| l Sensorless_S (Sensorless vector speed control) Vector_SPD (Vector control speed) operation: Use it when 1) high starting torque needed at low speed 2) load fluctuation is high 3) rapid response needed. To activate this function, set FU2-30~37 and FU2-39 properly. If not using LG 220V/440V Class motor: Set Yes in FU2- 40 [Auto tuning] first. Vector_SPD control is O nly valid when Sub-B board is mounted (Speed-detecting Encoder installed to the motor). |
| Conditions for Sensorless Vector Control Conditions for sensorless control are as follows. If one of the following conditions is not satisfied, the inverter may malfunction with insufficient torque, irregular rotation, or excessive motor noise. It is recommended to use V/F control. ¨ Use a motor capacity that is equal to or one horsepower lower than the inverter capacity. ¨ Two different kinds of motor parameters can be set for one inverter, but use only one motor parameter in Sensorless control mode. ¨ If the motor in use is not LG 220V/440V Class motor or using 220V/380V dual use motor, utilize the auto tuning feature in FU2-40 [Auto tuning] before starting. ¨ Set appropriate values for the electronic thermal function, the overload limit function and the stall prevention. The set values should exceed 150% of the rated motor current. ¨ When DRV–04 [Frequency Mode] is set to “V1”, “I”, or “V1+I”, eliminate any potential noise influence with the frequency reference. ¨ The number of the motor pole should be 2 pole, 4 pole, or 6 pole. ¨ The distance between the inverter and the motor should not exceed 100m (328 ft). |
| Related Functions: FU2-30~37 [Motor related parameters] FU2-41~44 [Motor constant] FU2-45~46 [P/I gain for Sensorless] EXT-25~26 [P/I gain for Vector_SPD], EXT-27~28 [Torque limit for Vector_SPD] |
Precautions When Using Sensorless Vector Control
¨ Forced-cooling should be used for the motor when
the average operating speed is under 20Hz and
more than 100% load is used constantly.
¨ The motor may rotate 0.5% faster than the
maximum speed if the motor temperature does not
reach normal operating temperature.
¨ Installing the DB (Dynamic Brake) braking unit
option can improve the performance during
regeneration for systems with frequent acceleration
and deceleration operations.
¨ Utilize the auto-tuning feature when the motor
reaches normal temperature (average temperature
where the motor normally operates).
¨ Output torque may be reduced when an output filter
option is used between the inverter and the motor.
¨ If the speed is unstable when the FU2–38 [Carrier
Frequency Selection] is set to a value more than
10kHz, change the setting to 5~10kHz.
¨ Over current fault can occur if the FU2-41 [Stator
Resistance (Rs)] is set to a value more than twice
the auto tuned value
¨ Max setting range is 300 Hz.
Detail Tuning Method for Sensorless Vector Control
¨ Adjust the FU2–34 [No Load Motor Current (RMS)]
value larger or smaller by 5% units if the current is
larger or smaller than that of V/F control with small
load.
¨ Adjust the FU2–32 [Rated Motor Slip] value larger
or smaller by 5% units if the speed is faster or
slower than that of V/F control with small load.
l Sensorless_T(Sensorless Vector Torque)
Operation:
All settings are the same as Sensorless_S except
using torque reference for torque control.
l Vector_TRQ (Vector control torque) Operation:
All settings are the same as Vector_SPD except
using torque reference for torque control.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
108
| FU2-40 ~ 44 [ Auto tuning ] FU2? Auto tuning 40 --- NO --- 40 0 |
| ☞ Note: * These values are automatically entered according to the FU2-30 [Rated motor selection]. The above values are displayed when FU2-30 is set to 5 (7.5 kW). l The auto tuning function automatically measures the motor parameters needed for control selected in FU2-39[Control mode selection] such as stator resistance, rotor resistance, leakage inductance, no-load current and Encoder feedback frequency. The motor does not rotate during auto tuning so there is no need to separate the motor from the system. l Encoder operating status can be checked. l The rated current, voltage, efficiency and slip described in the motor nameplate should be entered before performing auto tuning. If efficiency is not indicated on the nameplate, use the preset value. l All or selected parameters can be tuned in Auto tuning mode. |
| Factory Default: NO 0 |
| FU2? Rs * 41 0.171 ohm 41 0.171 |
| Factory Default: 0.171 ohm 0.171 |
| FU2? Ls * 43 29.03 mH 43 29.03 |
| Factory Default: 29.03 mH 29.03 |
| FU2? Tr * 44 260 ms 44 260 |
| Factory Default: 260 ms 260 |
| FU2? Lsigma * 42 3.34 mH 42 3.34 |
| Factory Default: 3.34 mH 3.34 |
[Motor rotation mode when set to All, Enc Test, Tr]
1. With PG Option installed: if FU2-40 is set to All,
Stator resistance (Rs), Leakage inductance
(Lsigma), Stator inductance (Ls), No-load current
(Noload-Curr), Speed Encoder status and Rotor
constants (Tr) are calculated.
2. Without PG Option installed: if FU2-40 is set to All,
Stator resistance (Rs), Leakage inductance
(Lsigma), Stator inductance (Ls) and No-load
current (Noload-Curr) are calculated.
3. If FU2-40 is set to Rs + Lsigma, Stator resistance
(Rs), Leakage inductance (Lsigma) are calculated.
4. Either PG Status or Rotor constant (Tr) can be
checked with PG option card installed.
[Motor non-rotation mode when set to Rs + Lsigma]
1. Stator resistance (Rs), Leakage inductance
(Lsigma) can be calculated by setting FU2-40 to
Rs + Lsigma.
2. User should set Stator resistance (Rs), No-load
current (Noload-Curr) and Rotor constants (Tr).
3. To automatically calculate the Stator inductance
(Ls), No-load current (Noload-Curr) and Rotor
constants (Tr), set the motor rotation mode and
FU2-40 to All.
[With PG option card installed]
1. Set EXT -12 to Feed-back.
2. Set EXT -15 to (A + B).
3. If FU2-40 is set to All, Stator resistance (Rs),
Leakage inductance (Lsigma), Stator induc tance
(Ls), No-load current (Noload-Curr), and Rotor
constants (Tr) are calculated.
4. Stator resistance (Rs), Leakage inductance
(Lsigma) can be calculated by setting FU2-40 to Rs
+ Lsigma.
5. User should set the Stator inductance (Ls), No-load
current (Noload-Curr) and Rotor constants (Tr) if
FU2-40 is set to Rs + Lsigma.
[Without PG option card installed]
1. If FU2-40 is set to All, Stator resistance (Rs),
Leakage inductance (Lsigma), Stator inductance
(Ls), No-load current (Noload-Curr) are calculated.
2. If FU2-40 is set to Rs + Lsigma, Stator resistance
(Rs), Leakage inductance (Lsigma) is calculated.
3. User should set the Stator inductance (Ls), No-load
current (Noload-Curr).
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
109
| FU2-40 | LCD display | Description | |
| 0 | No | Auto-tuning disabled | |
| 1 | All | Auto-tuning all parameters |
|
| 2 | Rs + Lsigma | Stator resistance (Rs) and Leakage inductance (Lsigma) Auto-tuning |
|
| 3 | Enc Test | PG status check | |
| 4 | Tr | Rotor constant(Tr) calculation |
|
| ☞ Note 1: Ls and Noload-Curr are only valid during Motor Rotation mode. ☞ Note 2: The motor constants values change with temperature change, so auto tuning is to be conducted after the temperature of the motor is stabilized. ☞ Note 3: The auto-tuning result could be different unless LG motor is used. ☞ Note 4: The actual motor parameters (Rs, Rr, Lsigma, Tr) can be used or set by user. |
|||
| Code | LCD display | Name | Description |
| FU2- 34 |
Noload-Curr | No Load Motor Current (RMS) |
Setting and display the No Load Motor Current (RMS) |
| FU2- 40 |
Auto tuning | Auto Tuning | Auto-tuning enable |
| FU2- 41 |
Rs | resistance Stator | Setting a Stator resistance Rs nd display the |
| FU2- 42 |
Lsigma | inductance Leakage | Setting and display the Lsigma |
| FU2- 43 |
Ls | inductance Stator | Setting and display the Stator inductance Ls |
| FU2- 44 |
Tr | constant Rotor | Setting and display the Rotor constant Tr. |
| [Keypad display during Auto-tuning of motor parameters] | |||
| Display | Code | Description | |
| LED | 7-Seg. | ||
| Rs Tuning | T1 | Displayed during Stator resistance (Rs) Auto-tuning |
FU2- 40 |
| Lsigma Tuning |
T2 | Displayed during Leakage inductance (Lsigma) auto tuning. |
|
| Ls Tuning | T3 | Displayed during Stator inductance (Ls) and No-load current auto-tuning. |
|
| ENC Test | T4 | Displayed during Encoder auto tuning. |
|
| Tr Tuning | T5 | Displayed during Rotor filter time constant (Tr) auto-tuning |
[Keypad error display after Encoder test]
| Display | Code | Description | |
| LED | 7-Segment | ||
| Enc Err | T6 | Displayed when incorrect Encoder wiring error occurs |
FU2- 40 |
| Enc Rev | T7 | Displayed when Encoder wiring is connected reversly. |
[Motor parameter display corresponding to inverter
capacity]
| Motor parameter | Class | inverter capacity |
|||
| Rs | Lsigma | Ls | Tr | ||
| 0.8[kW] ~ 5.5[kW] |
X.XXX ohm |
X.XX mH |
X.XX mH |
XXX ms |
200V |
| 7.5[kW] ~ 55[kW] | X.X mohm |
X.XXX mH |
X.XX mH |
XXX ms |
|
| 0.8[kW] ~ 1.5[kW] |
X.XX ohm |
X.X mH | X. mH | XXX ms | 400V |
| 2.2[kW] ~ 15[kW] | X.XXX ohm |
X.XX mH |
X.X mH | XXX ms | |
| 18.5[kW] ~ 75[kW] |
X.X mohm |
X.XXX mH |
X.XX | XXX ms |
☞ Note: For 7-segment Keypad, parameter unit is not
displayed.
FU2-45: P Gain for Sensorless Control
FU2-46: I Gain for Sensorless Control
SL P-gain is the proportional gain of speed controller. If
this value is set high, you can get fast speed response
characteristic. However, if this value is set too high, the
steady state characteristics may become unstable.
SL I-gain is the integral gain of speed controller. If this
value is set low, you can get better transient response
characteristic and steady state characteristic . However,
if this value is set too low, there may be an overshoot in
speed control.
FU2? SL P-gain
45 1000 45 1000
Factory Default: 1000 1000
FU2? SL I-gain
46 100 46 100
Factory Default: 100 100
Related Functions: FU2-30~37 [Motor related parameters]
FU2-39 [Control mode selection]
EXT-01 [Sub Board Type Display]
EXT-14 [Encoder Feedback Frequency]
EXT-15 [Pulse Input Signal Selection]
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
110
| ☞ Note: The response time of a system is affected by the load inertia. For better control performance, set the FU2- 37 [Load Inertia] correctly. |
| FU2-47: PID Operation Selection FU2?Proc PI mode 47 --- No --- 47 0 |
| This code selects the PID control. For HVAC or Pump applications, the PID control can be used to adjust the actual output by comparing a feedback with a ‘Set-point’given to the inverter. This ‘Set-point’can be in the form of Speed, Temperature, Pressure, Flow level, etc. The ‘Set-point’and the feedback signals are provided externally to the inverter analog input terminals V1, V2 or I. The inverter compares the signals in calculating ‘total-error’which is reflected in the inverter output. Please see FU2-50 to FU2-54 for more detail. ☞ Note: PID control can be bypassed to manual operation temporarily by defining one of the multifunction input terminals (P1~P3) to “Open-loop”. The inverter will change to manual operation from PID control when this terminal is ON, and change back to PID control when this terminal is OFF. FU2-48: PID F Gain FU2-49: PID Reference Mode Selection FU2-50: PID Output Direction Selection Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode] I/O-01 to I/O-10 [Analog Signal Setting] I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Multi-Function Input] EXT-15 to EXT-21 [Pulse Input Setting] FU2-50 to FU2-54 [PID Feedback] FU2? PID F-Gain 48 0.0 % 48 0.0 |
| This code sets F Gain value for use of Feed Forward control. |
| Related Functions: FU2-30 ~ FU2-37 [Motor Parameters] FU2-40 [Control Method] |
| Factory Default: No 0 |
| Factory Default: 0.0% 0.0 |
When it is set to 100%, the responsiveness (%) of output
F gain value from controller reference value is 100%.
Used when fast response is needed.
Caution) Control System output may become unstable if
this value is set too high.
This code selects reference input for PID control.
This code selects the direction of output value of PID
controller. The output value is added to Target frequency.
FU2-51: PID Feedback Signal Selection
FU2-52: P Gain for PID Control
FU2-53: I Time for PID Control
FU2-54: D Time for PID Control
FU2-55: High Limit Frequency for PID Control
FU2-56: Low Limit Frequency for PID Control
Select the feedback signal for PID control. This can be
set one of ‘I’(4-20mA), ‘V1’, ‘V2’according to the signal
(current or voltage) and the terminal (V1 (0-10V) or V2
(Sub-B board)). Refer to I/O 6-10 for I, I/O1-5 for V1 and
EXT -5-10 [V2 Analog Ref. Freq setting] for V2.
Set the proportional gain for PID control. When P-Gain is
set at 100% and I-Time at 0.0 second, it means the PID
controller output is 100% for 100% error value. P-Gain is
set to 50% and I- Time to 0.0 sec, PID controller output
becomes 50% for 100% error value.
FU2? PID F/B
51 I 51 0
Factory Default: I 0
FU2? PID P-gain
52 1.0 % 52 1.0
Factory Default: 1.0 % 1.0
FU2? PID I-time
53 10.0 sec 53 10.0
Factory Default: 10.0 sec 10.0
FU2?Aux Ref Mode
49 None 49 0
Factory Default: None 0
FU2? PID Out Dir
50 Target Freq. 50 0
Factory Default: Target Freq. 0
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
111
| Set the integral gain for PID control. This is the time the PID controller takes to output 100% for 100% error value. FU2? PID D-time 54 0.0 ms 54 0.0 |
| Set the differential gain for PID control. FU2? PID limit-H 55 60.00 Hz 55 60.00 |
| This is the frequencyupper limit at which the output frequency is limited during PID control. FU2? PID limit-L 56 0.00 Hz 56 0.00 |
| This is the frequencylower limit at which the output frequency is limited during PID control. FU2-57: PID Output Inversion FU2-58: PID Output Scale FU2-59: PID P2 Gain FU2-60: P Gain Scale FU2? PID Out Inv. 57 --- No --- 57 0 |
| This code is used to invert PID controller output. FU2?PID Out Scale 58 100.0 % 58 100.0 |
| This code sets the scale of PID controller output. FU2? PID P2-gain 59 100.0 % 59 100.0 |
| This code sets the second P-Gain for PID control. FU2?P-gain Scale 60 100.0 % 60 100.0 |
| Factory Default: 0.0 ms 0.0 |
| Factory Default: 60.00 Hz 60.00 |
| Factory Default: 0.00 Hz 0.00 |
| Factory Default: No 0 |
| Factory Default: 100.0 % 100.0 |
| Factory Default: 100.0 % 100.0 |
| Factory Default: 100.0 % 100.0 |
This code sets the scale of P-Gain and P2-Gain. (FU2-
52, FU2-59)
l PID output value can be set to ‘0’by setting a multifunction input terminal (P1 ~ P6) to ‘Open loop’in
I/O-12 ~ I/O-14 or EXT -02 ~ EXT -04.
l The accumulated value by I-Gain can be set to ‘0’
by setting a multi-function input terminal (P1 ~ P6) to
‘iTerm Clear’in I/O-12 ~ I/O-14 or EXT -02 ~ EXT -04.
l The second P-Gain can be selected for PID
controller by setting a multi-function input (I/O-12 ~
I/O14 or EXT -02 ~ EXT -04) to ‘Open-loop’.
[P Control] This is to compensate the error of a system
proportionally. This is used to make the controller
response fast for an error. When P control is used alone,
the system is easily affected by an external disturbance
during steady state.
[I Control] This is to compensate the error of a system
integrally. This is used to compensate the steady state
error by accumulating them. Using this control alone
makes the system unstable.
[PI control] This control is stable in many systems. If “D
control”is added, it becomes the 3rd order system. In
some systems this may lead to system instability.
[D Control] Since the D control uses the variation ratio
of error, it has the merit of controlling the error before the
error is too large. The D control requires a large control
quantity at start, but has the tendency of increasing the
stability of the system. This control does not affect the
steady state error directly, but increases the system gain
because it has an attenuation effect on the system. As a
result, the differential control component has an effect on
decreasing the steady state error. Since the D control
operates on the error signal, it cannot be used alone.
Always use it with the P control or PI control.
Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
FU2-40 [Control Method]
I/O-01 ~ I/O-10 [Analog Signal Scaling]
EXT-15 ~ EXT-21 [Pulse Input Signals]
Chapter 5 - Parameter Description [FU2]
112
PID Control Block Diagram
Process PID Control Setting
Freq
Mode
PID FBK
select
Accel/
Decel
| FU2- 49 PID REF Display FU2- PID upper limit frequency Gain PID F Gain: Feed Forward DRV- 04 etting 0 Aux Ref Mode 1, 2 |
Aux Ref Mode FU2-51
wTarFreq
Sampling
Time
(10msec)
| V1 I V2 3, 4, |
FU2- 49 |
DRV-
15
DRV-
| 15 |
PID FBK
Display
DRV-
14
FU2-
47 proc PI mode
PID
K
f
Limit
55
proc PI dis
FU2-
PID
| 61 ( 62 |
EXT- 2~4 I/O- 12~14 Multi-function input terminal P1~P6) setting |
Band Con
FU2-58
FU2-
56
PID Low Limit
Frequency
PID output
direction:
(Target)
FU2-50
PID Gain
Output
PID Ref
Keypad-1
Keypad-2
V1
I
V2
eypad-1
eypad-2
V1
I
V2
Freq
FU2-
PID Band
When PID error > PID
Band freq. & during
Acceleration
FU2-52
FU2-53
FU2-54
PID P Gain
PID I Gain
PID D Gain
K
P
K
I
KD
0
I/O- 12~14 Multi-function input
terminal (P1~P6)
EXT- 2~4 setting
I Term Clear
K
P 2
K
FU2-59 PID P2 Gain
P Gain2
FU2-60 PID P Gain Scale
PID
Deviation Target Freq.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
113
PID Wiring Example
PID Control
Selection
Power
Supply
U VW
RS T G
FX FWD Run/Stop
RX REV Run/Stop
P1 (Setting: Open-loop)
CM Common Terminal
M
VR Power for Speed Signal
(+12V, 10mA)
V1 Speed Signal Input
0-10V (1kohm)
I Reference Feed back
5G Common for VR, V1, I
| 0V 24V Power Supply |
AC220V 50/60 Hz
| (OUT) Feedback (4~20mA) |
(COM) (24V)
Set point
setting
PUMP
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
114
FU2-69: Accel/Decel Change Frequency
This function is used to change Accel/Decel ramp at a
certain frequency. This is useful in textile machine
application.
☞ Note: If the multi-function input terminal (I/O-12 ~ I/O-14)
is set to ‘XCEL-L’, XCEL-M’, or XCEL-H’, The MultiAccel/Decel Time (I/O-25 ~ I/O-38) has the priority.
[Accel/Decel Change Operation]
FU2-70: Reference Frequency for Accel/Decel
This is the reference frequency for acceleration and
deceleration. If a decided Accel/Decel time from a
frequencyto a target frequency is required, set this value
to ‘Delta freq’.
Setting Range
LCD 7-Seg
Description
Max freq 0
The Accel/Decel time is the time that
takes to reach the maximum
frequency from 0 Hz.
Delta freq 1
The Accel/Decel time is the time that
takes to reach a target frequency
from a frequency (currently operating
frequency).
| FU2-71: Accel/Decel Time Scale |
| This is used to change the time scale. |
| FU2-72: Power On Display |
| This code selects the parameter to be displayed first on keypad (DRV-00) when the power is turned on. |
| FU2?PowerOn disp 72 0 |
| 72 0 |
| Factory Default: 0 0 |
| Related Functions: DRV-01, DRV-02 [Accel/Decel Time] FU2-71 [Accel/Decel Time Scale] I/O-25 ~ I/O-38 [1st ~ 7th Accel/Decel Time] |
| FU2? Time scale 71 0.1 sec |
| 71 1 |
| Factory Default: 0.1 sec 0.1 |
| Related Functions: DRV-01, DRV-02 [Accel/Decel Time] FU2-70 [Reference Freq. for Accel/Decel] I/O-25 ~ I/O-38 [1st ~ 7th Accel/Decel Time] |
Setting Range
LCD 7-Seg
Description
0.01 sec 0
The Accel/Decel time is changed by 0.01
second. The maximum setting range is
600 seconds.
0.1 sec 1
The Accel/Decel time is changed by 0.1
second. The maximum setting range is
6000 seconds.
1 sec 2
The Accel/Decel time is changed by 1
second. The maximum setting range is
60000 seconds.
FU2?Acc/Dec freq
70 Max freq 70 0
Factory Default: Max freq 0
FU2?Acc/Dec ch F
69 0.00 Hz 69 0
Factory Default: 0.00 Hz 0
| Output Frequency | Frequen |
| DRV-01 [AccTime] | |
| DRV-02 [DecTime] |
| FX |
Max. Frequency Accel/Decel
Change
I/O-25 [Acc Time1] I/O-26 [Dec Time1]
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
115
| Setting Range |
Description |
| 0 | DRV-00 [Command Frequency] |
| 1 | DRV-01 [Acceleration Time] |
| 2 | DRV-02 [Deceleration Time] |
| 3 | DRV-03 [Drive Mode] |
| 4 | DRV-04 [Frequency Mode] |
| 5 | DRV-05 [Step Frequency 1] |
| 6 | DRV-06 [Step Frequency 2] |
| 7 | DRV-07 [Step Frequency 3] |
| 8 | DRV-08 [Output Current] |
| 9 | DRV-09 [Motor Speed] |
| 10 | DRV-10 [DC link Voltage |
| 11 | DRV-11 [User Display selected in FU2-73] |
| 12 | DRV-12 [Fault Display] |
FU2-73: User display selection
Related Function: DRV-11 [User display selection]
Select the display as shown below in FU2-73 [User
display selection].
| Setting | FU2-73 | Name | Description |
| 0 | Voltage | Output voltage |
Display output voltage of the inverter (Factory setting) |
| 1 | Watt | Output power |
Display output power of the inverter |
☞ Note: The displayed vlaue of “Watt”is approximate
value.
FU2-74: Gain for Motor Speed Display
This code is used to change the motor speed display to
rotating speed (r/min) or mechanical speed (m/min).The
display is calculated by following equation.
Rotating speed = 120 x F / P, where F=Output frequency,
P= motor pole number
Mechanical speed = Rotating speed x Motor RPM
Display Gain
| FU2-75: DB (Dynamic Braking) Resistor Mode Selection |
| This code is used to protect the DB resistor from over heating. l The inverter turns the DB turn on signal OFF when the Continuous Turn On Time expires during dynamic braking, and an over voltage fault could occur. When this happens, increase the deceleration time or install an external high-duty DB resistor. l Install an exterior high-duty DB resistor when the load accelerates and decelerates frequently. Set the FU2-75 [DB Resistor Mode selection] to ‘Ext. DB-R’, and set the FU2-76 [Duty of DB Resistor]. Refer to Basic Wiring in Chapter 1. Installation or Power Terminal Wiring. l This does not apply to 40~100 HP inverters. They need the Optional DB unit to use DB resistor. |
| FU2-76: Duty of DB (Dynamic Braking) Resistor |
| FU2? DB mode 75 Int. DB-R |
| 75 1 |
| Factory Default: Int. DB-R 1 |
| Related Functions: DRV-00 [Output Frequency] DRV-09 [Motor Speed] FU2-31 [Number of Motor Pole] |
| FU2? DB %ED 76 10 % |
| 76 10 |
| Factory Default: 10 % 10 |
Setting Range
LCD 7-Seg
Description
None 0
This is selected when there is no resistor
connected. At this time, inverter does not
generate DB turn on signal.
Int. DB-R 1
This is selected when using the internal
DB resistor. This must be selected for
1~5 HP inverters because they have
internal DB resistor as a default.
Enable Duty (%): 2 ~ 3 %
Continuous Turn On Time: 5 seconds
Ext. DB-R 2
This is selected when using an external
DB resistor. This must be selected for
1~30 HP inverters. This must be selected
for 1~5 HP inverters in case of using an
external DB resistor.
Enable Duty (%): 0 ~ 30 %
Continuous Turn On Time: 15 seconds
FU2? RPM factor
74 100 % 74 100
Factory Default: 100 % 100
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
116
| This must be set when using an external DB resistor. The duty is calculated by ‘%ED=Decel time * 100 / (Accel time + Steady speed time + Decel time + Stop status time)’. FU2-79: Software Version FU2? S/W Version 79 Ver X.X 79 X.X |
| Displays the software version. This will vary depending on software version integrated. FU2-81 ~ FU2-90: 2nd Motor Related Functions These functions are displayed only when one of the multifunction inputs is set at ‘2nd func’in I/O-12 to I/O-14. When using two motors with an inverter by exchanging them, different values can be set for the 2nd motor by using the multifunction input terminal. Following table is the 2nd functions corresponding to the 1st functions. [2nd Acc time] DRV-01 [Acc. time] Acceleration time FU2-82 [2nd Dec time] DRV-02 [Dec. time] Deceleration time FU2-83 [2nd BaseFreq] FU1-21 [Base freq] Base Frequency FU2-84 [2nd V/F] FU1-29 [V/F Pattern] Volts/Hz mode FU2-85 [2nd F-boost] FU1-27 [Fwd Boost] Forward torque boost FU2-86 [2nd R-boost] FU1-28 [Rev Boost] Reverse torque boost FU2-87 [2nd Stall] FU1-60 [Stall Level] Stall prevention level FU2-88 [2nd ETH 1min] FU1-51 [ETH 1min] ETH level for 1 minute FU2-88 [2nd ETH cont] FU1-52 [ETH cont] ETH level for continuous FU2-90 [2nd R-Curr] FU2-33 [Rated-Curr] Motor rated current l The 1st functions are applied if the multifunction terminal is not defined to ‘2nd Func’or if it is not ON. The 2nd function parameters are applied when the multifunction input terminal set to ‘2nd Func’is ON. Parameters not listed on the table above are applied to the 2nd motor as to the 1st motor. |
| Factory Default: Ver. X.X X.X |
2nd Functions 1st Functions Description
FU2-81
l Exchange the motor connection from the 1st motor to the
2nd motor or the opposite when the motor is stopped.
Over voltage or over current fault can occur when the
motor connection is exchanged during operation.
l The ‘User V/F’function of FU1-29 [V/F Pattern] is used
for both the 1st motor and the 2nd motor.
FU2-91: Parameter Read
FU2-92: Parameter Write
This is useful for programming multiple inverters to have
same parameter settings. The LCD keypad can read
(upload) the parameter settings from the inverter
memory and can write (download) them to other
inverters. This function is only available with LCD
keypad.
| iS5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE E X T RUN ESC SHIFT DRV FU1 F U 2 ENT PROG RESET STOP LE-200 I / O |
| Risk of Injury or Electric Shock Risk of Electric Shock Risk of Electric Shock WARNING |
| iS5 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE E X T RUN ESC SHIFT DRV FU1 F U 2 ENT PROG RESET STOP LE-200 I / O |
| Risk of Injury or Electric Shock Risk of Electric Shock Risk of Electric Shock WARNING |
FU2? Para. read
91 --- No ---
Factory Default: No
FU2? Para. write
92 --- No ---
Factory Default: No
FU2? Para. read
91 --- Yes ---
Parameter Upload
Parameter Download
FU2? Para. write
92 --- Yes ---
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
117
FU2-93: Parameter Initialize
This is used to initialize parameters back to the factory
default values. Each parameter group can be initialized
separately.
| Setting Range | Description | |
| LCD | 7-Seg | |
| No | 0 | Displayed after initializing parameters. |
| All Groups | 1 | All parameter groups are initialized to factory default value. |
| DRV | 2 | Only Drive group is initialized. |
| FU1 | 3 | Only Function 1 group is initialized. |
| FU2 | 4 | Only Function 2 group is initialized. |
| I/O | 5 | Only Input/Output group is initialized. |
| EXT | 6 | Only External group is initialized. |
| COM | 7 | Only Communication group is initialized. |
| APP | 8 | Only Application group is initialized. |
☞ Note: FU1-30 ~ FU1-37 [Motor Parameters] must be set
first after initializing parameters.
| FU2-94: Parameter Lock |
| This function is used to lock the parameters from being changed. When the parameters are locked, the display arrow changes from solid to dashed line. The lock and unlock code is ‘12’. |
| FU2-99: Return Code (7-Segment Keypad) |
| This code is used to exit a group when using a 7- PROG/ENT PROG/ENT key |
| FU2? Para. lock 94 0 |
| 94 0 |
| Factory Default: 0 0 |
| 99 1 |
| Factory Default: 1 |
| Related Functions: FU1-99 [Return Code] I/O-99 [Return Code] EXT-99 [Return Code] COM-99 [Return Code] |
segment keypad. After pressing key, set the
value to ‘1’and press the again to exit.
FU2? Para. init
93 --- No --- 93 0
Factory Default: No 0
Chapter 5 - Parameter Description [I/O]
118
6.4 Input/Output Group [I/O]
I/O-00: Jump to Desired Code #
Jumping directly to any parameter code can be
accomplished by entering the desired code number. This
code is available only with LCD keypad.
I/O-01 ~ I/O-05: Analog Voltage Input (V1) Signal
Adjustment
This is used to adjust the analog voltage input signal
when the frequency is referenced by the control terminal
‘V1’. This function is applied when DRV-04 is set to ‘V1’
or ‘V1+I’. Reference frequency versus Analog voltage
input curve can be made by four parameters of I/O-02 ~
I/O-04.
This is the filtering time constant for V1 signal input.
Increase this value if the V1 signal is affected by noise
causing unstable operation of the inverter. Increasing
this value makes response time slower.
This is the minimum voltage of the V1 input at which
inverter outputs minimum frequency.
This is the inverter output minimum frequency when
there is the minimum voltage (I/O-02) on the V1 terminal.
In torque mode, the display is changed to [%].
| This is the maximum voltage of the V1 input at which inverter outputs maximum frequency. I/O? V1 freq y2 05 60.00 Hz 05 60.00 |
| This is the inverter output maximum frequency when there is the maximum voltage (I/O-03) on the V1 terminal. In torque mode, the display is changed to [%]. Setting FU2-39 [Control mode select] to Vector_Torque or Sensorless_T, the setting value is changed to Torque value as below. [Reference Frequency vs. Analog Voltage Input, V1 (0 to 10V)] Reference Frequency I/O-05 Analog Voltage Input (V1) I/O-03 I/O-02 I/O-04 Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode] FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency] |
| I/O-06 ~ I/O-10: Analog Current Input (I) Signal Adjustment |
| This is used to adjust the analog current input signal when the terminal ‘I’references the frequency. This function is applied when DRV-04 is set to ‘V1’or V1+I’. Reference frequency versus Analog current input curve can be made by four parameters of I/O-07 ~ I/O-10. |
| I/O? V1 volt x2 04 0.00 V |
| 04 10.00 |
| Factory Default: 10.00 V 10.00 |
| Factory Default: 60.00 Hz 60.00 |
Code Factory Default Setting Range
I/O-02 0 [V] 0 ~ 10 [V]
I/O-03 0 [%] 0 ~ 150[%]
I/O-04 10 [V] 0 ~ 10 [V]
I/O-05 100 [%] 0 ~ 150[%]
I/O? Jump code
00 1
Factory Default: 1
I/O? V1 filter
01 10 ms 01 10
Factory Default: 10 ms 10
I/O? V1 volt x1
02 0.00 V 02 0.00
Factory Default: 0.00 V 0.00
I/O? V1 freq y1
03 0.00 Hz 03 0.00
Factory Default: 0.00 Hz 0.00
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
119
| This is the filtering time constant for ‘I’signal input. If the ‘I’signal is affected by noise causing unstable operation of the inverter, increase this value. Increasing this value makes response time slower. I/O? I curr x1 07 4.00 mA 07 4.00 |
| This is the minimum current of the ‘I’input at which inverter outputs minimum frequency. I/O? I freq y1 08 0.00 Hz 08 0.00 |
| This is the inverter output minimum frequency when there is minimum current (I/O-07) on the ‘I’terminal. In torque mode, the display is changed to [%]. I/O? I curr x2 09 20.00 mA 09 20.00 |
| This is the maximum current of the ‘I’input at which inverter outputs maximum frequency. I/O? I freq y2 10 60.00 Hz 10 60.00 |
| This is the inverter output maximum frequency when there is the maximum current (I/O-09) on the ‘I’terminal. In torque mode, the display is changed to [%]. Setting FU2-39 [Control mode select] to Vector_Torque or Sensorless_T, the setting value is changed to Torque value as below; |
| I/O? I filter 06 10 ms 06 10 |
| Factory Default: 10 ms 10 |
| Factory Default: 4.00 mA 4.00 |
| Factory Default: 0.00 Hz 0.00 |
| Factory Default: 20.00 mA 20.00 |
| Factory Default: 60.00 Hz 60.00 |
Code Default Setting Code Default Setting
I/O-07 4 [mA] 0 ~ 20[mA] I/O-09 20[mA] 0 ~ 20[mA]
I/O-08 0 [%] 0 ~ 150[%] I/O-10 100[%] 0 ~ 150[%]
[Reference Frequency vs. Analog Current Input, I (4 to 20mA)]
I/O-11: Criteria for Analog Input Signal Loss
This is to set the criteria for analog input signal loss
when DRV-04 [Frequency Mode] is set to ‘V1’, ‘I’or
‘V1+I’. Following table shows the setting value.
| Setting Range | Description | |
| LCD | 7-Seg | |
| None | 0 | Does not check the analog input signal. |
| half of x1 | 1 | The inverter determines that the frequency reference is lost when the analog input signal is less than halfof the minimum value (I/O-02 or I/O-07). |
| below x1 | 2 | The inverter determines that the frequency reference is lost when the analog input signal is less than the minimum value (I/O- 02 or I/O-07). |
When the analog input signal is lost, inverter displays the
following table.
| Setting | Description | |
| LCD | 7-Seg | |
| LOP | PL | Loss of frequency reference from Option Board (DPRAM time out) |
| LOR | RL | Loss of frequency reference from Option Board (Communication fault) |
| LOV | VL | Loss of analog input signal, V1 |
| LOI | IL | Loss of analog input signal, I |
| LOX | XL | Loss of frequency reference from Sub-Board, V2 or ENC |
Related Functions: I/O-48 [Lost command] selects the
operation after determining the loss of frequency
reference.
Reference Frequency
I/O-10
Analog Voltage
Input (V1)
I/O-08
I/O-07 I/O-09
Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency]
I/O? Wire broken
11 None 11 0
Factory Default: None 0
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
120
| The following table shows the selection in I/O-48. | ||
| Setting Range | Description | |
| LCD | 7-Seg | |
| None | 0 | Continuous operating after loss of frequency reference. |
| FreeRun | 1 | Inverter cuts off its output after determining loss of frequency reference. |
| Stop | 2 | Inverter stops by its Decel pattern and Decel time after determining loss of frequency reference. |
| I/O-49 [Time out] sets the waiting time before determining the loss of reference signal. Inverter waits to determine the loss of a reference signal until times out. Command frequency can be issued as Rpm when setting rpm in DRV-16 [Hz/Rpm Display] and as Torque reference when FU2-39 [Control Mode Select]. Torque reference sets as the percentage of Rated Torque Current. ☞ Note: I/O-48 and I/O-49 also apply when DRV-04 is set to ‘Keypad-1’or ‘Keypad-2’for determining the loss of command frequency. |
||
| I/O-12~14, 93~97: Multi-function Input Terminal ‘P1, P2, P3’, ‘RST’, ‘BX’, ‘JOG’, ‘FX’, ‘RX’Define I/O? P1 define 12 Speed-L 12 0 |
||
| Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode] I/O-02 [V1 Input Minimum Voltage] I/O-07 [I Input Minimum Current] I/O-48 [Lost command] I/O-49 [Time out] |
||
| Factory Default: Speed-L 0 | ||
| I/O? P2 define 13 Speed-M 13 1 |
||
| Factory Default: Speed-M 1 | ||
| I/O? P3 define 14 Speed-H 14 2 |
||
| Factory Default: Speed-H 2 |
Multi-function input terminals c an be defined for many
different applications. The following table shows the
various definitions for them.
☞ Note: From 40HP and above inverter, only BX is
settable In I/O-94.
| Setting Range | Description | |
| LCD | 7-Seg | |
| Speed-L | 0 | Multi-step speed - Low |
| Speed-M | 1 | Multi-step speed - Mid |
| Speed-H | 2 | Multi-step speed - High |
| XCEL-L | 3 | Multi-accel/decel - Low |
| XCEL-M | 4 | Multi-accel/decel - Mid |
| XCEL-H | 5 | Multi-accel/decel - High |
| Dc-brake | 6 | DC injection braking during stop |
| 2nd Func | 7 | Exchange to 2nd functions |
| Exchange | 8 | Exchange to commercial power line |
| -Reserved- | 9 | Reserved for future use |
| Up | 10 | Up drive |
| Down | 11 | Down drive |
| 3-Wire | 12 | 3 wire operation |
| Ext Trip-A | 13 | External trip A |
| Ext Trip-B | 14 | External trip B |
| iTerm Clear | 15 | Used for PID control |
| Open-loop | 16 | Exchange between PID mode and V/F mode |
| Main-drive | 17 | Exchange between Option and Inverter |
| Analog hold | 18 | Hold the analog input signal |
| XCEL stop | 19 | Disable accel and decel |
| P Gain2 | 20 | Used for PID control |
| SEQ-L | 21 | Sequence operation - Low |
| SEQ-M | 22 | Sequence operation - Mid |
| SEQ-H | 23 | Sequence operation - High |
| Manual | 24 | Exchange between Sequence operation and Manual operation |
| Go step | 25 | Triggering Sequence operation (Auto-B) |
| Hold step | 26 | Hold last step (Auto-A) |
| Trv Off.Lo | 27 | Used for Traverse Operation |
| Trv Off.Hi | 28 | |
| Interlock1 | 29 | Used for MMC operation |
| Interlock2 | 30 | |
| Interlock3 | 31 | |
| Interlock4 | 32 | |
| Speed-X | 33 | Additional Step frequency selection |
| Reset | 34 | Reset |
| BX | 35 | Emergency Stop |
| JOG | 36 | Jog |
| FX | 37 | Forward Run/Stop |
| RX | 38 | Reverse Run/Stop |
| Ana Change | 39 | Analog input Switch-over |
| Pre excite | 40 | Pre excitation. |
| Spd/Torque | 41 | Speed/Torque Switch-over |
| ASR P/PI | 42 | ASR P/PI control select |
☞ Note: Refer to DRV-05~7, I/O-20~24, I/O-85~92 for I/O
~2, 33 Speed-L, Speed-M, Speed-H and Speed-X.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
121
| [Speed-L, Speed-M, Speed-H] By setting P1, P2, P3 terminals to ‘Speed-L’, ‘Speed-M’ and ‘Speed-H’respectively, inverter can operate at the preset frequency set in DRV-05 ~ DRV-07 and I/O-20 ~ I/O-24. The step frequencies are determined by the combination of P1, P2 and P3 terminals as shown in the following table. |
||||
| Step Frequency |
Parameter Code |
Speed-H (P3) |
Speed-M (P2) |
Speed-L (P1) |
| Step Freq- 0 |
DRV-00 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| Step Freq- 1 |
DRV-05 | 0 | 0 | 1 |
| Step Freq- 2 |
DRV-06 | 0 | 1 | 0 |
| Step Freq- 3 |
DRV-07 | 0 | 1 | 1 |
| Step Freq- 4 |
I/O-21 | 1 | 0 | 0 |
| Step Freq- 5 |
I/O-22 | 1 | 0 | 1 |
| Step Freq- 6 |
I/O-23 | 1 | 1 | 0 |
| Step Freq- 7 |
I/O-24 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
| 0: OFF, 1: ON ☞ I/O-20 [Jog Frequency] can be used as one of the step frequencies. ☞ If the ‘Jog’terminal is ON, inverter operates to Jog frequency regardless of other terminal inputs. |
[Multi-Step Frequency Operation]
☞ Note: The frequency for ‘Speed 0’is determined by DRV-
04.
P1-CM
| ON | ON | |||
| O | N | O | N | |
| O | N | |||
| ON | ||||
| O | N | |||
| O | N | |||
| ON ON Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Jog |
Step 0 |
Step 1 |
Step 2 |
Step 3 |
Output Frequency
Time
Time
P2-CM Time
P3-CM Time
JOG-CM Time
FX-CM Time
RX-CM Time
Related Functions: DRV-05 ~ DRV-07 [Step Frequency]
I/O-20 [Jog Frequency]
I/O-20 ~ I/O-24 [Step Frequency]
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
122
| [XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H] By setting P1, P2 and P3 terminals to ‘XCEL-L’, ‘XCEL M’and ‘XCEL-H’respectively, up to 8 different Accel and Decel times can be used. The Accel/Decel time is set in DRV-01 ~ DRV-02 and I/O-25 ~ I/O-38. The Accel/Decel time is determined by the combination of P1, P2 and P3 terminals as shown in the following table. |
||||
| Accel/Decel Time |
Parameter Code |
XCEL-H (P3) |
XCEL-M (P2) |
XCEL-L (P1) |
| Accel Time-0 | DRV-01 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| Decel Time-0 | DRV-02 | |||
| Accel Time-1 | I/O-25 | 0 | 0 | 1 |
| Decel Time-1 | I/O-26 | |||
| Accel Time-2 | I/O-27 | 0 | 1 | 0 |
| Decel Time-2 | I/O-28 | |||
| Accel Time-3 | I/O-29 | 0 | 1 | 1 |
| Decel Time-3 | I/O-30 | |||
| Accel Time-4 | I/O-31 | 1 | 0 | 0 |
| Decel Time-4 | I/O-32 | |||
| Accel Time-5 | I/O-34 | 1 | 0 | 1 |
| Decel Time-5 | I/O-35 | |||
| Accel Time-6 | I/O-36 | 1 | 1 | 0 |
| Decel Time-6 | I/O-37 | |||
| Accel Time-7 | I/O-38 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
| Decel Time-7 | I/O-39 | |||
| 0: OFF, 1: ON [Multi-Accel/Decel Time Operation] P1-CM Output Frequency Time Time P2-CM Time P3-CM Time FX-CM Time Ref. Freq. Related Functions: I/O-25 ~ I/O-38 [1st ~7th Accel/Decel Time] |
[Dc-brake]
DC Injection Braking can be activated during inverter
stopped by configuring one of the multi-function input
terminals (P1, P2, P3) to ‘Dc-bake’. To activate the DC
Injection Braking, close the contact on the assigned
terminal while the inverter is stopped.
[Exchange]
Exchange is used to bypass the motor from the inverter
line to commercial power or the opposite. To bypass the
motor to commercial line, set the ‘Exchange’function in
multi-function output terminal and ‘INV line’, ‘COMM line’
function in multi-function output terminal. Speed search
function (FU2-22) is activated automatically during
exchanging operation.
| M2 M |
| U VW RST G FX RX P1 P3 CM VR V1 I 5G FM 5G 30A 30B 30C AXA AXC P2 Factory Setting: ‘Speed -L’ ‘Speed -M’ ‘Speed -H’ Power supply for speed signal: + 11V, 10mA Speed signal input: 0 ~ 10V Speed signal input: 4 ~20mA (250ohm) Common for VR, V1, I |
| Potentiometer (1 kohm, 1/2W) Shield |
| Speed signal Input2 |
| Forward Run/Stop |
| Reverse Run/Stop |
| ‘Exchange’ Common Terminal |
MOTOR
MCCB
M1
M2
AC220V Line
1
M1
[Wiring to By-Pass Motor to Commercial line]
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON ON
ON
Time 0 Time 1 Time 2 Time 3 Time 4 Time 5 Time 6 Time 7
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
123
[Exchanging Sequence]
[Up, Down]
By using the Up and Down function, the drive can
accelerate to a steady speed and decelerate down to a
desired speed by using only two input terminals.
[Up/Down Operation]
[3-Wire]
This function is for 3-wire start/stop control.
This function is mainly used with a momentary push
button to hold the current frequency output during
acceleration or deceleration.
[Wiring for 3-Wire Operation, P2 set to ‘3-Wire’]
[3-Wire Operation]
[Ext Trip-A]
This is a normally open contact input. When a terminal
set to ‘Ext Trip-A’is ON, inverter displays the fault and
cuts off its output. This can be used as an external latch
trip.
[Ext Trip-B]
This is a normally closed contact input. When a terminal
set to ‘Ext Trip-B’is OFF, inverter displays the fault and
cuts off its output. This can be used as an external latch
trip.
P1-CM
‘Up’
| O | N |
| ON | |
| ON |
Output Frequency
Time
Time
P2-CM
‘Down’ Time
FX-CM Time
Freq.
Max.
| FX | RX | P2 | CM |
P2-CM
| ON |
| ON |
| ON |
Output Frequency
Time
Time
FX-CM Time
RX-CM Time
Freq.
Max.
Freq.
max.
‘Exchange’-CM
FX-CM
| ON | |
| ON | |
| ON | |
| ON | |
| ON | ON |
| t1 | t2 Inverter |
| Inverter | Commercial |
| ON | ON |
Time
Time
Time
AXA-AXC
‘COMM line’ Time
M1 Time
M2 Time
Drive
Drive
Line Drive
t1, t2: 50msec (interlock time)
‘INV line’ Time
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
124
[iTerm Clear]
This function is used for PID control. When this terminal
is ON, the accumulated value by I-Gain is set to ‘0’.
Refer to PID Control Block Diagram.
[Open-loop]
This is used to exchange the control mode of inverter
from PID mode (Close Loop) to V/F mode (Open Loop).
DRV-03 [Drive Mode] and DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
are applied when the mode has been changed.
☞ Note: This function can be used only when the inverter is
stopped.
[Main-drive]
When an option board (like RS485, DeviceNet, F-Net) is
installed and used for the frequency setting and the
run/stop command, the inverter operationcan be
changed to manual operation using this function without
changing parameters.
FU1-02 [Frequency Mode] and FU1-01 [Drive Mode] are
applied when the mode has been changed.
☞ Note: this function can be used only when the inverter is
stopped.
[Analog hold]
When there is an analog input signal for frequency
reference and ‘Analog hold’terminal is ON, inverter fixes
its output frequency regardless of the frequency
reference change. The changed frequency reference is
applied when the terminal is OFF.
This function is useful when a system requires constant
speed after acceleration.
[Analog hold Operation]
| [XCEL stop] Inverter stops accelerating and decelerating when this terminal is ON. [P Gain2] This function is used to change P-Gain during PID operation. When this terminal is ON, PID controller changes P-Gain with PID P2-Gian set in FU2-59. Refer to PID Control Block Diagram. [SEQ-L, SEQ-M, SEQ-H] These functions are used for Auto drive (I/O-50). Five different sequences can be selected according to the combination of these terminals. Eight step frequencies, Accel/Decel time and steady speed time can be set for each sequence. The following table shows the sequence of selection. 0: OFF, 1: ON ☞ Note: The inverter stops after finishing all steps of that sequence once the Auto (Sequence) operation is started. To stop the inverter during sequence operation, use ‘BX’ terminal on the control terminal strip. |
| [Manual] This is used to exchange the operation mode of inverter from Auto (Sequence) to manual operation. DRV-03 [Drive Mode] and DRV-04 [Frequency Mode] are applied when the mode has been changed. ☞ Note: This function can be used only when the inverter is stopped. [Go step] This is used to trigger the next step in a sequence of Auto-B operation. |
| Related Functions: I/O-51 ~ I/O-84 [Sequence Operation] |
Sequence # Parameter
Code
Speed-H
(P3)
Speed-M
(P2)
Speed-L
(P1)
Sequence 1 0 0 1
Sequence 2 0 1 0
Sequence 3 1 0 0
Sequence 4 0 1 1
Sequence 5
I/O-50 ~
I/O-84
1 0 1
P1-CM
‘Analog hold’
Reference Frequency,
Output frequency
Time
| ON |
| Output Frequency |
Time
Reference Frequency
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
125
| [Hold step] This is used to hold the last step frequency in Auto-A operation. |
| [‘Go step’in Auto-B Operation] [‘Hold step’in Auto-A Operation] Time P1-CM ‘SEQ-L’ Output Frequency Time Time Time P2-CM ‘SEQ-M’ P3-CM ‘Go step’ Minimum 100msec SEQ1 / 2F SEQ2 / 2F SEQ1 / 1F SEQ3 / 2F SEQ3 / 1F P1-CM ‘SEQ-L’ Output Frequency Time Time Time P2-CM ‘SEQ-M’ P3-CM ‘Hold step’ SEQ2 / 2F SEQ1 / 2F SEQ2 / 1F SEQ1 / 1F Time |
| Related Functions: I/O-51 ~ I/O-84 [Sequence Operation] |
[Trv Off.Lo]
This function is used to make negative offset during
traverse operation.
[Trv Off.Hi]
This function is used to make positive offset during
traverse operation.
[Interlock1, 2, 3, 4]
This function is used for MMC operation. Refer to MMC
operation.
[Reset]
This function is set to use it as fault reset terminal when
ON.
[BX]
This function is set to use it as Emergency Stop terminal
when ON.
[JOG]
This function is set to use Jog operation terminal when
ON.
[FX]
This function is set to issue Forward Run.
[RX]
This function is set to issue Reverse Run.
[Ana Change]
Inverter changes its frequencyreference source from V1
to I when ON.
[Pre excite]
This setting switches the inverter in pre-exciting state
when assignning Pre excite to the desired terminal. This
function applies only the exciting current to a motor in
Sensorless_S control. In Vector_SPD control, the
inverter conducts pre-exciting to start a motor after the
magnetic -flux is established and holding torque, even
200% of motor nominal torque is guaranteed. When the
operation command is set to ON, the state changes from
pre-exciting to normal.
ON
ON
ON
ON ON ON ON
Sequence 1 Sequence 3 Sequence 2
ON
Sequence 1 Sequence 2
ON
ON
Related Functions: APP-06 ~ APP-07 [Traverse Offset]
Related Functions: APP-06 ~ APP-07 [Traverse Offset]
Related Functions: APP-29 [Inter-Lock Selection]
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
126
I/O
Run/Stop
Id
| A: Pre-excitating A |
[LCD Keypad Display] [7-Segment Keypad Display] The ‘JOG’terminal is not displayed on 7-Segment keypad. I/O-17: Filtering Time Constant for Multi-function Input Terminals OFF status ON status I/O?Ti Filt Num 17 15 17 15 |
| the input status of control terminals. -Board. ’terminal is not displayed on 7-Segment keypad. 15 0000 OFF status ON status 16 0000 |
|
| This is the response time constant for terminal inputs (JOG, FX, RX, P3, P2, P1, RST, BX). This is useful where there is a potential for noise. The response time is determined by ‘Filtering time constant * 0.5msec’. |
|
| I/O-20: Jog Frequency | |
| This code sets the jog frequenc y. See [Speed-L, Speed M, Speed-H] in I/O-12 ~ I/O-14. |
|
| I/O-21~24: Step Frequency 4, 5, 6, 7 I/O-85~92: Step Frequency 8, 9, 10, 11, 12… 15 |
|
| □□□ These codes set the step frequencies. These |
|
| Factory Default: 15 15 | |
| I/O? Jog freq 20 10.00 Hz |
|
| 20 10.00 | |
| Factory Default: 10.00 Hz 10.00 | |
| I/O? Step freq-4 21 40.00 Hz |
|
| 21 40.00 | |
| Factory Default: 40.00 Hz 40.00 | |
| I/O? Step freq-7 24 30.00 Hz |
|
| 24 30.00 | |
| Factory Default: 30.00 Hz 30.00 |
We
[Spd/Trq]
Speed or Torque mode select in Vector control.
Disabled in Sensorless vector
[ASR P/PI]
P or PI control select in Vector_SPD control.
Disabled in Sensorless vector
I/O-15: Terminal Input Status
I/O-16: Terminal Output Status
This code displays Terminals P4, P5, P6 and Q1, Q2, Q3 are provided on
optional Sub[LCD Keypad Display]
| Input Terminals |
JOG | FX | RX | P6 | P5 | P4 | P3 | P2 | P1 |
| Bit 8 | Bit 7 | Bit 6 | Bit 5 | Bit 4 | Bit 3 | Bit 2 | Bit 1 | Bit 0 | |
| OFF status |
0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| ON status | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
[7-Segment Keypad Display]
The ‘JOGThis code displays the output status of control terminals.
Output AXA-AXC Q3 Q2 Q1
Terminals Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
OFF status 0 0 0 0
ON status 1 1 1 1
I/O? In status
15 000000000 Factory Default: 000000000
FX RX P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
I/O? Out status
16 0000 Factory Default: 0000
AXA-AXC Q3 Q2 Q1
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
127
| frequencies are applied when the multi-function input terminals (P1, P2, P3, RST, BX, JOG, FX and RX) select the step. See [Speed-L, Speed-M, Speed-H, Speed-X] in I/O-12 ~14, I/O-33. |
||||||
| Step Freq. |
Code | Spd-X | Spd-H (P3) |
Spd M(P2) |
Spd-L (P1) |
Jog Ter. |
| Step Freq-0 |
DRV-00 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| Jog | I/O-20 | X | X | X | X | 1 |
| Step Freq-1 |
DRV-05 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 |
| Step Freq-2 |
DRV-06 | 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 | 0 |
| Step Freq-3 |
DRV-07 | 0 | 0 | 1 | 1 | 0 |
| Step Freq-4 |
I/O-21 | 0 | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| Step Freq-5 |
I/O-22 | 0 | 1 | 0 | 1 | 0 |
| Step Freq-6 |
I/O-23 | 0 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 |
| Step Freq-7 |
I/O-24 | 0 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 0 |
| Step Freq-8 |
I/O-85 | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| Step Freq-9 |
I/O-86 | 1 | 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 |
| Step Freq-10 |
I/O-87 | 1 | 0 | 1 | 0 | 0 |
| Step Freq-11 |
I/O-88 | 1 | 0 | 1 | 1 | 0 |
| Step Freq-12 |
I/O-89 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| Step Freq-13 |
I/O-90 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 1 | 0 |
| Step Freq-14 |
I/O-91 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 |
| Step Freq-15 |
I/O-92 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 0 |
| 7- 0: OFF, 1: ON, X: Jog ** Speed-X: The highest speed input bit (used when one of RST, BX, JOG, FX, RX set to Speed-X) ☞ I/O-20 [Jog Frequency] can be used as one of the step frequencies. |
||||||
| Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency mode] DRV-05 ~ DRV-07 [Step Frequency 1 ~ 3] I/O-12 ~ 14, 93~97 [Multi-function inputs] I/O-17 [Filtering Time Constant] |
☞ If the ‘Jog’terminal is ON, inverter operates to Jog
frequency regardless of other terminal inputs.
[‘JOG’and ‘Multi-Step’Operation]
I/O-25 ~ I/O-38: 1st ~ 7th Accel/Decel Time
□□□
These codes are applied when themulti-function input
terminals (P1, P2, P3) select the Accel/Decel time. See
[XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H] in I/O-12 ~ I/O-14.
I/O? Acc time-1
25 20.0 sec 25 20.00
Factory Default: 20.0 sec 20.0
I/O? Dec time-7
38 20.0 sec 38 20
Factory Default: 20.0 sec 20.0
Related Functions: DRV-01 ~ DRV-02 [Accel/Decel Time]
FU2-70 [Reference Freq. for Accel/Decel]
FU2-71 [Accel/Decel Time Scale]
I/O-12 ~ I/O-14 [Multi-function inputs]
P1-CM
| ON | ON | |||
| O | N | O | N | |
| O | N | |||
| ON | ||||
| O | N | |||
| O | N | |||
| ON ON Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Jog |
Step 0 |
Step 1 |
Step 2 |
Step 3 |
Output Frequency
Time
Time
P2-CM Time
P3-CM Time
JOG-CM Time
FX-CM Time
RX-CM Time
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
128
| I/O-40: FM (Frequency Meter) Output I/O-41: FM Adjustment I/O? FM mode 40 Frequency 40 0 |
[FM Output (FM-CM terminal)] I/O-42: FDT (Frequency Detection) Level I/O-43: FDT Bandwidth I/O? FDT freq 42 30.00 Hz 42 30.00 FM Terminal Output Time 15Vpeak Avg. 0~10V 500Hz, 2msec (fixed) |
| Frequency meter displays the inverter output Frequency, Current, Voltage and DC link voltage with pulse signals on the FM terminal. The average ranges from 0V to 10V. I/O-41 is used to adjust the FM value. [Frequency] FM terminal outputs inverter output frequency. The output value is determined by, FM Output Voltage = (Output freq. / Max. freq.) × 10V × IO-41 / 100 [Current] FM terminal outputs inverter output current. T he output value is determined by, FM Output Voltage = (Output current / Rated current) × 10V × IO-41 / 150 [Voltage] FM terminal outputs inverter output voltage. The output value is determined by, FM Output Voltage = (Output voltage / Max. output voltage) × 10V × IO-41 / 100 [DC link vtg] FM terminal outputs the DC link voltage of inverter. The output value is determined by, FM Output Voltage = (DC link voltage / Max. DC link voltage) × 10V × IO-41 / 100 [Torque] FM terminal outputs the Torque of inverter. The output value is determined by, FM Output Voltage = (Torque current / Rated Torque current) × 10V × IO-41 / 150 |
|
| These functions are used in I/O-44 [Multi-function Auxiliary Contact Output]. See [FDT -#] in I/O-44. Use Sub-Boards if you need to use multi-function output terminal Q1, Q2, and Q3. |
|
| Factory Default: Frequency 0 | |
| I/O? FM Adjust 41 100 % 41 100 |
|
| Factory Default: 100 % 100 | |
| Factory Default: 30.00 Hz 30.00 | |
| I/O? FDT band 43 10.00 Hz |
|
| 43 10.00 | |
| Factory Default: 10.00 Hz 10.00 | |
| Related Functions: I/O-44 [Multi-function Auxiliary Output] |
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
129
| I/O-44: Multi-function Auxiliary Contact Output define (AXA-AXC) I/O? Aux mode 44 Run 44 12 FM-5G 10 V 0 % 100 I/O-41*10 V Output V I/O-40 |
| The auxiliary contact works (Close) when the defined condition has occurred. |
| Factory Default: Run 12 |
Setting Range
LCD 7-Seg
Description
FDT-1 0 Output frequency arrival detection
FDT-2 1 Specific frequency level detection
FDT-3 2 Frequency detection with pulse
FDT-4 3 Frequency detection with contact
closure
FDT-5 4 Frequency detection with contact
closure (inverted FDT-4)
OL 5 Overload detection
IOL 6 Inverter overload detection
Stall 7 Stall prevention mode detection
OV 8 Over voltage detection
LV 9 Low voltage detection
OH 10 Overheat detection
Lost Command 11 Lost command detection
Run 12 Inverter running detection
Stop 13 Inverter stop detection
Steady 14 Steady speed detection
INV line 15
COMM line 16 Exchange signal outputs
Ssearch 17 Speed search mode detection
Step pulse 18 Step detection in Auto mode
Seq pulse 19 Sequence detection in Auto mode
Ready 20 Inverter ready detection
Trv. ACC 21 Traverse acceleration frequency
Trv. DEC 22 Traverse deceleration frequency
MMC 23 Used for MMC operation
Zspd Dect 24 0 rpm Detection in Vector control
Torq Dect 25 Torque Detection
[FDT-1]
When the output frequency reaches the reference
frequency (target frequency), AXA-AXC terminal is
CLOSED.
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘FDT-1’]
[FDT-2]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the reference frequency is
in I/O-43 [FDT Bandwidth] centered on I/O-42 [FDT
Frequency], and the output frequency reaches I/O-43
centered on I/O-42.
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘FDT-2’]
[FDT-3]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the output frequency
reaches the bandcentered on the FDTfrequency. The
output is OPENED when the output frequency goes
outside the FDTbandwidth centered on the FDT
frequency.
AXA-AXC
| CLOSED |
| I/O- |
Output Frequency
Time
Time
43 / 2
I/O-42
Reference Frequency
AXA-AXC
| CLOSED |
| I/O- |
Output Frequency
Time
Time
43 / 2
Reference Frequency
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
130
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘FDT-3’]
[FDT-4]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the output frequency
reaches the FDTfrequency. The output is OPENED
when the output frequency goes below the FDT
bandwidth centered on the FDT frequency.
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘FDT-4’]
[FDT-5]
This is the inverted output of [FDT-4].
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘FDT-5’]
[OL]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the output current has
reached the FU1-54 [Overload Warning Level] for the
FU1-55 [Overload Warning Time].
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘OL’]
[IOL]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the output current is above
the 150% of rated inverter current for 36 seconds. If this
situation is continued for one minute, the inverter will cut
off its output and displays ‘IOL’(Inverter overload) Trip.
See the nameplate for the rated inverter current.
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘IOL’]
AXA-AXC
| ON | ON |
| I/O- |
Output Frequency
Time
Time
43 / 2
I/O-42
AXA-AXC
Output Frequency
Time
Time
| I/O- |
| CLOSED |
43 / 2
I/O-42
AXA-AXC
Output Frequency
Time
Time
| I/O- | |
| ON | ON |
43 / 2
I/O-42
Related Functions: FU1-54 [Overload Warning Level]
FU1-55 [Overload Warning Time]
t1: FU1-55 [Overload Warning Time]
Output Current
Time
Time
FU1-54
[OL level]
FU1-54
[OL level]
AXA-AXC
| ON |
t1 t1
Output Current
Time
Time
150% of Rated
Inverter Current
AXA-AXC
| ON |
36sec
150% of Rated
Inverter Current
24sec
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
131
[Stall]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the inverter is on the stall
prevention mode.
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘Stall’]
[OV]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the DC link voltage is above
the Over-voltage level.
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘OV’]
[LV]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the DC link voltage is below
the Low-voltage level.
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘LV’]
[OH]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the heat sink of the inverter
is above the reference level.
[Lost Command]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when frequency reference is lost.
[Run]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the inverter is running.
[Stop]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the inverter is stopped.
[INV line, COMM line]
This function is used in conjunction with ‘Exchange’
function of multi-function input for commercial line
exchange. To use both signal of ‘INV line’and ‘COMM
line’, the optional Sub-A or Sub-C board must be
installed.
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘COMM line’and ‘Q1’as INV line’]
Output Current
Time
Output Frequency
Time
FU1-60
[Stall Level]
FU1-60
[Stall Level]
Time
AXA-AXC
| CLOSED |
Related Functions: FU1-59 [Stall Prevention Mode]
FU1-60 [Stall Prevention Level]
AXA-AXC
| ON |
DC Link Voltage
Time
Time
LV Level (200V DC or 400V DC)
AXA-AXC
| ON |
DC Link Voltage
Time
Time
OV Level (380V DC or 760V DC)
Related Functions: I/O-11 [Criteria for Analog Signal Loss]
I/O-48 [Operating Method at Signal Loss]
I/O-49 [Waiting Time for Time Out]
‘Exchange’-CM
FX-CM
| ON | |
| ON | |
| ON | |
| ON | ON |
| t1 | t2 Inverter |
| Inverter | Commercial |
Output Frequency
Time
Time
Time
AXA-AXC
‘COMM line’ Time
Time
Drive
Drive
Line Drive
t1, t2: 50msec (interlock time)
Speed Search
Q1-EXTG
‘INV line’
Related Functions: I/O-12 ~ I/O-14 [Multi-function input]
- [Exchange]
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
132
| [Ssearch] AXA-AXC is CLOSED during the inverter is speed searching. [Step pulse] When Auto (Sequence) operation is selected in I/O-50, AXA-AXC outputs pulse signals on every step. |
| [AXA-AXC configured as ‘Step pulse’] AXA-AXC ‘Step pulse’ P1-CM ‘SEQ-L’ Output Frequency Time Time Time P2-CM ‘SEQ-M’ P3-CM ‘Go step’ SEQ1 / 2F SEQ2 / 2F SEQ1 / 1F SEQ3 / 2F SEQ3 / 1F Time Minimum 100msec Time |
| Related Functions: I/O-50 ~ I/O-84 [Auto Operation] |
[Seq pulse]
When Auto (Sequence) operation is selected in I/O-50,
AXA-AXC outputs pulse signals on the last step.
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘Step pulse’]
[Ready]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the inverter is ready to run.
[Trv. ACC]
CLOSED when output frequency reaches Accel
frequency.
[Trv. DEC]
CLOSED when output frequency reaches Decel
frequency.
[MMC]
Automatically set to ‘MMC’when ‘MMC’is selected in
APP-01.
[Zspd Dect]
0 rpm detection signal in Vector Control
[Torq Dect]
Torque detection signal in Vector and Sensorless Vector
Control.
Output Frequency
Time
Seq# / 2F
Seq# / 1F
Seq# / 3F
1T 1S 2T 2S 3T 3S
| 1D (Forward) (Forward) |
| 3D (Reverse) |
2D
DRV-02
AXA-AXC
‘Step pulse
| ’ | ON |
Time
Minimum 100msec
ON
ON
ON
ON ON ON ON
Sequence 1 Sequence 3 Sequence 2
ON
ON ON ON ON
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
133
I/O-45: Fault Output Relay (30A, 30B, 30C)
This function is used to allow the fault output relay to
operate when a fault occurs. The output relay terminal is
30A, 30B, 30C where 30A-30C is a norm ally open
contact and 30B-30C is a normally closed contact.
| Bit | Settin g |
Display | Description |
| 0 | 000 | Fault output relay does not operate at ‘Low voltage’trip. |
Bit 0 (LV) |
| 1 | 001 | Fault output relay operates at ‘Low voltage’trip. |
|
| 0 | 000 | Fault output relay does not operate at any fault. |
Bit 1 (Trip) |
| 1 | 010 | Fault output relay operates at any fault except ‘Low voltage’ and ‘BX’(inverter disable) fault. |
|
| 0 | 000 | Fault output relay does not operate regardless of the retry number. |
Bit 2 (Retry) |
| 1 | 100 | Fault output relay operates when the retry number set in FU2-26 decreases to 0 by faults. |
☞ When several faults occurred at the same time, Bit 0 has
the first priority.
I/O-46: Inverter Number
I/O-47: Baud Rate
This code sets the inverter number. This number is used
in communication between inverter and communication
board.
| This code sets the communication speed. This is used in communication between inverter and communication board. |
| I/O-48: Operating at Loss of Freq. Reference I/O-49: Waiting Time after Loss of Freq. Reference |
| There are two kinds of loss of frequency reference. One is the loss of digital frequency reference and the other is of analog frequencyreference. Loss of digital frequency reference is applied when DRV- 04 [Frequency Mode] is set to ‘Keypad-1’or ‘Kepad-2’. At this time, the ‘Loss’means the communication error between inverter and keypad or communication board during the time set in I/O-49. Loss of analog frequency reference is applied when DRV-04 [Frequency Mode] is set to other than ‘Keypad- 1’or ‘Kepad-2’. At this time, the ‘Loss’is determined by the criteria set in I/O-11 [Criteria for Analog Input Signal Loss]. I/O? Time out 49 1.0 sec 49 1.0 |
| This is the time inverter determines whether there is a frequency reference or not. If there is no frequency reference satisfying I/O-11 during this time, inverter determines that it has lost of frequency reference. |
| I/O?Lost command 48 None |
| 48 0 |
| Factory Default: None 0 |
| Factory Default: 1.0 sec 1.0 |
| Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode] I/O-11 [Criteria for Analog Signal Loss] |
Setting Range
LCD 7-Seg
Description
None 0 Inverter keeps on operating at the
previous frequency.
FreeRun
(Coast to stop)
1 Inverter cuts off its output.
Stop 2 Inverter stops with Decel time (DRV-
02) and Decel pattern (FU1-26).
I/O? Relay mode
45 010 45 010
Factory Default: 010 010
I/O? Inv No.
46 1 46 1
Factory Default: 1 1
I/O? Baud rate
47 9600 bps 47 9600
Factory Default: 9600 9600
Related Functions: DRV-12 [Fault Display]
FU2-26 [Retry number]
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
134
| I/O-50: Auto (Sequence) Operation I/O-51: Sequence Number Selection (Seq #) I/O-52: The Number of Steps of Sequence # I/O? Auto mode 50 None 50 0 |
| There are two modes of ‘Auto-A’and ‘Auto-B’in Auto mode. Auto operation is activated by the multi-function input terminals set to [SEQ-L], [SEQ-M], [SEQ-H] and [Go step] in I/O-12 ~ I/O-14. I/O? Seq select 51 3 51 1 |
| This code selects the sequence to set frequency, transient time, steady speed time and motor direction the steps. I/O? Step number 52 2 52 2 |
| This code sets the number of steps to use for the sequence number selected in I/O-51. [Auto-A] This mode will allow the inverter to operate automatically followed by its pre-programmed sequence. According to this sequence, eight different steps of Frequency, Transient Time, Steady Speed time and Motor Direction can be initiated with only a single multi-function input contact closure (I/O-12 ~ I/O-14). The sequence and steps are set in I/O-51 ~ I/O-84. |
| Factory Default: None 0 |
| Factory Default: 1 1 |
| Factory Default: 2 2 |
| Step Frequency |
Parameter Code |
Speed-H (P3) |
Speed-M (P2) |
Speed-L (P1) |
| Sequence 1 | 0 | 0 | 1 | I/O-50 ~ I/O-84 |
| Sequence 2 | 0 | 1 | 0 | |
| Sequence 3 | 1 | 0 | 0 | |
| Sequence 4 | 0 | 1 | 1 | |
| Sequence 5 | 1 | 0 | 1 |
0: OFF, 1: ON
[Example 1 of ‘Auto-A’operation]
[Example 2 of ‘Auto-A’operation]
Output Frequency
Time
Seq1 / 2F
Seq1 / 1F
Seq1 / 3F
| 1T 1S | 2T |
| 2S 3T 3S | |
| 1D (Forward) (Forward) |
|
| 3D (Reverse) |
|
| ON |
2D
P1-CM
‘SEQ-L’ Time
P1-CM
‘SEQ-L’
| ON | ||
| ON | ||
| Sequence 1 | Sequence 3 | Sequence 2 |
Output Frequency
Time
Time
P2-CM
‘SEQ-M’
SEQ1 / 2F
SEQ2 / 2F
SEQ1 / 1F
SEQ3 / 2F
SEQ3 / 1F
Time
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
135
[AUTO B]
This mode can be also used to program up to 8 different
steps as Auto A. However, to switch from one step to
another, an external contact closure set to ‘Go step’is
required.
[Example of ‘Auto-B’operation]
☞ Note: When a new sequence is selected during a
sequence operating, the new sequence starts after the
current sequence is finished.
I/O-53 ~ I/O-84: Frequency, Transient Time,
Steady Speed Time, Motor Direction setting of
each Step and Sequence
These parameter codes set the frequency, transient time,
steady speed time, and motor direction. These codes
are displayed according to the sequence number and
steps.
I/O-85~ I/O 97: Step frequecy 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15, Multi-function input terminal RST, BX,
JOG. FX, RX Define
See the description pages of I/O 21~39 for more details.
P1-CM
‘SEQ-L’
| ON | |||
| ON | |||
| ON | ON | ON | ON |
| ON | |||
| Sequence 1 | Sequence 3 | Sequence 2 |
Output Frequency
Time
Time
Time
P2-CM
‘SEQ-M’
P3-CM
‘Go step’ Minimum 100msec
SEQ1 / 2F
SEQ2 / 2F
SEQ1 / 1F
SEQ3 / 2F
SEQ3 / 1F
Time
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
136
6.5 External Group [EXT]
EXT group appears only when an optional Sub-Board is
installed.
EXT-00: Jump to Desired Code #
Jumping directly to any parameter code can be
accomplished by entering the desired code number. This
code is available only with LCD keypad.
EXT-01: Sub-Board Display
This code automatically displays the kind of Sub-Board
installed.
| Setting Range | Description | |
| LCD | 7-Seg | |
| Sub-A | 1 | This board provides three multi-function input terminals (P4, P5, P6), three multi function output terminals (Q1, Q2, Q3), Load meter output (LM) and second input frequency reference (V2). |
| Sub-B | 2 | This board provides encoder input terminals (AOC, BOC / A+, A-, B+, B-), encoder output terminals (FBA, FBB) and power terminals (+5V input, Vcc output). |
| Sub-C | 3 | This board provides three multi-function input terminals (P4, P5, P6), one multi function output terminal (Q1), isolated second input frequency reference (V2) and two analog meters (AM1, AM2). |
See ‘Chapter 7 - Options’for more detail descriptions.
| EXT-02 ~ EXT-04: Multi-Function Input Terminal Define (P4, P5, P6) – Sub-A, Sub-C |
| An optional Sub-Board is needed if an application requires more than three multi-function input terminals. ‘Sub-A’and ‘Sub-C’boards provide additional three multi-function terminals. These terminals are used in conjunction with P1, P2 and P3 terminals. Refer to I/O- 12 ~ I/O-14 for use. The following table shows the terminal definitions. |
| EXT? P4 define 02 XCEL-L |
| 02 3 |
| Factory Default: XCEL-L 3 |
Setting Range
LCD 7-Seg
Description
Speed-L 0 Multi-Step Speed - Low
Speed-M 1 Multi-Step Speed - Mid
Speed-H 2 Multi-Step Speed - High
XCEL-L 3 Multi-Accel/Decel - Low
XCEL-M 4 Multi-Accel/Decel - Mid
XCEL-H 5 Multi-Accel/Decel - High
Dc-brake 6 DC injection braking during stop
2nd Func 7 Exchange to 2nd functions
Exchange 8 Exchange to commercial power line
-Reserved- 9 Reserved for future use
Up 10 Up drive
Down 11 Down drive
3-Wire 12 3 wire operation
Ext Trip-A 13 External trip A
Ext Trip-B 14 External trip B
iTerm Clear 15 Used for PID control
Open-loop 16 Exchange between PID mode and
V/F mode
Main-drive 17 Exchange between Option and
Inverter
Analog hold 18 Hold the analog input signal
XCEL stop 19 Disable accel and decel
P Gain2 20 Used for PID control
SEQ-L 21 Sequence operation - Low
SEQ-M 22 Sequence operation - Mid
SEQ-H 23 Sequence operation - High
Manual 24 Exchange between Sequence
operation and Manual operation
Go step 25 Triggering Sequence operation
(Auto-B)
Hold step 26 Hold last step (Auto-A)
Trv Off.Lo 27
Trv Off.Hi 28 Used for Traverse Operation
Interlock1 29
Interlock2 30
Interlock3 31
Interlock4 32
Used for MMC operation
Speed-X 33 Additional Step frequency selection
Reset 34 Reset
EXT? Jump code
00 1
Factory Default: 1
| EXT? Sub B/D 01 None |
01 0 |
Factory Default: None 0
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
137
| Setting Range | Description | |
| LCD | 7-Seg | |
| BX | 35 | Emergency Stop |
| JOG | 36 | Jog |
| FX | 37 | Forward Run/Stop |
| RX | 38 | Reverse Run/Stop |
| Ana Change | 39 | Analog input Switch-over |
| Pre excite | 40 | Pre excitation. |
| Spd/Torque | 41 | Speed/Torque Switch-over |
| ASR P/PI | 42 | ASR P/PI control select |
EXT-05: V2 Mode Selection – Sub-A, Sub-C
‘V2’signal can be used as the frequencyreference and
override function.
[None]
V2 signal is not used.
[Override]
‘V2’signal override the frequency reference signal (V1, I,
V1+I) selected in DRV-04.
[Reference]
‘V2’signal is used as the frequency reference. At this
time, the frequency reference selected in DRV-04 is
ignored.
EXT-06 ~ EXT-10: Analog Voltage Input (V2)
Signal Adjustment – Sub-A, Sub-C
This is used to adjust the analog voltage input signal
when the frequency is referenced or overridden by the
‘V2’control terminal. This function is applied when EXT -
05 is set to ‘Override’or ‘Reference’. Reference
Frequency versus Analog Voltage Input Curve can be
made by four parameters of EXT -07 ~ EXT -10.
| This is the filtering time constant for ‘V2’signal input. If the ‘V2’signal is affected by noise causing unstable operation of the inverter, increase this value. Increasing this value may make response time slower. |
|
| This is the minimum voltage of the ‘V2’input at which the inverter outputs minimum frequency. EXT? V2 volt y1 08 0.00 Hz 08 0.00 |
|
| This is the minimum frequency the inverter outputs when there is the minimum voltage (EXT -07) on the ‘V2’ terminal. |
|
| This is the maximum voltage of the ‘V2’input at which the inverter outputs maximum frequency. |
|
| This is the maximum frequency the inverter outputs when there is the maximum voltage (EXT -09) on the ‘V2’ terminal. |
|
| EXT? V2 filter 06 10 ms |
06 10 |
| Factory Default: 10 ms 10 | |
| EXT? V2 volt x1 07 0.00 V |
07 0.00 |
| Factory Default: 0.00 V 0.00 | |
| Factory Default: 0.00 Hz 0.00 | |
| EXT? V2 volt x2 09 0.00 V |
09 10.00 |
| Factory Default: 10.00 V 10.00 | |
| EXT? V2 volt y2 10 60.00 Hz |
10 60.00 |
| Factory Default: 60.00 Hz 60.00 |
EXT? V2 mode
05 None 05 0
Factory Default: None 0
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
138
| [Reference Frequency vs. Analog Voltage Input, V2 (0 to 10V)] EXT-12: Usage of Pulse Input Signal – Sub-B Reference Frequency EXT-10 Analog Voltage Input (V2) EXT-08 EXT-07 EXT-09 Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode] I/O-01 ~ I/O-05 [V1 Adjustment] EXT? F mode 12 None 12 0 |
| This function is to select the usage of encoder pulse signal of ‘Sub-B’board. The pulse signal from encoder can be used as the motor speed feedback or frequency reference. [None] The encoder pulse signal is not used. [Feed-back] The encoder pulse signal is used as the motor speed feedback. The inverter can maintain the motor speed constantly, regardless of the load fluctuation, by using the encoder feedback. Set the encoder pulse method and the number of pulse in EXT -15 and 16. Main speed is set in DRV-04 [Frequency mode]. The encoder pulse related functions must be set correctly for better performance in EXT -15 ~ EXT-24. |
| Factory Default: None 0 |
| Code | LCD Display | Setting in Feed back |
| EXT-12 | F mode | Feed-back |
| EXT-15 | F pulse set | A+B |
| EXT-16 | F pulse num | 360 ~ 4096 |
| EXT-22 | PG P-gain | 0 ~ 30000 |
| EXT-23 | PG I-gain | 0 ~ 30000 |
| EXT-24 | PG Slip Freq | 0 ~ 200[%] |
| EXT-25 | ASR P-Gain | 10 ~ 500[%] |
| EXT-26 | ASR I-Gain | 10 ~ 9999[mSec] |
| EXT-27 | Trq + Limit | 0 ~ 200[%] |
| EXT-28 | Trq – Limit | 0 ~ 200[%] |
[Reference]
The encoder pulse signal is used as the frequency
reference. When this function is selected, the frequency
reference selected in DRV-04 is ignored. Reference
Frequency versus Pulse Input Curve can be made by
four parameters of EXT -18 ~ EXT-21.
| Code | LCD Display | Setting in Reference |
| EXT-12 | F mode | Reference |
| EXT-15 | F pulse set | A |
| EXT-17 | F filter | 0 ~ 10000[msec] |
| EXT-18 | F pulse x1 | 0 ~ 10 [kHz] |
| EXT-19 | F freq y1 | 0 ~ Max Freq [Hz] |
| EXT-20 | F pulse x2 | 0 ~ 10 [kHz ] |
| EXT-21 | F freq y2 | 0 ~ Max Freq [Hz] |
[Reference Frequency vs. Pulse Input]
Reference Frequency
EXT-21
Pulse Input
(0 to 10 kHz)
EXT-19
EXT-18 EXT-20
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
139
EXT-13: Real Speed Direction - Sub-B
It displays actual motor rotation direction regardless of
control mode selected, when Sub-B board is installed
and EXT-12 is set to Feed-back.
EXT-14: Encoder Feedback Frequency - Sub-B
It displays frequency regardless of control mode
selected, when Sub-B board is installed and EXT -12 is
set to Feed-back.
EXT-15: Pulse Input Signal Selection – Sub-B
This code sets the encoder pulse to use. [A+B] uses two
encoder signal lines of A and B, and [A] uses one
encoder signal line of A or B.
EXT-16: Encoder Pulse Number – Sub-B
This code sets the encoder pulse per rotation of encoder.
EXT-17: Filtering Time Constant for Pulse Input
Signal – Sub-B
| This is the filtering time constant of pulse input signal. This is used to make the inverter respond slowly to the pulse input signal when the EXT -14 is set to ‘Reference’. EXT-18 ~ EXT-21: Pulse Input Signal Adjustment – Sub-B This is used to adjust the pulse input signal when the pulse input through Sub-B board references the frequency. This function is applied when EXT -14 is set to ‘Reference’. Reference Frequency versus Analog Voltage Input Curve can be made by four parameters of EXT -18 ~ EXT -21. EXT? F pulse x1 18 0.0 kHz 18 0.0 |
| This is the minimum pulse frequency at which the inverter outputs minimum frequency. EXT? F freq y1 19 0.00 Hz 19 0.00 |
| This is the minimum frequency the inverter outputs when there is the minimum pulse frequency (EXT -18). EXT? F pulse x2 20 10.0 kHz 20 10.0 |
| This is the maximum pulse frequency at which the inverter outputs maximum frequency. EXT? F freq y2 21 60.00 Hz 21 60.00 |
| This is the maximum frequency the inverter outputs when there is the maximum pulse frequency (EXT -20). |
| Factory Default: 0.0 kHz 0.0 |
| Factory Default: 0.00 Hz 0.00 |
| Factory Default: 10.0 kHz 10.0 |
| Factory Default: 60.00 Hz 60.00 |
EXT? F pulse set
15 A + B 15 0
Factory Default: A + B 0
EXT? F pulse num
16 1024 16 1024
Factory Default: 1024 1024
EXT? F filter
17 10 ms 17 10
Factory Default: 10 ms 10
EXT? RealSpdDir
13 RX 13 0
Factory Default: Reverse 0
EXT? ENC FeedBac
14 0.00 Hz 14 0.00
Factory Default: N/A
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
140
EXT-22 ~ EXT-23: Gains for ‘Sub-B’Board
This is the proportional gain when the EXT -14 is set to
‘Feed-back’.
This is the integral gain when the EXT -14 is set to ‘Feedback’.
EXT-24: Slip Frequency for ‘Sub-B’Board
This is the limit frequency the inverter uses to
compensate the motor speed drop due to load
fluctuation. The set point value is the percentage of
FUN-32 [Rated Motor Slip].
EXT-30 ~ EXT-32: Multi-Function Output
Terminal (Q1, Q2, Q3) Define – Sub-A, Sub-C
Q1, Q2, Q3 terminals are provided on Sub-A and Sub-C
board as an open collector output. The functions of
these terminals can be selected the same as I/O-44
[Multi-function Auxiliary Contact Output Define].
| EXT-34: LM (Load Meter) Output – Sub-A EXT-35: LM Adjustment |
| Load meter displays the inverter output Frequency, Current, Voltage and DC link voltage with pulse signals on the LM terminal of Sub-A board. The average ranges from 0V to 10V. EXT -35 is used to adjust the LM value. [Frequency] LM terminal outputs inverter output frequency. The output value is determined by, LM Output Voltage = (Output freq. / Max. freq.) × 10V × FM output gain (I/O-41) / 100 [Current] LM terminal outputs inverter output current. The output value is determined by, LM Output Voltage = (Output current / Rated current) × 10V × X FM output gain (I/O-41) / 150 [Voltage] LM terminal output inverter output voltage. The output value is determined by, LM Output Voltage = (Output voltage / Max. output voltage) × 10V × FM output gain (I/O-41) / 100 |
| EXT? Q3 define 32 FDT-3 |
| 32 2 |
| Factory Default: FDT-3 2 |
| EXT? LM mode 34 Current |
| 34 1 |
| Factory Default: Current 1 |
| EXT? LM Adjust 35 100 % |
| 35 100 |
| Factory Default: 100 % 100 |
| Related Functions: FU1-54 [Overload Warning Level] FU1-55 [Overload Warning Time] FU1-59 [Stall Prevention Mode] FU1-60 [Stall Prevention Level] I/O-12 ~ I/O-14 [Multi-function Input Terminal define] I/O-42 ~ I/O-43 [Frequency Detection] I/O-44 [Multi-function Auxiliary Contact Output define] I/O-50 ~ I/O-56 [Auto Operation] |
EXT? PG P-gain
22 3000 22 3000
Factory Default: 3000 3000
EXT? PG I-gain
23 50 23 50
Factory Default: 50 50
EXT?PG Slip Freq
24 100 % 24 100
Factory Default: 100 % 100
EXT? Q1 define
30 FDT-1 30 0
Factory Default: FDT-1 0
EXT? Q2 define
31 FDT-2 31 1
Factory Default: FDT-2 1
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
141
| [DC link vtg] LM terminal outputs the DC link voltage of inverter. The output value is determined by, LM Output Voltage = (DC link voltage / Max. DC link voltage) × 10V × FM output gain (I/O-41) / 100 [Torque] FM terminal outputs the motor torque. The output value is determined by, FM terminal output voltage= (Torque current/Rated torque current) X10V X FM output gain (I/O-41) / 150 [LM Output (LM-CM terminal)] LM Terminal Output Time 15Vpeak Avg. 0~10V 500Hz, 2msec (fixed) |
| Related Functions: I/O-40 ~ I/O-41 [FM Output] |
EXT-40: AM1 (Analog Meter 1) Output – Sub-C
EXT-41: AM1 Adjustment
EXT-42: AM2 (Analog Meter 2) Output – Sub-C
EXT-43: AM2 Adjustment
These terminals are provided on Sub-C board.
Analog meter displays the inverter output Frequency,
Current, Voltage, DC link voltage and T orque with
analog voltage on the AM1 and AM2 terminals of Sub-C
board. The output voltage ranges from 0V to 10V. EXT -
41 and EXT -43 are used to adjust the AM output value.
[Frequency]
The AM terminal outputs inverter output frequency. The
output value is determined by,
AM Output Voltage = (Output freq. / Max. freq.) × 10V X
AM Output Gain (EXT41~42)/ 100
[Current]
The AM terminal outputs inverter output current. The
output value is determined by,
AM Output Voltage = (Output current / Rated current) ×
10V X AM Output Gain (EXT41~42)/ 150
EXT? AM1 mode
40 Frequency 40 0
Factory Default: Frequency 0
EXT? AM1 Adjust
41 100 % 41 100
Factory Default: 100 % 100
EXT? AM2 mode
42 DC link Vtg 42 3
Factory Default: DC link Vtg 3
EXT? AM2 Adjust
43 100 % 43 100
Factory Default: 100 % 100
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
142
| [Voltage] The AM terminal outputs inverter output voltage. The output value is determined by, AM Output Voltage = (Output voltage / Max. output voltage) × 10V X AM Output Gain (EXT41~42)/ 100 [DC link vtg] The AM terminal outputs the DC link voltage of inverter. The output value is determined by, AM Output Voltage = (DC link voltage / Max. DC link voltage) × 10V X AM Output Gain (EXT41~42)/ 100 [Torque] The AM terminal outputs inverter output torque. The output value is determined by, AM Output Voltage = (Output Torque / Rated Torque current) × 10V X AM Output Gain (EXT41~42)/ 150 EXT-50~53 [Speed limit for Torque mode operation] |
||||
| Code | LCD display |
Description | Factory setting | Setting range |
| EXT- 50 |
Speed Limit |
Speed Limit Level |
100[%] | 100[%] 0 – |
| EXT- 51 |
Speed Bias |
Speed Limit Bias |
100[%] | 200[%] 0 – |
| EXT- 52 |
Speed Gain |
Speed Limit Gain |
1 | 1 – 10 |
| EXT- 53 |
Speed Dir | Speed Limit Direction | (Forward) 1 | 0 (Reverse) 1 (Forward) |
| By setting speed limit, this parameter prevents the motor from rotating excessively high speed due to no-load or light load connection during Vector_TRQ in FU2-39 [Control mode]. Set as the percent of EXT -50 [Speed limit level] and EXT -51 [Speed Limit Bias] to FU1-20 [Max Freq]. If EXT-53 [Speed Limit Direction]= FWD, EXT -51 [Speed Limit Bias] FWD Torque control is set, the FWD Torque control is shown as below. In other words, when the motor rotates in Forward direction, FWD torque is kept controlled in |
the range of EXT -50 [Speed Limit Level] + EXT-51
[Speed bias]. When the motor rotates in Reverse
direction, REV torque is controlled in EXT -51[Speed
Limit Bias] and torque is controlled constant in the above
speed range. EXT -52 [Speed limit gain] is the curve
value to reduce the FWD torque or to increase to the
constant torque in Reverse direction.
Speed
Output torque
| EXT_51 Speed Bias EXT_50 Speed Limit |
EXT_51 Speed Bias |
DRV_00
Torque
Command
Related parameters : FU2-39 [Control mode selection]
FU1-20 [max Freq]
EXT-27[Trq + Limit] EXT-28[Trq - Limit]
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
143
The following illustrations show the relationship between torque, motor speed and speed limit direction.
| Torque Dir. | FWD | REV |
| Speed limit direction |
FWD | REV |
| Torque change | SPD Output TRQ EXT_51 Speed Bias EXT_51 Speed Bias EXT-28 Trq - Limit EXT-27 EXT-50 Speed Limit |
SPD Output TRQ Speed Bias Speed Bias EXT-28 Trq - Limit EXT-27 Trq + Limit |
| Torque change | Output TRQ Speed Bias Speed Bias EXT-28 EXT-50 |
Output TRQ Speed Bias Speed Bias EXT-28 E |
Trq +
Limit
EXT-51
EXT-51
EXT-50
Speed
Limit
SPD
EXT-51
EXT-51
Trq -
Limit
EXT-27
Trq +
Limit
Speed
Limit
SPD
EXT_51
EXT_51
Trq -
Limit
XT-27
Trq +
Limit EXT-50
Speed
Limit
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
144
| EXT-54: Zero Speed Detection Level EXT-55: Zero Speed Detection Bandwidth Used to set the zero speed detection (SUB-B) l Only valid when FU2-39 [Control mode selection] is set to Vector_SPD, Vector_TRQ. l Detect the zero speed using I/O-44 [Multi-function auxiliary contact output selection]. Set Zspd Dect in I/O-44 [Multi-function auxiliary contact output] to activate this function. ☞ Note: Sub-board is needed to use multi-function output terminal Q1, Q2, Q3. Auxiliary contact relay activates as shown below if the following settings are applied to EXT -54 [Zero Speed Detection Level] and EXT -55 [Zero Speed Detection Bandwidth]. SPEED AXA AXC EXT-54 ZSD Level EXT-55 EXT-54 ZSD Level |
| Related Functions: FU2-39 [Control mode selection] I/O-44 [Multi-function auxiliary contact output] |
Code Keypad
Display
Parameter
Name
Factory
setting
Setting
range
EXT-
54
ZSD
Level
Zero Speed
Detection
Level
2 [Hz] 0 – 120
[Hz]
EXT-
55
ZSD
Band
Zero Speed
Detection
Bandwidth
1 [Hz] 0 – 5 [Hz]
Close
ZSD
Band
Close
EXT-56: Torque Detection Level
EXT-57: Torque Detection Bandwidth
Use to set output torque detection (SUB-B)
l Only valid when FU2-39 [Control mode selection] is
set to Vector_SPD, Vector_TRQ.
l Detect Torque using I/O-44 [Multi-function auxiliary
contact output selection].
☞ Note: Sub-board should be mounted to use multifunction output terminal Q1, Q2, Q3.
EXT-56 [Torque Detection Level] and EXT -57 [Torque
Detection Bandwidth] are activated in the following
conditions as shown below.
TORQUE
AXAAXC
EXT-56
TD Level
| EXT-57 TD Band/ 2 |
| Close |
EXT-56
TD Level
| Code | Keypad Display |
Description | Factory setting | Setting range |
| EXT-56 | TD Level | Torque Detection Level |
100[%] | 0 – 150 [%] |
| EXT-57 | TD Band | Torque Detection Bandwidth |
5[%] | 0 – 10 [%] |
Related Functions: FU2-39 [Control mode select]
I/O-44 [Multi-function auxiliary
contact output selection]
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
145
| 6.6 Application Group [APP] APP-00: Jump to desired code # APP? Jump code 00 1 |
||
| Jumping directly to any parameter code can be accomplished by entering the desired code number. This code is available only with LCD keypad. APP-01: Application Mode Selection APP? App. mode 01 None 01 0 |
||
| This code sets the application mode. | ||
| Setting Range | Description | |
| LCD | 7-Seg | |
| None | 0 | Application mode is not selected. |
| Traverse | 1 | Traverse mode is selected in application group. Related functions (APP-02~07) are displayed. |
| MMC | 2 | MMC (Multi-Motor Control) mode is selected in application group. Related functions (APP-08~31) are displayed. |
| DRAW | 3 | DRAW mode is selected in application group. Related functions (APP-32~33) are displayed. |
| [Traverse]: This is a mechanism to wind thread to an intended shape on a reel with a rotary motion and reciprocation. Adjusting the speed of mechanical reciprocation can makedifferent shapes of thread reel. The following figure shows an example. The guide should move with low speed at the center of the reel and fast at the edge of the reel. |
||
| Factory Default: 1 | ||
| Factory Default: None 0 | ||
| Related Functions: APP-02 to APP-07 [Traverse Parameters] I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Multi-Function Input] EXT-30 to EXT-32 [Multi-Function Output] |
[An example of Traverse Operation]
[Traverse Operation Pattern]
[MMC]: The ‘PID’control should be selected in FU2-47
to use this function.
¨ One inverter can control multiple motors. This function
is often used when controlling the amount and pressure
of flow in fans or pumps. Built-in PI controller controls a
main motor after receiving process control value and
keeps the control value constant by connecting auxiliary
motors to commercial line when needed.
¨ In case that flow amount or flow pressure is beyond or
below the reference so the main drive cannot control by
itself, auxiliary motors are automatically turned on/off.
Maximum four (Q1~3 and Aux. output) auxiliary motors
can be run. Each Starting and Stop Frequency should
be set to four auxiliary motors.
¨ Auto Change can be selected to automatically switch
the order of the running motors for keeping motor runtime constant. Set mode ‘1’for automatic changing of
auxiliary motors only and set mode ‘2’for automatic
changing of all motors including main motor. For m ode
‘2’, external sequence (Refer to APP-26) should be
configured.
Traverse
Rotary
Motion
Thread
Traverse
Reciprocation
(Mechanical)
Thread
(Constant
Speed)
APP-05
Traverse Dec
APP-03
| Trv. Scr APP-06 Offset-H |
02 |
| APP-07 Offset-L |
APP-04
Traverse Acc
igh
ow
Reference
Speed
APP-Trv. Amp
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
146
¨ Abnormal motor can be skipped from running by
using the multi-function input terminals (P1, P2, P3, and
P4). If a multi-function terminal is opened, the inverter
stops all running motors and restarts operation with only
normal motors except the abnormal motor. (Refer to
APP-29)
¨ Sleep function is initiated when flow demand is low.
Inverter stops motor when the motor runs below Sleep
Frequency (APP-24) during Sleep Delay Time (APP-23).
While in the sleep state, inverter keeps monitoring and
initiates Wake-Up function when the real value of the
controlling amount has decreased below the Wake-Up
level (APP-25).
☞ Note: Only one auxiliary motor can be connected with
AUX terminal on control terminal strip without using MMC
Option Board.
[MMC Diagram]
| [Draw]: This is a kind of Open-Loop Tension Control. This is used to maintain constant tension of material with the speed difference between main motor and subordinate motor. |
| APP-02: Traverse Amplitude |
| This code sets the frequency amplitude of traverse operation. The value is the percentage of reference frequency. The output value is determined by, Trv. Amp Frequency = (Reference Freq. * Trv. Amp)/100 |
| APP-03: Traverse Scramble Amplitude |
| This code sets the frequency amplitude of scramble operation. The output value is determined by, Trv. Scr Frequency = (Trv. Amp Frequency * (100 - Trv. Scr))/100 |
| APP-04: Traverse Accel Time APP-05: Traverse Decel Time |
| Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for traverse operation. |
| APP?Trv. Amp[%] 02 0.0% |
| 02 0.0 |
| Factory Default: 0.0% 0.0 |
| APP?Trv. Scr[%] 03 0.0% |
| 03 0.0 |
| Factory Default: 0.0% 0.0 |
| APP?Trv Acc Time 04 2.0 sec |
| 04 2.0 |
| Factory Default: 2.0 sec 2.0 |
| APP?Trv Dec Time 05 3.0 sec |
| 05 3.0 |
| Factory Default: 3.0 sec 3.0 |
| Related Functions: APP-32 to APP-33 [Draw Parameters] DRV-04 [Frequency Mode] I/O-01 to I/O-10 [Analog Signal Input] EXT 06 to EXT-10 [Analog Input Setting] I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Multi-Function Input] EXT-02 to EXT-04 [Multi-Function Input] |
Related Functions: APP-08 to APP-31 [MMC Parameters]
DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
FU2-47 [PID Operation Selection]
I/O-01 to I/O-10 [Analog Signal Input]
EXT 15 to EXT21 [Pulse Input Signal]
I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Multi-Function Input]
EXT-30 to EXT-32 [Multi-Function Output]
| V1 V2 I iS5 AUX |
|
| M3 Aux. Motor 3 MMC Board |
Input Power |
| Aux. Motor 4 |
M1
M2
M4
M
Main Motor
Aux. Motor 2
Aux. Motor 1
RLY1
RLY2
RLY3
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
147
| ☞ The ‘Trv Acc’terminal set in EXT-30 to EXT-32 is ON during traverse acceleration time. (Open Collector Output) ☞ The ‘Trv Dec’terminal set in EXT-30 to EXT-32 is ON during traverse deceleration time. (Open Collector Output) ☞ APP-04 and APP-05 should be set to a value less than APP-03. If not, traverse control does not accomplished correctly. APP-06: Traverse Offset (Hi) Setting APP-07: Traverse Offset (Lo) Setting APP? Trv Off Hi 06 0.0 % 06 0.0 |
| This code makes positive offset during traverse operation by multi-function input terminal. When the ‘Trv Off Hi’terminal is ON, the offset frequency is added to the reference frequency. To use this function, set a terminal out of multi-function input terminals (P1, P2, P3) to ‘Trv Off Hi’in I/O-12 ~ I/O-14. The offset value is determined by, Trv. Off Hi Frequency =(Reference Frequency * Trv. Off Hi)/100 APP? Trv Off Lo 07 0.0 % 07 0.0 |
| This code makes negative offset during traverse operation by multi-function input terminal. When the ‘Trv Off Lo’terminal is ON, the offset frequency is subtracted from the reference frequency. To use this function, set a terminal out of multi-function input terminals (P1, P2, P3) to ‘Trv Off Lo’in I/O-12 ~ I/O-14. The offset value is determined by, Trv. Off Lo Frequency =(Reference Frequency * Trv. Off Lo)/100 APP-08: Running Auxiliary Motor Number Display APP?Aux Mot Run 08 0 08 0 Factory Default: 0 0 |
| Factory Default: 0.0 % 0.0 |
| Factory Default: 0.0 % 0.0 |
This code shows how many auxiliary motors are running
by MMC control.
APP-09: Starting Auxiliary Motor Selection
This code sets the starting auxiliary motor for MMC
control.
APP-10: Operation Time Display on Auto
Change
This code displays the operation time after Auto Change
is accomplished.
APP-11: Start Frequency of Aux. Motor 1
APP-12: Start Frequency of Aux. Motor 2
APP-13: Start Frequency of Aux. Motor 3
APP-14: Start Frequency of Aux. Motor 4
The inverter turns on AUX, RLY1, RLY2, and RLY3 in
APP?Starting Aux
09 1 09 1
Factory Default: 1 1
APP?Auto Op Time
10 00:00 10 00:00
Factory Default: 00:00 00:00
APP?Start freq1
11 49.99 Hz 11 49.99
Factory Default: 49.99 Hz 49.99
APP?Start freq2
12 49.99 Hz 12 49.99
Factory Default: 49.99 Hz 49.99
APP?Start freq3
13 49.99 Hz 13 49.99
Factory Default: 49.99 Hz 49.99
APP?Start freq4
14 49.99 Hz 14 49.99
Factory Default: 49.99 Hz 49.99
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
148
When the Flow
increse
When the Flow
decrease
Start
Stop
Aux. Motor
Start/Stop
Frequency rise according to
APP-19
Output
Frequency Aux start DT(APP-19)
Stop freq
1(APP-15)
Starting
Freq. Aux stop DT(APP-20)
Frequency drop according to
APP-20
Flow
Start freq 1
(APP-11)
| order if the output frequency is over the frequencies set in APP-11 to APP-14, respectively, and the time is over APP-19. APP-15: Stop Frequency of Aux. Motor 1 APP-16: Stop Frequency of Aux. Motor 2 APP-17: Stop Frequency of Aux. Motor 3 APP-18: Stop Frequency of Aux. Motor 4 APP? Stop freq1 15 15.00 Hz 15 15.00 |
| The inverter turns off RLY3, RLY2, RLY1, and AUX in order if the output frequency is below the frequencies set in APP-15 to APP-18, respectively, and the time is over APP-20. APP-19: Delay Time before Operating Aux. Motor APP-20: Delay Time before Stopping Aux. Motor Sets the time the inverter waits before starting the auxiliary motors. Sets the time the inverter waits before stopping the auxiliary motors. APP? Stop freq4 18 15.00 Hz 18 15.00 Factory Default: 15.00 Hz 15.00 APP? Aux Start DT 19 60.0 sec 19 60.0 Factory Default: 60.0 sec 60.0 APP? Aux Stop DT 20 60.0 sec 20 60.0 Factory Default: 60.0 sec 60.0 |
| Factory Default: 15.00 Hz 15.00 |
| APP? Stop freq2 16 15.00 Hz 16 15.00 Factory Default: 15.00 Hz 15.00 APP? Stop freq3 17 15.00 Hz 17 15.00 |
| Factory Default: 15.00 Hz 15.00 |
[Aux. Motor Start/Stop with MMC]
APP-21: The Number of Aux. Motors
Sets the number of auxiliary motors connected to the
inverter.
APP-22: PID Bypass Selection
This is used to bypass the PID operation selected in
FU2-47. Select this code to ‘Yes’when using MMC
function without PID control. The frequency is
determined by real value of control amount instead PID
controller output. The real value is also used as the
Start/Stop reference of Aux. motors.
The following figure shows the running pattern with this
function applied for controlling the flow rate of a tank. To
control the flow rate according to the water level of a
tank, divide the water level of the tank into the region to
the number of Aux. motors plus one, and map each
region from staring frequency to maximum frequency.
The inverter increases output frequencyto lower the
water level in the tank when the water level in the tank
rises. When reaching maximum frequency, inverter
APP?Nbr Aux’s
21 4 21 4
Factory Default: 4 4
APP?Regul Bypass
22 --- No --- 22 0
Factory Default: No 0
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
149
| connects aux. motors connected directly to commercial line. After connecting aux. motor, inverter starts again from the starting frequency. By selecting APP-22 to ‘Yes’, PID operation is disabled and Control Mode (FU2-47) is changed to ‘V/F’. PID Bypass is available only when Freq. Mode (DRV-04) is set to ‘V1’, ‘1’or ‘V2’. The level in a tank can be checked in APP-30 [Actual Value] and APP-31 [Actual Percent]. [Aux. Motor Start/Stop without PID Control] APP-23: Sleep Delay Time APP-24: Sleep Frequency APP-25: Wake-Up Level Output Frequency Freq. H-min H-max Water Level in a Tank Main Motor Aux. Motor APP? Sleep Delay 23 60.0 sec 23 60.0 |
| Sleep function is initiated when flow demand is low. Inverter stops motor when the motor runs below Sleep Frequency (APP-24) during Sleep Delay Time (APP-23). While in the sleep state, inverter keeps monitoring and initiates Wake-Up function when the real value of the controlling amount has decreased below the Wake-Up level (APP-25). |
| Factory Default: 60.0 sec 60.0 |
| APP? Sleep Freq 24 0.19 Hz 24 0.19 |
| Factory Default: 0.19 Hz 0.19 |
| APP? WakeUp level 25 35 % 25 35 |
| Factory Default: 35 % 35 |
☞ Note: Sleep function is not operated if the Sleep Delay
Time (APP-23) is set to ‘0’.
[Sleep Operation]
APP-26: Auto Change Mode Selection
This function is used to change the running order of the
motors to regulate their run-time when multiple motors
are connected for MMC.
[0]: Not using Auto Change Function.
The inverter keeps the order Main motor⇒ RLY1 ⇒
RLY2 ⇒ RLY3 ⇒ AUX and do not change the running
order of auxiliary motors.
[1]: Auto Change Function is applied only to aux. motors.
The inverter changes the order of auxiliary motors
except the main motor connected to the drive. Running
order is Main Motor⇒ RLY1 ⇒ RLY2 ⇒ RLY3 ⇒
AUX. And then it is changed to Main Motor ⇒ RLY2 ⇒
RLY3 ⇒ AUX ⇒ RLY1.
[2]: Auto Change Function is applied to all motors. The
inverter changes the order of all motors. The inverter
operates the initial motor and the others are directly
powered by commercial line. It should be used with
Inter-lock function after configuring external inter-lock
sequence circuit as shown below.
Max. Freq.
Starting
RUN
STOP
RUN
STOP
Actual Value
Time
Time
t<APP23
Sleep delay
(APP23)
Stop Start
Wakeup level
(APP25)
Sleep freq
(APP24)
Main
Motor
Output Frequency
APP? AutoCh_Mode
26 1 26 1
Factory Default: 1 1
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
150
[Wiring Diagram for Inter-Lock Configuration]
[Sequence Circuit for Inter-Lock Configuration]
APP-27: Auto Change Time
APP-28: Auto Change Level
| This function is used to protect motor from running alone for a long time by changing operation to other motor. Auto Change is accomplished when the following conditions are satisfied: 1) The time set in APP-27 is over. 2) The actual value of controlling amount is less than the value set in APP-28. 3) Only one motor is running. When above three conditions are met, the inverter stops the running motor, and changes motor to run by the order set in APP-26. and then continues operation according to new order. If Auto Change Level (APP-28) is set to ‘0’, the function is initiated only when the motor is in Stop or Sleep state. The count time for Auto Change is depend on Auto Change Mode (APP-26). In mode ‘0’, inverter starts counting only when auxiliary motor is running. In mode ‘1’or ‘2’, inverter starts counting when any motor is running including main motor. |
| APP-29: Inter-Lock Selection |
| By setting this code to ‘Yes’, the multi-function input terminals (P1 ~ P4) are used as auxiliary motor operating condition of RLY1, RLY2, RLY3, and AUX. The multi-function input terminal should be turned on to run the corresponding auxiliary motor. If running with any multi-function input terminal open with this function, the inverter starts motors except the corresponding motor. If multi-function input happens to be turned off during motor running, the inverter stops all running motors and restarts running with only normal motors except the subject motor. By setting this parameter to ‘Yes’, the multi-function input terminals (P1~P4) are set to ‘Interlock1’through ‘Interlock4’automatically. ☞ Note: P1 through P4 cannot be used for other purpose it this code is set to ‘Yes’. |
| APP? Inter-lock 29 --- No --- |
| 29 0 |
| Factory Default: No 0 |
| Related Functions: I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Multi-Function Input] EXT-02 to EXT-04 [Multi-Function Input] |
3 Phase
Input
| K1 |
| K1.1 K2 |
| U V W R S T iS5 |
K2.2
M1 M
2
230VAC
| SV-iS5 RLY CM P1 |
RLY | P2 |
| K1 | K1.1 | |
| K2 K2.1 K1 Auto Main S2 |
K2 | K2 K1.1 Auto Main S1 |
| K1 |
M1/iS5 M1/main M2/iS5
K2.1
K1
K2
APP? AutoEx-intv
27 72:00 27 72:00
Factory Default: 72:00 72:00
APP? AutoEx-level
28 20 % 28 20
Factory Default: 20 % 20
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
151
| APP-30: Feedback Freq. / Percentage Display APP? Fbk/PER 30 [Hz]/[%] 30 0.00 |
| This code displays the feedback value using on PID controller in Hz or %. APP-31: Actual Value Display in Percentage APP? Prs 31 [Bar]/[Pa] 31 0 |
| This code displays the value using on PID controller in percentage. APP-32: Pressure Display Scale APP? Scale Disp 32 1000 32 1000 |
| This parameter adjusts APP-31. APP-33: Draw Mode Selection APP? Draw Mode 33 None 33 0 |
| This code sets the signal input to use for Draw operation. The main reference frequencyis set in DRV-04. This parameter should be set to a signal that is not selected in DRV-04. APP-34: Draw Size Setting APP? Draw Perc 34 100 % 34 100 |
| This code sets the frequency bandwidth during Draw |
| Factory Default: - 0.00 |
| Factory Default: - 0 |
| Factory Default: None 0 |
| Factory Default: 100% 100 |
| Factory Default: 1000 1000 |
operation. For example, when Reference Frequency
(DRV-00) is set to ‘30Hz’, Draw Mode (APP-33) to
‘V1_Draw’and Draw Size (APP-33) to ‘10%’, the
frequency difference during Draw operation is between
27 Hz and 33Hz. The following figure shows the block
diagram for Draw and Override operation.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
152
Draw & Override
Gain/Bias
I/O-2~5
DRV-5
DRV-6
I/O-1
DRV-0
DRV-4
Frequency Mode
Reference Frequency
Miti-Step
Frequency
I/O-12 ~ 14
LPF
Step2
V1
Control
Terminal
EXT-2 ~ 4
DRV-7
I/O-21
I/O-22
I/O-23
I/O-24
keypad-1
keypad-2
Gain/Bias
I/O-6 I/O-7~10
LPF
I
Control
Termianl
V1
SUB-A
or SUB-C Gain/Bias
EXT-6 EXT-7~10
LPF
V2
None
I
V1+I
FU1-20
Max.
Frequency
Limit
wTarFreq
None
APP-33
DrawPerc (%)
Override_Freq
Draw_Freq
EXT-5 V2 Mode
Override
Step1
Step3
Step4
Step5
Step6
Step7
APP-33
Draw Mode
| Code | LCD Display | Description | Factory Default | Setting Range |
| APP-33 | Draw Mode | Draw Mode Select | 0(None) | 0(None) 1(V1_Draw) 2(I_Draw) 3(V2_Draw)* |
| APP-34 | DrawPerc | Draw Size Setting | 100.0% | 0.0 – 150.0% |
☞ Note:
1. APP-33 Setting Guide: Ref. Frequency setting mode should not be duplicated:
Ref. Freq Setting: DRV-04 [V1] APP-33 [Draw Mode]: 1(V1_Draw) (X)
Ref. Freq Setting: DRV-04 [V1] APP-33 [Draw Mode]: 2(I_Draw) (O)
2. APP-34 sets the freq limit scale during Draw Mode.
Ex) If Ref freq (Keypad -1)=30Hz, APP-33=1(V1_Draw), APP-34=10%, the ref freq for Draw mode will be
issued from 27Hz to 33Hz.
153
CHAPTER 7 - OPTIONS
The iS5 series inverter provides many options for various applications. See the following option table and select the
proper options according to your application.
| Option | Name | Description | |
| Sub-A Board (Extended I/O) |
¨ Extended I/O Module ¨ Three Multi-Function Inputs (P4, P5, P6) ¨ Three Multi-Function Outputs (Q1, Q2, Q3) ¨ Auxiliary Analog Frequency Reference (V2) ¨ LM (Load Meter) Output (0 ~ 10V) |
Internal Installation | Sub Boards |
| Sub-B Board (Speed Feedback) |
¨ Encoder Pulse Input – Speed Feedback (AOC, BOC / A+, A-, B+, B-) ¨ Encoder Pulse Output (FBA, FBB) ¨ Vector control (PG operation) and reference freq via pulse input |
||
| Sub-C Board (Extended I/O) |
¨ Extended I/O Module ¨ Three Multi-Function Inputs (P4, P5, P6) ¨ One Multi-Function Outputs (Q1) ¨ Isolated Auxiliary Analog Frequency Reference (V2) ¨ Two Isolated Analog Meter Output (AM1, AM2) |
||
| PLC Communication (F-Net) |
¨ Connection with Fnet Communication Module for GLOFA PLC ¨ Inverter Connection: Max. 64 ¨ Baud Rate: 1M bps |
||
| RS-485 | ¨ RS-485 Communication ¨ Inverter Connection: Max. 32 ¨ Baud Rate: Max. 19200 bps |
||
| LCD | ¨ 32-Character Display ¨ Download and Upload from the Keypad |
Keypad | External Installation |
| 7-Segment | ¨ Six Digit 7-Sengment Display | ||
| Remote Cable |
Remote Cable | ¨ 2m, 3m, 5m long keypad cables for separate keypad installation | |
| DB Resistor | ¨ Enables Inverter to decelerate rapidly. | Dynamic Braking |
|
| DB Unit | ¨ DB units are provided as an option for 40 ~ 100 HP inverters. |
☞ Note: Refer to option manual for more details.
Chapter 7 - Options
154
The following table shows the Sub-Board Selection Guide according to Functions.
| Sub-Board Type | Code | Function Description | |
| SUB-A Board | SUB-B Board | SUB-C Board | |
| EXT-02 | Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P4’ | √ | √ |
| EXT-03 | Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P5’ | √ | √ |
| EXT-04 | Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P6’ | √ | √ |
| EXT-05 | V2 Mode Selection | √ | √ |
| EXT-06 | Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal | √ | √ |
| EXT-07 | V2 Input Minimum Voltage | √ | √ |
| EXT-08 | Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input Minimum Voltage | √ | √ |
| EXT-09 | V2 Input Maximum Voltage | √ | √ |
| EXT-10 | Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input Maximum Voltage | √ | √ |
| EXT-14 | Usage for Pulse Input Signal | √ | |
| EXT-15 | Pulse Input Signal Selection | √ | |
| EXT-16 | Encoder Pulse Selection | √ | |
| EXT-17 | Filtering Time Constant for Pulse Input Signal | √ | |
| EXT-18 | Pulse Input Minimum Frequency | √ | |
| EXT-19 | Frequency Output corresponding to Pulse Input Minimum Frequency |
√ | |
| EXT-20 | Pulse Input Maximum Frequency | √ | |
| EXT-21 | Frequency Output corresponding to Pulse Input Maximum Frequency |
√ | |
| EXT-22 | P-Gain for PG Option | √ | |
| EXT-23 | I-Gain for PG Option | √ | |
| EXT-24 | Slip Frequency for PG Option | √ | |
| EXT-25 | P-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD | ||
| EXT-26 | I-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD | ||
| EXT-27 | Forward Torque Limit | ||
| EXT-28 | Reverse Torque Limit | ||
| EXT-30 | Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q1’ | √ | √ |
| EXT-31 | Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q2’ | √ | |
| EXT-32 | Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q3’ | √ | |
| EXT-34 | LM (Load Meter) Output Selection | √ | |
| EXT-35 | LM Output Adjustment | √ | |
| EXT-40 | AM1 (Analog Meter 1) Output Selection | √ | |
| EXT-41 | AM1 Output Adjustment | √ | |
| EXT-42 | AM2 (Analog Meter 2) Output Selection | √ | |
| EXT-43 | AM2 Output Adjustment | √ |
Chapter 7 - Options
155
7.1 Sub-A board
7.1.1 Board configuration
3 P
230/460 V
50/60 Hz
| IM + FM Output freq *2 Analog Meter 0-10V, 1mA |
U VW RS T E FM 5G 30A 30B 30C AXA AXC VR V1 I 5G (0-10V, 1 kohm) Common for VR,V1,I 24 V CM LM P4 P5 P6 Q1 EXTG VR V2 5G Multi-function input Common terminal for Multi-function input & LM Sub - A Board RX BX RST JOG P2 P3 P1 CM Power supply for speed signal (+12V 10mA) Speed signal input 4-20mA (250 ohm) Speed signal input I/O-12~14: Factory setting: Multi-speed input (Speed-L,M,H) Power supply for V2 (+12V 10mA) Voltage input 0-10V(1kohm) Maximum current thru PC: 5mA |
| Multi-function output relay Fault output relay Less than AC 250V,1A Less than DC 30V, 1A Less than AC 250V,1A Less than DC 30V, 1A Factory setting: 'Run' |
|
| XCEL-L Common terminal for multi function output Q1, Q2, Q3 FDT -1 FDT -2 FDT -3 + LM XCEL-M XCEL-H Factory setting Output freq *2 Analog Meter 0-10V, 1mA Potentiometer 1 kohm, 1/2W Multi-function output |
3. Three types of External speed signal input available.
(V, I, V+I, Refer to Parameter list and description for more details)
NFB MC
Q2
Q3
Common Terminal
Forward Run / Stop
Emergency stop
Fault reset
Jog
Multi-function input 1
Multi-function input 2
Multi-function input 3
FX
Speed signal input *3
Note) 1. : Main circuit : Control circuit
2. Output voltage is adjustable up to 12V.
.
Reverse Run / Stop
| 1 k ohm,1/2W Potentiometer |
Chapter 7 - Options
156
7.1.2 Terminal Configuration
| VR | V2 | 5G | NC |
| NC P4 LM CM |
Q1 Q2 Q3 EXTG P5 P6 7.1.3 Terminal Description
| Section | Terminal | Name | Description | |
| P4, P5, P6 | Multi-Function Input | Used as the extended function of P1, P2, P3 (I/O-12 ~ I/O-14) |
Contact Input | Input |
| CM | Common Terminal | Common terminal for P4, P5, P6 | ||
| VR | Power Supply for V2 | DC voltage output terminal for V2 (+12V, 10mA) | Analog Frequency Reference |
|
| V2 | Analog Voltage Input | Analog voltage input terminal for frequency reference or override. | ||
| 5G | Common Terminal | Common terminal for VR and V2 | ||
| LM | Load Meter | Used to monitor one of Output Frequency, Output Current, Output Voltage, DC link Voltage. (+15V Pulse output, Average voltage: 0 ~ 10V DC) |
+15V Pulse Output |
Output |
| CM | Common Terminal | Common terminal for LM | ||
| Q1, Q2, Q3 | Multi-Function Output (Open-Collector Output) |
Used as the extended function of AXA, AXC (I/O-44) | Open Collector Output |
|
| EXTG | External Common Terminal | Common terminal for Q1, Q2, Q3 | ||
| NC | Not Used |
7.1.4 Parameters of Sub-A Board
| Code | Parameter Description | Code | Parameter Description |
| EXT-01 | Sub Board Type Display | EXT-09 | Analog Voltage Input Signal (V2) Adjustment |
| EXT-02 | EXT-10 EXT-30 EXT-31 |
Multi-Function Input Terminal (P4, P4, P6) Define | |
| EXT-03 | Multi-Function Output Terminal (Q1, Q2, Q3) Define |
||
| EXT-04 | |||
| EXT-05 | V2 Mode Selection | EXT-32 | |
| EXT-06 | Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal | EXT-34 | LM Output Adjustment |
| EXT-07 | EXT-35 | Analog Voltage Input Signal (V2) Adjustment | |
| EXT-08 |
+24V DC
24V
Ground
Chapter 7 - Options
157
7.2 Sub-B Board
7.2.1 Board configuration
3 P
230/460 V
50/60 Hz
| IM E Encoder |
U VW RST E FX RX BX RST JOG P2 P3 FM 5G 30A 30B 30C AXA AXC P1 VR V1 I 5G Speed signal input 0 - 10V( 1kohm) 4 - 20mA (250 ohm) Common terminal for VR,V1, I CM 24 V A A+ B+ B FBA FBB VCC GND BOC Encoder Signal input (OC) Encoder Signal Output Encoder signal ground Sub - B Board 12~15V DC Input +5V Power supply for speed signal (+12V 10mA) Speed signal input Factory setting: Multi speed input (Speed-L,M,H) Encoder Signal input (LD) +5V DC input AOC Maximum current thru PC: 5mA |
| Input power | |
| Select the encoder type using Jumper (J1) provided on board OC: Open collector LD: Line drive |
1 kohm,1/2W
Speed signal input*2
NFB MC
0
Apply the
voltage
according to
Encoder
specification
External
Power Supply
AC110~220V
50/60Hz
+5V
Common Terminal
Potentiometer
Reverse Run /
Forward Run / Stop
Emergency stop (Not latch)
Fault reset
Jog
Multi-function
input 1
Stop
Multi-function
input 2
Multi-function
input 3
0V VCC
Note) 1. : Main circuit : Control circuit
2. Three types of External speed signal input available
(V, I, V+I, Refer to Parameter list and description for more details) .
Chapter 7 - Options
158
7.2.2 Terminal Configuration (total 14 pins)
| AOC | BOC | A+ | A- | B+ | B- | FBA | FBB | GND | GND | +5V | +5V | VCC | VCC |
7.2.3 Terminal Description
| Section | Terminal | Name | Description | |
| Open Collector Type |
AOC | A Pulse Input Terminal | Connects A signal of Open Collector type encoder. | Encoder Signal Input |
| BOC | B Pulse Input Terminal | Connects B signal of Open Collector type encoder. | ||
| A+ | A+ Pulse Input Terminal | Connects A+ signal of Line Drive type encoder. | Line Drive Type |
|
| A- | A- Pulse Input Terminal | Connects A- signal of Line Drive type encoder. | ||
| B+ | B+ Pulse Input Terminal | Connects B+ signal of Line Drive type encoder. | ||
| B- | B- Pulse Input Terminal | Connects B- signal of Line Drive type encoder. | ||
| Signal Output |
FBA | Encoder A Pulse Output | Outputs A signal received from the encoder. | Encoder Signal Output |
| FBB | Encoder B Pulse Output | Outputs B signal received from the encoder. | ||
| +5V | +5V DC Input Terminal (For Line Drive type) |
Provides +5V DC power output to encoder. (5V DC, Minimum 0.5A) |
Power Supply Input | |
| VCC | +12 to 15V DC Input/output Terminal from External Power Supply to Encoder (For Open collector type) |
Encoder supply voltage, Supply proper voltage according to the encoder specification. (+12 to 15V DC, Minimum 0.5A) |
||
| GND | Ground Terminal | Ground for Power supply and encoder signal. |
7.2.4 Parameters of Sub-B Board
| Code | Parameter Description | Code | Parameter Description |
| EXT-01 | Sub Board Type Display | EXT-21 | Pulse Input Signal Adjustment |
| EXT-14 | Usage for Pulse Input Signal | EXT-22 | P-Gain |
| EXT-15 | Pulse Input Signal Selection | EXT-23 | I-Gain |
| EXT-16 | Encoder Pulse Number | EXT-24 | Slip Frequency |
| EXT-17 | Filtering Time Constant | EXT-25 | P-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD |
| EXT-18 | EXT-26 | I-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD | Pulse Input Signal Adjustment |
| EXT-19 | EXT-27 | Forward Torque Limit | |
| EXT-20 | EXT-28 | Reverse Torque Limit |
Chapter 7 - Options
159
| AOC IM Motor BOC A+ A B+ B FBA FBB GND Encoder E GND +5V +5V VCC VCC Shield |
R S T G U V W 24 V FM 5G |
NFC MC FWD Run/Stop REV Run/Stop Emergency stop Fault reset JOG Potentiometer 1 kohm, 1/2W Common Terminal Multi-function input 1 Multi-function input 2 Multi-function input 3 |
| FX RX BX RST JOG P1 P2 P3 CM VR V1 5G I 30 30 30 AX AX I/O-12~14 : Factory setting: Multi-speed input (Speed-L, M, H) Power supply for speed signal +12V 10mA Speed signal input 0~10V(1 kohm) Speed signal input 4~20mA (250ohm) (Common for VR, V1, I ) Maximum current thru PC: 5mA |
Sub-B Encoder signal (LD) input Encoder signal output Encoder signal ground +5 V power output to Encoder |
|
| B |
3
phase
AC
input
Note) 1. : Main circuit, : Control circuit.
2. External speed signal: V1, I, V1+I (Refer to Parameter list)
1. Sub-B board with
Line Drive type encoder
Chapter 7 - Options
160
| AOC IM BOC A+ A B+ B FBA FBB GND Encoder E GND +5V +5V VCC VCC Shield |
R S T G U V W 24 V FM 5G |
NFC MC FWD Run/Stop REV Run/Stop Emergency stop Fault reset JOG Multi-function input 1 Common Terminal Potentiometer 1 kohm, 1/2W Multi-function input 2 Multi-function input 3 *2 |
| FX RX BX RST JOG P1 P2 P3 CM VR V1 5G I Power supply for speed signal +12V 10mA Speed signal input 0~10V(1 kohm) Speed signal input 4~20mA (250ohm) (Common for VR, V1, I ) I/O-12~14 : Factory setting: Multi-speed input (Speed-L, M, H) 30 30 30 AX AX Maximum current thru PC: 5mA |
Sub-B Encoder signal input (Open collector) Encoder signal output 12~15 V DC input/output terminal Encoder signal ground |
|
| A B |
3
phase
AC
input
Note) 1. : Main circuit, : Control circuit
2. External speed command: V1, I, and V1+I (Refer to Function list)
External
Power
Supply
2. Sub-B board with
Open collector type encoder
Chapter 7 - Options
161
7.3 Sub-C Board (Isolated)
7.3.1 Board Configuration
3P
230/460 V
50/60 Hz
| IM + Output freq analog meter (0-10V, 1mA) *2 FM |
U VW RS T E RX BX RST JOG P2 P3 FM 5G 30A 30B 30C AXA AXC P1 VR V1 I 5G 0- 10V(1 kohm) Maximum current thru PC: 5mA CM 24 V AM2 AM1 P4 P5 P6 EXTG VR V2 GND Multi-function input Open collector Multi-function input (Less than 25V, 50mA) Sub- C Board CM 4 - 20mA (250 ohm) Common terminal for VR,V1, I Power supply for speed signal (+12V 10mA) Speed signal input Factory setting: Multi-speed input (Speed-L,M,H) Speed signal input |
| Fault output relay Less than AC 250V, 1A Less than DC 30V, 1A Multi-function output relay Less than AC 250V, 1A Less than DC 30V, 1A Factory setting:'Run' |
|
| XCEL-L FDT-1 Analog meter output 1 (0-10V, 1mA) Potentiometer 1kohm, 1/2W Analog meter output 2 (0-10V, 1mA) XCEL-M XCEL-H Common terminal for P4-6 Common terminal for Q1 |
FX
*3
NFB MC
Q1
FWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
Fault reset
JOG
Multi-function input 1
Common Terminal
Multi-function input 2
Multi-function input 3
Emergency brake
Note) 1. : Main circuit : Control circuit
2. Output voltage is adjustable up to 12V
3. Three types of External speed signal input available
(V, I, V+I, Refer to Parameter list and description for more details)
.
Speed signal input
| Potentiometer 1kohm, 1/2W |
Chapter 7 - Options
162
7.3.2 Terminal Configuration
| Q1 | EXTG | NC | P4 | P5 | P6 | CM | NC | GND | V2 | AM1 | AM2 | VR | GND |
| 24V Ground |
7.3.3 Terminal Description
| Section | Terminal | Name | Description | |
| P4, P5, P6 | Multi-Function Input | Used as the extended function of P1, P2, P3 (I/O-12 ~ I/O-14). |
Contact Input | Input |
| CM | Common Terminal | Common terminal for P4, P5, P6 | ||
| VR | Power supply for V2 | DC voltage output terminal for V2 (+12V, 10mA) | Analog Frequency Reference |
|
| V2 | Analog Voltage Input | Analog voltage or current input terminal for frequency reference or override. (0 ~ 10V DC, 4 ~ 20mA) Connecting jumper pin (J1) select current input. |
||
| 5G | Common Terminal | Common terminal for VR and V2 | ||
| AM1 | Analog Meter 1 | Used to monitor one of Output Frequency, Output Current, Output Voltage, DC link Voltage (0 ~ 10V DC analog output, 1mA) |
Analog Voltage | Output |
| AM2 | Analog Meter 2 | |||
| GND | Common Terminal | Common terminal for LM | ||
| Q1 | Multi-function Output | Used as the extended function of AXA, AXC (I/O-44) | Open Collector Output |
|
| EXTG | External Common Terminal | Common terminal for Q1 | ||
| NC | Not Used |
7.3.4 Parameters of Sub-C Board
| Code | Parameter Description | Code | Parameter Description |
| EXT-01 | Sub Board Type Display | EXT-09 | Analog Voltage Input Signal (V2) Adjustment |
| EXT-02 | EXT-10 | Multi-Function Input Terminal (P4, P4, P6) define | |
| EXT-03 | EXT-30 | Multi-function Output Terminal (Q1) define | |
| EXT-04 | EXT-40 | AM1, AM2 Adjustment | |
| EXT-05 | V2 Mode Selection | EXT-41 | |
| EXT-06 | Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal | EXT-43 | |
| EXT-07 | EXT-43 | Analog Voltage Input Signal (V2) Adjustment | |
| EXT-08 |
+24V DC
Chapter 7 - Options
163
7.4 Communication option boards
7.4.1 F-Net (Needed for Communication with LGGLOFA PLC)
Open network system protocol based on IEC/ISA FieldBus
² Specification
l Topology: Linear Bus Topology
l Band Method: Baseband
l Protocol: Fnet Protocol
l Media Access Method: Token
l Drive link: Fiber optics
l Number of nodes: up to 64 nodes/Bus
l Max. Data transmission size: 256byte
l Baud rate: 1Mbps
l Transmission distance: 750m Max.
l Error check: CRC-16
l Encoding method: Menchester Biphase-L
l Station: 0 – 63 (Setting via Keypad. Dip-switch not provided)
7.4.2 Device-Net (Field bus)
² Features
l Topology: Linear Bus Topology
l Band Method: Baseband
l Protocol: DeviceNet Protocol
l Media Access Method: CSMA/CD-NBA
l (Carrier Sense Multiple Access / Collision Detection – Nondestructive Bitwise Arbitration)
l Drive link: 5-wire Cable (Twisted Pair)
l Number of nodes: 64 nodes/Bus Max
l Max. Data transmission size: max 8 bytes (64bits)
l Data rates and Max. Cable length (thick): 125kbps (500m/1640ft), 250kbps (250m/820ft), 500kbps
(100m/328ft)
² Specification
l Device type: AC Drive
l Communication control method:
① Explicit Peer to Peer Messaging
② Master/Scanner (Predefined M/S Connection)
③ I/O Slave Messaging: Polling Connection
l Baud rate: 125kbps, 250kbps, 500kbps
l Supply voltage: 11 - 25V
l Faulted Node Recovery
l Station: 0 – 63 (Setting via Keypad, Dip-switch not provided)
l Output Assembly Instance: 20, 21(100, 101 vendor specific)
l Input Assembly Instance: 70, 71(110, 111 vendor specific)
l Open Style Connector
l Interface: DPRAM
l Supports EDS files
* Refer to communication option manuals for details.
Chapter 7 - Options
164
7.4.3 RS485 & MODBUS-RTU Communication
[Performance Specification]
| Category | Specification |
| Communication Method | RS485 (RS232-485 Converter) |
| Transmi ssion Form | Bus method Multi-drop Link System |
| Applicable Inverter | SV-iS5 series |
| Converter | Converter equipped with RS232 |
| Number of connectable Inverter | 31, Max. |
| Transmission Distance | Max. 1200m (Within 700m is desired) |
[Hardware Specification]
| Category | Specification | |
| Installation | Install on the Control Board of Inverter using option connector (CN2) | |
| Power Supply |
Control Board | Powered by Inverter |
| Communication Board | Powered by Control Board Power (Isolated Power) |
[Communication Specification]
| Category | Specification |
| Communication Speed | 19200/9600/4800/2400/19200 bps User Selectable |
| Control Procedure | Asynchronous Communication System |
| Communication System | Half duplex system |
| Character System | ASCII (8 bit) |
| Stop Bit Length | 1 bit |
| Error Check (CRC16) | 2 byte |
| Parity check | None |
7.4.4 12Bit Binary (DI) Input
| Category | Specification | |
| BIT | Digital 12Bit input | |
| Communication | Install on the Control Board of Inverter using option connector (CN2) | |
| Power Supply |
Control Board | Powered by Inverter |
| 24V Power | Powered by Inverter 24V using connector |
7.4.5 Installing Option Board
Connect the option board to Control board using Connector CN2.
CN2
Connector
Mounting
poles
Option board Control board
Chapter 7 - Options
165
7.5 Keypad
The iS5 series has two kind of keypad for convenience.
7.5.1 LCD Keypad
(Weight: 140g, Unit: mm)
7.5.2 7-Segment Keypad
(Weight: 110g, Unit: mm)
Chapter 7 - Options
166
7.5.3 RS485 Communication
The serial interface supports operation, configuration and monitoring of inverter functions through RS485 connection.
1) Terminal block configuration
| P | N | G | S | T1 | T2 |
2) Terminal Description
| Terminal Name | Description |
| T1,T2 | Short the terminal to connect the termination resistor on board |
| S | SHEILD |
| G | Power grounding terminal for RS485 |
| P | Connect the RS485 signal - High Signal input/output terminal for RS 485 |
| N | Connect the RS485 signal - Low Reference terminal for RS 485 |
7.5.4 Remote cable
| Ordering Number | Description |
| 051050025 | Remote cable - 2m |
| 051050026 | Remote cable - 3m |
| 051050027 | Remote cable - 5m |
Chapter 7 - Options
167
7.6 DB Resistors
1) Internal DB Resistor
SV-iS5 inverters up to 3.7kW have built-in DB resistor on Power stack as factory installation. Installing the external
DB resistor (Optional) kit is strongly recommended when the unit is used for continuous operation or motor rating
is above 3.7kW.
| Voltage | Applied motor capacity (kW/HP) |
Operating rate (%ED/Continuous Braking Time) |
Built in DB resistor (Braking Torque: 100%) |
| 0.75 / 1 | 3%/ 5Sec | 200 ohm, 100W | 200V Class |
| 1.5 / 2 | 3% / 5 Sec | 100 ohm, 100W | |
| 2.2 / 3 | 2% / 5 Sec | 60 ohm, 100W | |
| 3.7 / 5 | 2% / 5 Sec | 40 ohm, 100W | |
| 0.75 / 1 | 3% / 5 Sec | 900 ohm, 100W | 400V Class |
| 1.5 / 2 | 3% / 5 Sec | 450 ohm, 100W | |
| 2.2 / 3 | 2% / 5 Sec | 300 ohm, 100W | |
| 3.7 / 5 | 2% / 5 Sec | 200 ohm, 100W |
Chapter 7 - Options
168
2) DB Resistor (For External Installation, Optional)
DB transistor is integrated for ratings below 7.5kW. Install the external DB resistor if necessary. However, DB
transistor is not provided for the ratings above 11kW, installing both external DB unit and DB resistor are required.
See the following table for more details (ED: 5%, Continuous Braking Time: 15 sec). If Enable duty (%ED) is
increased to 10%, use the external DB resistor having twice Wattage rating.
| Applied motor capacity (kW / HP) |
100 % Braking Torque | 150% Braking Torque | Operating rate (ED/Continuous Braking Time) |
|||||
| [ohm] | [W] | Type | [ohm] | [W] | Type | |||
| 0.75 / 1 | 5% / 15 Sec | 200 | 100 | TYPE 1 | 150 | 150 | TYPE 1 | 2 0 0 V |
| 1.5 / 2 | 5% / 15 Sec | 100 | 200 | TYPE 1 | 60 | 300 | TYPE 1 | |
| 2.2 / 3 | 5% / 15 Sec | 60 | 300 | TYPE 1 | 50 | 400 | TYPE 1 | |
| 3.7 / 5 | 5% / 15 Sec | 40 | 500 | TYPE 2 | 33 | 600 | TYPE 2 | |
| 5.5 / 7.5 | 5% / 15 Sec | 30 | 700 | TYPE 3 | 20 | 800 | TYPE 3 | |
| 7.5 / 10 | 5% / 15 Sec | 20 | 1000 | TYPE 3 | 15 | 1200 | TYPE 3 | |
| 11 / 15 | 5% / 15 Sec | 15 | 1400 | TYPE 3 | 10 | 2400 | TYPE 3 | |
| 15 / 20 | 5% / 15 Sec | 11 | 2000 | TYPE 3 | 8 | 2400 | TYPE 3 | |
| 18.5 / 25 | 5% / 15 Sec | 9 | 2400 | TYPE 3 | 5 | 3600 | TYPE 3 | |
| 22 / 30 | 5% / 15 Sec | 8 | 2800 | TYPE 3 | 5 | 3600 | TYPE 3 | |
| 30 / 40 | 10% / 6 Sec | 4.2 | 6400 | - | - | - | - | |
| 37 / 50 | 10% / 6 Sec | 4.2 | 6400 | - | - | - | - | |
| 45 / 60 | 10% / 6 Sec | 2.8 | 9600 | - | - | - | - | |
| 55 / 75 | 10% / 6 Sec | 2.8 | 9600 | - | - | - | - | |
| 0.75 / 1 | 5% / 15 Sec | 900 | 100 | TYPE 1 | 600 | 150 | TYPE 1 | 4 0 0 V |
| 1.5 / 2 | 5% / 15 Sec | 450 | 200 | TYPE 1 | 300 | 300 | TYPE 1 | |
| 2.2 / 3 | 5% / 15 Sec | 300 | 300 | TYPE 1 | 200 | 400 | TYPE 1 | |
| 3.7 / 5 | 5% / 15 Sec | 200 | 500 | TYPE 2 | 130 | 600 | TYPE 2 | |
| 5.5 / 7.5 | 5% / 15 Sec | 120 | 700 | TYPE 3 | 85 | 1000 | TYPE 3 | |
| 7.5 / 10 | 5% / 15 Sec | 90 | 1000 | TYPE 3 | 60 | 1200 | TYPE 3 | |
| 11 / 15 | 5% / 15 Sec | 60 | 1400 | TYPE 3 | 40 | 2000 | TYPE 3 | |
| 15 / 20 | 5% / 15 Sec | 45 | 2000 | TYPE 3 | 30 | 2400 | TYPE 3 | |
| 18.5 / 25 | 5% / 15 Sec | 35 | 2400 | TYPE 3 | 20 | 3600 | TYPE 3 | |
| 22 / 30 | 5% / 15 Sec | 30 | 2800 | TYPE 3 | 20 | 3600 | TYPE 3 | |
| 30 / 40 | 10% / 6 Sec | 16.9 | 6400 | - | - | - | - | |
| 37 / 50 | 10% / 6 Sec | 16.9 | 6400 | - | - | - | - | |
| 45 / 60 | 10% / 6 Sec | 11.4 | 9600 | - | - | - | - | |
| 55 / 75 | 10% / 6 Sec | 11.4 | 9600 | - | - | - | - | |
| 75 / 100 | 10% / 6 Sec | 8.4 | 12800 | - | - | - | - |
Chapter 7 - Options
169
3) DB Resistor Wiring
When wiring, connect the DB Resistor as SHORT as possible.
· DB resistor wiring for 1 – 5 HP Inverter
| DB resistor terminal | Terminal description |
| B1, B2 | Connect the DB Resistor to Inverter terminal B1, B2. |
| TH1, TH2 | Thermal sensors provided with the DB resistor. P1 is ON (TH1-TH2 Shorted) at normal (ambient temp) and P1 is OFF (TH1-TH2 Open) at overheated status. Connect the thermal sensor to one of the multi-function input (P1, P2 or P3, I/O 12-14 setting: Ext Trip-B). |
IM
| UVW RST G B2 RX BX RST JOG P2 P3 FM 5G P1 Max Current thru PC: 5mA CM 24 V Multi-function input terminal (I/O-12 Setting: Ext Trip-B) B1 |
REV Run / Stop FWD Run / Stop Fault Reset Jog |
| DB TH1 TH2 B1 B2 |
Resistor
FX
+ FM
Analog freq
output 2)
(0-10V)
Max distance between inverter and
DB Resistor: 5m
Chapter 7 - Options
170
· DB resistor wiring for 7.5 - 10HP Inverter
| DB resistor terminal | Terminal description |
| B1, B2 | Connect the DB Resistor to Inverter terminal B1, B2. |
| TH1, TH2 | Thermal sensors provided with the DB resistor. P1 is ON (TH1-TH2 Shorted) at normal (ambient temp) and P1 is OFF (TH1-TH2 Open) at overheated status. Connect the thermal sensor to one of the multi-function input (P1, P2 or P3, I/O 12-14 setting: Ext Trip-B). |
IM
U VW
R S T G
B1 B2
DB Resistor
| FX |
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P2
P3
FM
+
FM
5G
Analog freq
output 2)
(0-10V)
P1
REV Run / Stop
FWD Run / Stop
Fault reset
Jog
Max Current thru
PC: 5mA
CM
24 V
TH1 TH2
Max distance between
inverter and DB Resistor: 5m
Multi-function input terminal
(I/O-12 Setting: Ext Trip-B)
B1 B2
N
Emergency Stop
P
Chapter 7 - Options
171
·DB resistor wiring for 15~30HP Built-in DB UnitInverter
| DB resistor terminal | Terminal description |
| B1, B2 | Connect the DB Resistor to Inverter terminal B1, B2. |
| TH1, TH2 | Thermal sensors provided with the DB resistor. P1 is ON (TH1-TH2 Shorted) at normal (ambient temp) and P1 is OFF (TH1-TH2 Open) at overheated status. Connect the thermal sensor to one of the multi-function input (P1, P2 or P3, I/O 12-14 setting: Ext Trip-B). |
IM
U VW
R S T G
B1 B2
DB Resistor
| FX |
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P2
P3
FM
+
FM
5G
Analog freq
output 2)
(0-10V)
P1
REV Run / Stop
FWD Run / Stop
Fault reset
Jog
Max Current thru
PC: 5mA
CM
24 V
TH1 TH2
Max distance between inverter and
DB Resistor: 5m
Multi-function input terminal
(I/O-12 Setting: Ext Trip-B)
P1
B1 B2
Chapter 7 - Options
172
· DB Resistor/Unit wiring for 15-100 HP Inverter
| DB resistor terminal | Terminal description |
| B1, B2 | Connect the DB Resistor to DBU terminal P/B1, B2. |
| TH1, TH2 | Thermal sensors provided with the DB resistor. P1 is ON (TH1-TH2 Shorted) at normal (ambient temp) and P1 is OFF (TH1-TH2 Open) at overheated status. Connect the thermal sensor to one of the multi-function input (P1, P2 or P3, I/O 12-14 setting: Ext Trip-B). |
* For DBU, refer to 7.7 DB Unit.
IM
| U VW RS T G P2 RX BX RST JOG P2 P3 FM 5G P1 Max Current thru PC: 5mA CM 24 V Multi-function input terminal (I/O-12 Setting: Ext Trip-B) P1 N |
REV Run FWD Run / Fault |
/ Stop Stop reset Jog |
| Short Max distance between P& P2: 5m |
B1 N B2 G P |
DB Resistor
FX
+ FM
Analog freq
output 2)
(0-10V)
TH1
TH2
Max distance between N&N: 5m
Wires should be Twisted.
B2 B1
DB Unit
Chapter 7 - Options
173
4) DB Resistor Dimensions
| Dimensions [mm] | DB Resistor | Inverter Model | Type | |||||
| W | H | D | A | B | C | |||
| BR0400W150J | SV 008IS5-2 | 1 | 64 | 412 | 40 | - | 400 | 6.3 |
| BR0400W060J | SV 015IS5-2 | 1 | 64 | 412 | 40 | - | 400 | 6.3 |
| BR0400W050J | SV 022IS5-2 | 1 | 64 | 412 | 40 | - | 400 | 6.3 |
| BR0600W033J | SV 037IS5-2 | 2 | 128 | 390 | 43 | 64 | 370 | 5 |
| BR0800W020J | SV 055IS5-2 | 3 | 220 | 345 | 93 | 140 | 330 | 7.8 |
| BR1200W015J | SV 075IS5-2 | 3 | 220 | 345 | 93 | 140 | 330 | 7.8 |
| BR2400W010J | SV 110IS5-2 | 3 | 220 | 445 | 93 | 140 | 430 | 7.8 |
| BR2400W008J | SV 150IS5-2 | 3 | 220 | 445 | 93 | 140 | 430 | 7.8 |
| BR3600W005J | SV 185IS5-2 | 3 | 220 | 445 | 165 | 140 | 430 | 7.8 |
| BR3600W005J | SV 220IS5-2 | 3 | 220 | 445 | 165 | 140 | 430 | 7.8 |
| BR0400W600J | SV 008IS5-4 | 1 | 64 | 412 | 40 | - | 400 | 6.3 |
| BR0400W300J | SV 015IS5-4 | 1 | 64 | 412 | 40 | - | 400 | 6.3 |
| BR0400W200J | SV 022IS5-4 | 1 | 64 | 412 | 40 | - | 400 | 6.3 |
| BR0600W130J | SV 037IS5-4 | 2 | 128 | 390 | 43 | 64 | 370 | 5 |
| BR1000W085J | SV 055IS5-4 | 3 | 220 | 345 | 93 | 140 | 330 | 7.8 |
| BR1200W060J | SV 075IS5-4 | 3 | 220 | 345 | 93 | 140 | 330 | 7.8 |
| BR2000W040J | SV 110IS5-4 | 3 | 220 | 445 | 93 | 140 | 430 | 7.8 |
| BR2400W030J | SV 150IS5-4 | 3 | 220 | 445 | 93 | 140 | 430 | 7.8 |
| BR3600W020J | SV 185IS5-4 | 3 | 220 | 445 | 165 | 140 | 430 | 7.8 |
| BR3600W020J | SV 220IS5-4 | 3 | 220 | 445 | 165 | 140 | 430 | 7.8 |
* Type 1 (Max. 400 Watt)
Chapter 7 - Options
174
* Type 2 (Max. 600 Watt)
* Type 3
A
Chapter 7 - Options
175
7.7 DB (Dynamic Brake) Unit
1) DBU models
| UL | Inverter | Applicable motor rating | DB Unit | Dimension |
| 200V | 11 ~ 15 kW | SV150DBU-2 | Group 1. See 4) Dimensions |
Non UL type |
| 200V | 18.5 ~ 22 kW | SV220DBU-2 | ||
| 200V | 30 ~ 37 kW | SV370DBU-2 | Group 2. See 4) Dimensions |
|
| 200V | 45 ~ 55 kW | SV550DBU-2 | ||
| 400V | 11 ~ 15 kW | SV150DBU-4 | Group 1. See 4) Dimensions |
|
| 400V | 18.5 ~ 22 kW | SV220DBU-4 | ||
| 400V | 30 ~ 37 kW | SV370DBU-4 | Group 2. See 4) Dimensions |
|
| 400V | 45 ~ 55 kW | SV550DBU-4 | ||
| 400V | 75 kW | SV750DBU-4 | ||
| 200V | 11 ~ 15 kW | SV150DBU-2U | UL Type | Group 3. See 4) Dimensions |
| 200V | 18.5 ~ 22 kW | SV220DBU-2 U | ||
| 200V | 30 ~ 37 kW | SV370DBU-2 U | ||
| 200V | 45 ~ 55 kW | SV550DBU-2 U | ||
| 400V | 11 ~ 15 kW | SV150DBU-4 U | ||
| 400V | 18.5 ~ 22 kW | SV220DBU-4 U | ||
| 400V | 30 ~ 37 kW | SV370DBU-4 U | ||
| 400V | 45 ~ 55 kW | SV550DBU-4 U | ||
| 400V | 75 kW | SV750DBU-4 U |
2) Terminal configuration
- Group 1:
- Group 2:
- Group 3:
| Terminal | Description |
| G | Grounding terminal |
| B2 | Connect it to DB Resistor terminal B2 |
| B1 | Connect it to DB Resistor terminal B1 |
| N | Connect it to Inverter terminal N |
| P | Connect it to Inverter terminal P |
| CM | Common for Terminal OH |
| OH* | Overheat Trip Output Terminal (Open Collector output: 20mA, 27V DC) |
| CM | OH |
| G | B2 | B1 | N | P |
| G | N | B2 | P/B1 |
| P | N | G | B1 | B2 |
Chapter 7 - Options
176
3) DB Resistor/Unit wiring for 15-100 HP Inverter
IM
| U VW R S T G P2 RX BX RST JOG P2 P3 FM 5G P1 Max Current thru PC: 5mA CM 24 V Multi-function input terminal (I/O-12 Setting: Ext Trip-B) P1 N |
REV Run FWD Run / Fault Emergenc |
/ Stop Stop reset Jog y stop |
| Wi | ||
| Short B2 Max distance between P & P2: 5m |
B1 N B2 G P |
DB Resistor
FX
+ FM
Analog freq
output 2)
(0-10V)
TH1
TH2
Max distance between N &N: 5m
res should be Twisted.
B1
DB Unit
Chapter 7 - Options
177
4) Dimensions
lGroup 1
(Unit: mm)
| N T P R S (P2) W U V IM |
ynamic
D
N P
B2
B1
G
Braking
WIRING
Unit
B2
B1
Chapter 7 - Options
178
lGroup 2
| 5.5 |
| 258 5 245 |
| 2-Ø5.5 |
| D y n a m i c B r a k i n g U n i t RESET POWER RUN OHT OCT |
80
80
123
12 231.5
| 15 27 130 |
| 75 |
Chapter 7 - Options
179
lGroup 3:
P/B1
B2
GN
B2
R B1
ST
IM
W
U V
N
WIRING
P
(P2)
Risk of Electric Shock
Risk of Electric Shock
Risk of Injury or Electric Shock
WARNING
설치시 반드시 접지하여 주십시오.
상해나 감전의 우려가 있습니다.
주의사항을 읽고 지켜 주십시오.
차단한 후 10분이상 기다려 주십시오.
감전의 우려가 있습니다.
감전의 우려가 있습니다.
커버를 열기전에 입력전원을
사용전에 사용설명서의 안전상
경 고
Chapter 7 - Options
180
(5) Monitoring LEDs
* Group 1
* Group 2
* Group 3
RESET
POWER
RUN
OHT
OCT
POWER
RUN
OHT
OCT
FOT
| LED | Description |
| OHT (GREEN, LEFT) |
When heat sink is overheated and the level exceeds its setting limit, overheat protection is activated and OHT LED is turned ON after DBU’s signal is shut off. |
| POWER (RED) |
POWER LED is turned ON upon inverter Power ON because normally it is connected to the inverter. |
| RUN (GREEN, RIGHT) |
RUN LED is blinking while DBU is operating normally by motor regenerating energy. |
OHT POWER RUN
| LED | Description |
| RESET | Press this switch to release OCT FAULT status. Pressing this turns the OCT LED off. |
| POWER (GREEN) |
POWER LED is turned ON upon inverter Power ON because normally it is connected to the inverter. |
| RUN (GREEN) |
RUN LED is blinking while DBU is operating normally by motor regenerating energy. |
| OHT (RED) | When heat sink is overheated and the level exceeds its setting limit, overheat protection is activated and OHT LED is turned ON after DBU’s signal is shut off. |
| OCT (RED) | Over current trip signal. When overcurrent is flowed to the iGBT, protection function shuts off the operating signal and OCT LED is tured ON. |
| LED | Description |
| POWER (RED) |
POWER LED is turned ON upon inverter Power ON because normally it is connected to the inverter. |
| RUN (GREEN) |
RUN LED is blinking while DBU is operating normally by motor regenerating energy. |
| OHT (RED) |
When heat sink is overheated and the level exceeds its setting limit, overheat protection is activated and OHT LED is turned ON after DBU’s signal is shut off. |
| OCT (RED) |
Over current trip signal. When overcurrent is flowed to the iGBT, protection function shuts off the operating signal and OCT LED is tured ON. |
| FOT (RED) |
FOT LED is turned ON when fuse is opened to shut the overcurrent during braking. |
181
CHAPTER 8 - TROUBLESHOOTING & MAINTENANCE
8.1 Fault Display
When a fault occurs, the inverter turns off its output and displays the fault status in DRV-07. The last 5 faults are saved
in FU2-01 through FU2-05 with the operation status at the instance of fault.
| Keypad Display | Protective Function |
Description | |
| LCD | 7-Segment | ||
| Over Current 1 | OC1 | Over Current Protection |
The inverter turns off its output when the output current of the inverter flows more than 200% of the inverter rated current. |
| Ground Fault | GF | Ground Fault Protection |
The inverter turns off its output when a ground fault occurs and the ground fault current is more than the internal setting value of the inverter. Over current trip function may protect the inverter when a ground fault occurs due to a low ground fault resistance. |
| Over Voltage | OV | Over voltage protection |
The inverter turns off its output if the DC voltage of the main circuit increases higher than the rated value when the motor decelerates or when regenerative energy flows back to the inverter due to a regenerative load. This fault can also occur due to a surge voltage generated at the power supply system. |
| Over Load | OLT | Current Limit Protection (Overload Protection) |
The inverter turns off its output if the output current of the inverter flows at 180% of the inverter rated current for more than the current limit time (S/W). |
| Fuse Open | FUSE | Fuse Open | The inverter turns off its output by opening the fuse when something is wrong with the main circuit IGBT to protect the wiring from being damaged from short currents. |
| Over Heat | OH | Heat Sink Over Heat |
The inverter turns off its output if the heat sink over heats due to a damaged cooling fan or an alien substance in the cooling fan by detecting the temperature of the heat sink. |
| E-Thermal | ETH | Electronic Thermal | The internal electronic thermal of the inverter determines the over heating of the motor. If the motor is overloaded the inverter turns off the output. The inverter cannot protect the motor when driving a multi-pole motor or when driving multiple motors, so consider thermal relays or other thermal protective devices for each motor. Overload capacity: 150% for 1 min |
| External-A | EXTA | External fault A | Use this function if the user needs to turn off the output by an external fault signal. (Normal Open Contact) |
| External-B | EXTB | External fault B | Use this function if the user needs to turn off the output by an external fault signal. (Normal Close Contact) |
| Low Voltage | LV | Low Voltage Protection |
The inverter turns off its output if the DC voltage is below the detection level because insufficient torque or over heating of the motor can occurs when the input voltage of the inverter drops. |
| Over Current 2 | OC2 | IGBT Short | The inverter turns off the output if an IGBT short through or an output short occurs. |
| Phase Open | PO | Output Phase open |
The inverter turns off its output when the one or more of the output(U, V, W) phase is open. The inverter detects the output current to check the phase open of the output. |
| BX | BX | BX Protection (Instant Cut Off) |
Used for the emergency stop of the inverter. The inverter instantly turns off the output when the BX terminal is turned ON, and returns to regular operation when the BX terminal is turned OFF. Take caution when using this function. |
| Option (**) | OPT | Option Fault | Fault at the internal option of the inverter. |
| HW-Diag | HW | Inverter H/W Fault |
A fault signal is output when an error occurs to the control circuitry of the inverter. There are the Wdog error, the EEP error, and the ADC Offset for this fault |
| COM Error CPU Error |
Err | Communication Error | This fault is displayed when the inverter cannot communicate with the keypad. |
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
182
| Keypad Display | Protective Function |
Description | |
| LCD | 7-Segment | ||
| LOP LOR LOV LOI LOX |
PL RL VL IL XL |
Operating Method when the Frequency Reference is Lost |
According to the I/O-48 [Operating Method when the Frequency Reference is Lost] setting, there are three modes: continue operation, decelerate and stop, and free run, LOP: Displayed when option frequency reference is lost (DPRAM time out) LOR: Displayed when option frequency reference is lost (Communication network fault) LOV: Displayed when ‘V1’analog frequency reference is lost. LOI: Displayed when ‘I‘analog frequency reference is lost. LOX: Displayed when sun-board (V2, ENC) analog frequency reference is lost. |
| Inv. OLT | IOLT | Inverter Overload | The inverter turns off its output when the output current of the inverter flows more than the rated level (150% for 1 minute, 200% for 0.5 seconds). |
| NTC open | NTC | Thermal Sensor Opened |
Inverter uses NC thermal sensor for detecting heat sink temperature. If this message is displayed, the thermal sensor wire may be cut. (Inverter keeps operating) |
| Over Speed | OSPD | Overspeed | Inverter shuts off its output when a motor rotates at the frequency exceeding 20 Hz of its max speed. |
| MC Fail | MCF | M/C Fail | It is displayed when input power is not applied or M/C inside the inverter malfunctions. |
To reset fault, Press RESET key, Close RST -CM terminals or connect input power.
If a problem persists, please contact the factory or your local distributor.
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
183
8.2 Fault Remedy
| Protective Function |
Cause | Remedy |
| Over Current Protection |
1) Acceleration/Deceleration time is too short compared to the GD² of the load. 2) Load is larger than the inverter rating. 3) Inverter turns output on when the motor is free running. 4) Output short or ground fault has occurred. 5) Mechanical brake of the motor is operating too fast. 6) Components of the main circuit have overheated due to a faulty cooling fan. |
1) Increase Accel/Decel time. 2) Increase inverter capacity . 3) Operate after motor has stopped. 4) Check output wiring. 5) Check mechanical brake operation. 6) Check cooling fan. (Caution) Operating inverter prior to correcting fault may damage the IGBT. |
| Ground Current Protection |
1) Ground fault has occurred at the output wiring of inverter. 2) The insulation of the motor is damaged due to heat. |
1) Investigate the output wiring of inverter. 2) Exchange motor. |
| Over Voltage Protection |
1) Acceleration time is too short compared to the GD² of load. 2) Regenerative load at the output 3) Line voltage high |
1) Increase deceleration time. 2) Use regenerative resistor option. 3) Check line voltage. |
| Current Limit Protection (Overload Protection) |
1) Load is larger than the inverter rating. 2) Incorrect inverter capacity selected. 3) Set incorrect V/F pattern. |
1) Increase capacity of motor and inverter. 2) Select correct inverter capacity . 3) Select correct V/F pattern. |
| Fuse Damage | 1) Damaged due to over use of over current protection. 2) Damaged due to instant deceleration when motor is at an excessive excitation status. |
Exchange the fuse. (Caution) The IGBT receives damages on many occasions when Fuse Open Trip occurs. |
| Heat Sink Overheat |
1) Cooling fan damaged or an alien substance inserted. 2) Cooling system has faults. 3) Ambient temperature high. |
1) Exchange cooling fans and/or eliminate alien substance. 2) Check for alien substances in the heat sink. 3) Keep ambient temperature under 40 ℃ . |
| Electronic Thermal |
1) Motor has overheated. 2) Load is larger than inverter rating. 3) ETH level too low. 4) Incorrect inverter capacity selected. 5) Set incorrect V/F pattern. 6) Operated too long at low speeds. |
1) Reduce load and/or running duty . 2) Increase inverter capacity . 3) Adjust ETH level to an appropriate level. 4) Select correct inverter capacity . 5) Select correct V/F pattern. 6) Install a cooling fan with a separate power supply. |
| External fault A | External fault has occurred. | Eliminate fault at circuit connected to external fault terminal or cause of external fault input. |
| External fault B | External fault has occurred. | Eliminate fault at circuit connected to external fault terminal or cause of external fault input. |
| Low Voltage Protection |
1) Line voltage low. 2) Load larger than line capacity is connected to line. (welding machine, motor with high starting current connected to the commercial line) 3) Faulty magnetic switch at the input side of the inverter |
1) Check line voltage. 2) Increase line capacity . 3) Exchange magnetic switch. |
| Over Current 2 | 1) Short has occurred between the upper and lower IGBT. 2) Short has occurred at the output of the inverter. 3) Acceleration/Deceleration time is too short compared to the GD² of load. |
1) Check IGBT. 2) Check output wiring of inverter. 3) Increase acceleration time. |
| Output Phase Open |
1) Faulty contact of magnetic switch at output 2) Faulty output wiring |
1) Check magnetic switch at output of inverter. 2) Check output wiring. |
| Overspeed | 1) Encoder wiring error (A and B wiring switched) 2) Encoder parameter setting is incorrect. 3) Sub-B board or Encoder error |
1) Check for the wiring of inverter and encoder 2) Check for parameter setting ofEXT-14, 15, and 16. 3) Exchange inverter and encoder for a new one. |
| H/W Fault | 1) Wdog error (CPU fault) 2) EEP error (memory fault) |
Exchange inverter. |
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
184
| Protective Function |
Cause | Remedy |
| 3) ADC Offset(current feedback circuit fault) | ||
| Communication Fault |
1) Faulty connection between inverter and keypad 2) Inverter CPU malfunction |
1) Check connector. 2) Exchange inverter. |
| Operating Method when the Speed Reference is Lost |
LOP (Loss of reference from the Option), LOR (Remote) LOV (V1), LOI (I), LOX (Sub-V2, ENC) |
Eliminate cause of fault. |
| Inverter Overload |
1) Load is larger than inverter rating. 2) Incorrect inverter capacity selected. |
1) Increase motor and/or inverter capacity . 2) Select correct inverter capacity . |
| M/C Fail | M/C does not work properly. | Check the operating contact is closed after giving signal. |
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
185
8.3 Troubleshooting
| Condition | Check Point |
| The Motor Does Not Rotate. |
1) Main circuit inspection: ☞ Is the input (line) voltage normal? (Is the LED in the inverter is lit?) ☞ Is the motor connected correctly? 2) Input signal inspection: ☞ Check the operating signal input to the inverter. ☞ Check the forward and the reverse signal input simultaneously to the inverter? ☞ Check the command frequency signal input to the inverter. 3) Parameter setting inspection: ☞ Is the reverse prevention (FU1-03) function set? ☞ Is the operation mode (FU1-01) set correctly? ☞ Is the command frequency set to 0? 4) Load inspection: ☞ Is the load too large or is the motor jammed? (Mechanical brake) 5) Other: ☞ Is the alarm displayed on the keypad or is the alarm LED lit? (STOP LED blinks) |
| The Motor Rotates in Opposite Directions. |
☞ Is the phase sequence of the output terminal U, V, W correct? ☞ Is the starting signal (forward/reverse) connected correctly? |
| The Difference Between the Rotating Speed and the Reference is Too Large. |
☞ Is the frequency reference signal correct? (Check the level of the input signal) ☞ Is the following parameter setting is correct? Lower Limit Frequency (FU1-24), Upper Limit Frequency (FU1-25), Analog Frequency Gain (I/O-1~10) ☞ Is the input signal line influenced by external noise? (Use a shielded wire) |
| The Inverter Does Not Accelerate or Decelerate Smoothly. |
☞ Is the acceleration/deceleration time is set too short a period of time? ☞ Is the load too large? ☞ Is the Torque Boost (FU1-27, 28) value is too high that the current limit function and the stall prevention function do not operate? |
| The Motor Current is Too High. |
☞ Is the load too large? ☞ Is the Torque Boost Value (manual) too high? |
| The Rotating Speed Does Not Increase. |
☞ Is the Upper Limit Frequency (FU1-25) value correct? ☞ Is the load too large? ☞ Is the Torque Boost (FU1-27, 28) value too high that the stall prevention function (FU1-59, 60) does not operate? |
| The Rotating Speed Oscillates When the Inverter is Operating. |
1) Load inspection: ☞ Is the load oscillating? 2) Input signal inspection: ☞ Is the frequency reference signal oscillating? 3) Other: ☞ Is the wiring too long when the inverter is using V/F control? (over 500m) |
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
186
8.4 How to Check Power Components
Before checking the power components, be sure to disconnect AC Input supply and wait until the Main Electrolytic
Capacitors (DCP-DCN) discharge.
n Diode Module Check
| Check point | Resistance to be Good |
| R, S, T – P1 | 50 k ohms or more |
| R, S, T – N | 50 k ohms or more |
n Charge Resistor Check
| Check point | Resistance to be Good |
| Contactor terminals | Depending on model |
n DB (Dynamic Braking) IGBT (Option)
| Check point | Resistance to be Good |
| B2 - N | 50 k ohms or more |
| G - N | A few kilo ohms |
n IGBT Module Check
| Check point | Resistance to be Good |
| B2 - N | 50 k ohms or more |
| G - N | A few kilo ohms |
R
| G E G E |
G G |
G G |
| E | E | |
| G E B1 N B2 |
||
| Electrolytic capacitors |
| E | E |
S T
U V W
P1 P2
N Dynamic Braking Unit (Option) for 15~30HP models
Charge resistor
Contactor
+
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
187
8.5 Maintenance
The iS5 series is an industrial electronic product with advanced semiconductor elements. However, temperature,
humidity, vibration and aging parts may still affect it. To avoid this, it is recommended to perform routine inspections.
8.5.1 Precautions
n Be sure to remove the drive power input while performing maintenance.
n Be sure to perform maintenance only after checking that the bus has discharged. The bus capacitors in the
electronic circuit can still be charged even after the power is turned off.
n The correct output voltage can only be measured by using a rectifier voltage meter. Other voltage meters,
including digital voltage meters, are likely to display incorrect values caused by the high frequency PWM output
voltage of the drive.
8.5.2 Routine Inspection
Be sure to check the following before operation:
n The conditions of the installation location
n The conditions of the drive cooling
n Abnormal vibration
n Abnormal heating
8.5.3 Periodical Inspection
n Are there any loose bolt, nut or rust caused by surrounding conditions? If so, tighten them up or replace them.
n Are there any deposits inside the drive-cooling fan? If so, remove using air.
n Are there any deposits on the drive’s PCB (Printed Circuit Boards)? If so, remove using air.
n Are there any abnormalities in the various connectors of the drive’s PCB? If so, check the condition of the connector
in question.
n Check the rotating condition of the cooling fan, the size and condition of the capacitors and the connections with the
magnetic contactor. Replace them if there are any abnormalities.
8.5.4 Internal Fuse Replacement
When the internal fuse is opened the IGBT ’s should be checked thoroughly before replacing the fuse.
Contact the factory for replacement fuse information.
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
188
8.6 Daily and Periodic Inspection Items
| Period | Inspection Location |
Inspection Item |
Inspection | Inspection Method | Criterion | IMeasuring nstrument | |
| Daily | 1 year | 2 year | |||||
| Ambient Environ ment |
Is there any dust? Is the ambient temperature and humidity adequate? |
O | Refer to the precautions . | Temperature: -10~+40 no freezing. Humidity: Under 50% no dew |
Thermometer ,H ygrometer, Recorder |
All | |
| Equipment | Is there any abnormal oscillation or noise? | O | Use sight and hearing. | No abnormality | |||
| Input Voltage |
Is the input voltage of the main circuit normal? |
O | Measure the voltage between the terminals R, S, T. | Digital Meter/TMester ulti | |||
| All | Megger check (between the main circuit and the ground) Are any fixed parts removed? Are there any traces of overheating at each component’s cleaning? |
O OO | O | Undo the inverter connections short the terminals R, S, T, U, V, W and measure between these parts and the ground. Tighten the screws. Visual check. |
Over 5MΩ No fault |
DC 500V class Megger |
Main Circuit |
| Conductor/ Wire |
Is the conductor rusty? Is the wire coating damaged? |
OO | Visual check | No fault | |||
| Terminal | Is there any damage? | O | Visual check | No fault | |||
| IGBT Module /Diode Module |
Check the resistance between each of the terminals. |
O | Undo the inverter connection and measure the resistance between R, S, T ⇔ P, N and U, V, W ⇔ P, N with a tester. |
(Refer ‘How to Check Power Components”) |
Digital Multi Meter/Analog Tester |
||
| Smoothing Capacitor |
Is there any liquid coming out? Is the safety pin out, and is there any swelling? Measure the capacitance. |
O O | O | Visual check Measure with a capacitance measuring device. |
No fault Over 85% of the rated capacity |
Capacitance Measuring Device |
|
| Relay | Is there any chattering noise during operation? Is there any damage to the contact |
O O | Auditory check Visual check |
No fault | |||
| Resistor | Is there any damage to the resistor insulation? Is the wiring in the resistor damaged (open)? |
O O | Visual check Disconnect one of the connections and measure with a tester. |
No fault Error must be within ± 10% the displayed resistance. |
Digital Multi Meter/Analog Tester |
||
| Control Circuit ProtectiveCircuit |
Operation Check |
Is there any unbalance between each phases of the output voltage? Nothing must be wrong with display circuit after executing the sequence protective operation. |
O O | Measure the voltage between the output terminals U, Vand W. Short and open the inverter protective circuit output. |
The voltage balance between the phases for 200V (800V) class is under 4V (8V). The fault circuit operates according to the sequence. |
Digital Multi Meter/Rectifyi ng Voltmeter |
|
| Cooling System |
Cooling Fan |
Is there any abnormal oscillation or noise? Is the connection area loose? |
O | O | Turn OFF the power and turn the fan by hand. Tighten the connections. |
Must rotate smoothly. No fault |
|
| Display | Meter | Is the displayed value correct? | O | O | Check the meter reading at the exterior of the panel. |
Check the specified and management values . |
Voltmeter/ Ammeter etc. |
| All | Are there any abnormal vibrations or noise? Is there any unusual odor? |
OO | Auditory , sensory, visual check. Check for overheat and damage. |
No fault | Motor | ||
| Insulation Resistor |
Megger check (between the output terminals and the ground terminal) |
O | Undo the U, Vand W connections and tie the motor wiring. |
Over 5MΩ | 500V class Megger |
☞ Note: Values in ( ) is for the 400V class inverters.
189
APPENDIX A - FUNCTIONS BASED ON USE
Set the function properly according to the load and operating conditions. Application and related functions are listed in
the following table.
| Use | Related Parameter Code |
| Accel/Decel Time, Pattern Adjustment | DRV-01 [Acceleration Time], DRV-02 [Deceleration Time], FU1-05 [Acceleration Pattern], FU1-06 [Deceleration Pattern] |
| Reverse Rotation Prevention | FU1-03 [Forward, Reverse Prevention] |
| Minimum Accel/Decel Time | FU1-05 [Acceleration Pattern], FU1-06 [Deceleration Pattern] |
| Accel/Decel at Continuous Rating Range | FU1-05 [Acceleration Pattern], FU1-06 [Deceleration Pattern] |
| Braking Operation Adjustment | FU1-07 [Stop Method], FU1-08~11 [DC Braking], FU1-12~13 [DC braking at start] |
| Operations for Frequencies Over 60 Hz | FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency], FU1-25 [Frequency Upper Limit], I/O-05 [Frequency Corresponding to Max. Voltage of V1], I/O-10 [Frequency Corresponding to Max. Current of I] |
| Selecting an Appropriate Output Characteristics for the Load |
FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency], FU1-21 [Base Frequency] |
| Motor Output Torque Adjustment | FU1-22 [Starting Frequency], FU1-26~28 [Torque Boost], FU1-59~60 [Stall Prevention], FU2-30 [Rated Motor] |
| Output Frequency Limit | FU1-23~25 [Frequency Upper/Lower Limit], I/O-01~10 [Analog Frequency Setting] |
| Motor Overheat Protection | FU1-50~53 [Electronic Thermal], FU2-30 [Rated Motor] |
| Multi Step Operation | I/O-12~14 [Define the Multi Function Input Terminals], I/O-20~27 [Jog, Multi Step Frequency], FU1-23~25 [Frequency Upper/Lower Limit] |
| Jog Operation | I/O-20 [Jog Frequency] |
| Frequency Jump Operation | FU2-10~16 [Frequency Jump] |
| Timing the Electronic Brake Operation | I/O-42~43 [Frequency Detection Level], I/O-44 [Multi Function Output] |
| Displaying the Rotating Speed | DRV-04 [Motor Speed], FU2-74 [Motor RPM Display Gain] |
| Function Alteration Prevention | FU2-94 [Parameter Lock] |
| Energy Saving | FU1-39 [Energy Saving] |
| Auto Restart Operation After Alarm Stop | FU2-27~28 [Auto Retry] |
| 2nd Motor Operation | FU2-81~90 [2nd Function] |
| PID Feedback Operation | FU2-50~54 [PID Operation] |
| Frequency Reference Signal and Output Adjusting |
I/O-01~10 [Analog Frequency Setting] |
| Define the Multi-Function Input Terminals | I/O-12~14 [Define the Multi-Function Input Terminals] |
| Define the Multi-Function Input Terminals | I/O-44 [Multi Function Auxiliary Contact Output Setting] |
| Commercial Line ⇔ inverter Switchover Operation |
I/O-12~14 [Define the Multi-Function Input Terminals], I/O-44 [Multi-Function Auxiliary Contact Output Setting] |
| Frequency Meter Calibration | I/O-40~41 [FM Output] |
| Operate by Communicating with a Computer | I/O-46 [Inverter No.], I/O-47 [communication Speed], I/O-48~49 [Loss of Reference] |
190
APPENDIX B - PARAMETERS BASED ON APPLICATION
| Application | Parameter Code |
| DRV Group | |
| When you want to change the frequency setting | DRV-00 |
| When you want to change the acceleration and deceleration time of the motor | DRV-01, DRV-02 |
| When you want to change the run/stop method | DRV-03 |
| When you want to change the frequency reference source | DRV-04 |
| When you want to set the multi-function | DRV-005 ~ 07 |
| When you want to see the output current, motor speed and the DC link voltage of inverter | DRV-08 ~ 10 |
| When you want to see the output voltage, output power, output torque from the user display | DRV-11 |
| When you want to check the fault of the inverter | DRV-12 |
| FU1 Group | |
| When you want to use the Jump Code | FU1-00 |
| When you want to prevent the motor from rotating at opposite directions | FU1-03 |
| When you want to select the acceleration and deceleration pattern suitable for your application | FU1-05 ~ 06 |
| When you want to change the stopping method | FU1-07 |
| When you want to change the stopping accuracy for steady stop | FU1-08 ~ 11 |
| When DC injection braking is required before starting | FU1-12 ~ 13 |
| When you want to set the maximum frequency and the base frequency according to the rated torque of the motor |
FU1-20 ~ 21 |
| When you want to adjust the starting frequency | FU1-22 |
| When you want to limit the mechanical rotating speed to a fixed value | FU1-23 ~ 25 |
| When a large starting torque is needed for loads such as elevators (Manual/Auto Torque Boost) | FU1-26 ~ 28 |
| When you want to select an appropriate output characteristic (V/F characteristic) according to loads | FU1-29 |
| When you want to se up your own V/F pattern | FU1-30 ~ 37 |
| When you want to adjust the output voltage of the inverter | FU1-38 |
| When you want to use the energy saving function | FU1-39 |
| When you want to protect the motor from overheating | FU1-50 ~ 53 |
| When you want to output a signal when the overload condition lasts more than a fixed amount of time | FU1-54 ~ 55 |
| When you want to cut off the output when the overload condition lasts more than a fixed amount of time | FU1-56 ~ 58 |
| When you want to set the stall prevention function | FU1-59 ~ 60 |
| FU2 Group | |
| When you want to check the fault history of the inverter | FU2-01 ~ 06 |
| When you want to use dwell function | FU2-07 ~ 08 |
| When you want to prevent the resonance from the oscillating characteristics of a machine | FU2-10 ~ 16 |
| When you want to protect inverter from input/output phase loss | FU2-19 |
| When you want to start the inverter as soon as the power is turned ON | FU2-20 |
| When you want to restart the inverter by resetting the fault when a fault occur | FU2-21 |
| When you want to use the instantpower failure restart function (Speed Search) | FU2-22 ~ 25 |
| When you want to use the retry function | FU2-26 ~ 27 |
| When you want to enter the motor constants | FU2-30 ~ 37 |
| When you want to reduce noise or leakage current by changing the PWM carrier frequency | FU2-39 |
| When you want to change the control method (V/F, slip compensation, PID, or sensorless operation) | FU2-40 |
| When you want to use the auto tuning function | FU2-41 ~ 44 |
| When you want to operate using PID feedback | FU2-50 ~ 54 |
| When you want to change the reference frequency for acceleration and deceleration | FU2-70 |
191
| Application | Parameter Code |
| When you want to change the acceleration and deceleration time scale | FU2-71 |
| When you want to set the initial keypad display that is displayed when the power is turned ON | FU2-72 |
| When you want to set the user defined display | FU2-73 |
| When you want to adjust the gain for the motor RPM display | FU2-74 |
| When you want to set the dynamic braking (DB) resistor mode | FU2-75 ~ 76 |
| When you want to verify the inverter software version | FU2-79 |
| When you want to change the connection from one motor to the other motor which use difference parameters | FU2-81 ~ 90 |
| When you want to copy the inverter parameter to another inverter | FU2-91 ~ 92 |
| When you want to initialize the parameters | FU2-93 |
| When you want to prevent the parameters from being changed | FU2-94 |
| I/O Group | |
| When you want to set the analog voltage or current for the frequency reference | I/O-01 ~ 10 |
| When you want to set the operating method when the frequency reference is lost | I/O-11 |
| When you want to change the functions for the input terminals P1, P2, and P3 | I/O-12 ~ 14 |
| When you want to check the status of the input/output terminals | I/O-15 ~ 16 |
| When you want to change the response time of the input terminals | I/O-17 |
| When you want to use the JOG and multi step speed operation | I/O-20 ~ 24 |
| When you want to change the 1st ~ 7th acceleration/deceleration time | I/O-25 ~ 38 |
| When you want to use the FM meter terminal output | I/O-40 ~ 41 |
| When you want to set the frequency detection level | I/O-42 ~ 43 |
| When you want to change the functions of the multi function auxiliary contact output(AXA-AXC) | I/O-44 |
| When you want to exchange the motor to commercial power line from inverter or the opposite | I/O-44 |
| When you want to use the fault relay (30A, 30B, 30C) functions | I/O-45 |
| When you want to use RS232/485 communication | I/O-46 ~ 47 |
| When you want to set the operating method when the frequency reference is lost | I/O-48 ~ 49 |
| When you want to use the auto (sequence) operation | I/O-50 ~ 84 |
| EXT Group (When a Sub-board and/or an option board is installed) | |
| When you want to define the functions for the input terminals P4, P5, P6 (SUB-A, SUB-C) | EXT-02 ~ 04 |
| When you want to use the analog voltage (V2) input(SUB-A, SUB-C) | EXT-05 ~ 10 |
| When you want to use the encoder pulse for feedback to control the motor speed, or use the pulse input for frequency reference (SUB-B) |
EXT-14 ~ 24 |
| When you want to change the functions of the output terminals Q1, Q2, Q3 (SUB-A, SUB-C) | EXT-30 ~ 32 |
| When you want to use the LM meter terminal output(SUB-A, SUB-C) | EXT-34 ~ 35 |
| When you want to use the analog outputs (AM1, AM2 terminals) | EXT-40 ~ 43 |
192
APPENDIX C- PERIPHERAL DEVICES
| Inverter Models |
Wire, mm2 (AWG) | Motor [HP] |
MCCB, ELB | Magnetic Contactor |
AC Input Fuse |
AC Reactor | DC Reactor | ||
| R, S, T | U, V, W | Ground | |||||||
| SV008iS5-2 | 1 | ABS33b, EBS33 | GMC-12 | 2 (14) | 2 (14) | 3.5 (12) | 10 A | 2.13 mH, 5.7 A | 7.00 mH, 5.4 A |
| SV015iS5-2 | 2 | ABS33b, EBS33 | GMC-12 | 2 (14) | 2 (14) | 3.5 (12) | 15 A | 1.20 mH, 10 A | 4.05 mH, 9.2 A |
| SV022iS5-2 | 3 | ABS33b, EBS33 | GMC-18 | 2 (14) | 2 (14) | 3.5 (12) | 25 A | 0.88 mH, 14 A | 2.92 mH, 13 A |
| SV037iS5-2 | 5 | ABS33b, EBS33 | GMC-22 | 3.5 (12) | 3.5 (12) | 3.5 (12) | 40 A | 0.56 mH, 20 A | 1.98 mH, 19 A |
| SV055iS5-2 | 7.5 | ABS53b, EBS53 | GMC-22 | 5.5 (10) | 5.5 (10) | 5.5 (10) | 40 A | 0.39 mH, 30 A | 1.37 mH, 29 A |
| SV075iS5-2 | 10 | ABS103b, EBS103 | GMC-32 | 8 (8) | 8 (8) | 5.5 (10) | 50 A | 0.28 mH, 40 A | 1.05 mH, 38 A |
| SV110iS5-2 | 15 | ABS103b, EBS103 | GMC-50 | 14 (6) | 14 (6) | 14 (6) | 70 A | 0.20 mH, 59 A | 0.74 mH, 56 A |
| SV150iS5-2 | 20 | ABS203b, EBS203 | GMC-65 | 22 (4) | 22 (4) | 14 (6) | 100 A | 0.15 mH, 75 A | 0.57 mH, 71 A |
| SV185iS5-2 | 25 | ABS203b, EBS203 | GMC-85 | 30 (3) | 30 (3) | 22 (4) | 100 A | 0.12 mH, 96 A | 0.49 mH, 91 A |
| SV220iS5-2 | 30 | ABS203b, EBS203 | GMC-100 | 38(2) | 30 (3) | 22 (4) | 125 A | 0.10 mH, 112 A | 0.42 mH, 107 A |
| SV300iS5-2 | 40 | ABS203b, EBS203 | GMC-150 | 60(2/0) | 60(2/0) | 22 (4) | 190 A | 0.07 mH, 160 A | 0.34 mH, 152 A |
| SV370iS5-2 | 50 | ABS203b, EBS203 | GMC-150 | 60(2/0) | 60(2/0) | 22 (4) | 220 A | 0.06 mH, 191 A | 0.29 mH, 181 A |
| SV450iS5-2 | 60 | ABS403b, EBS403 | GMC-180 | 100(4/0) | 100(4/0) | 38 (2) | 270 A | 0.05 mH, 223 A | 0.29 mH, 233 A |
| SV550iS5-2 | 75 | ABS403b, EBS403 | GMC-180 | 100(4/0) | 100(4/0) | 38 (2) | 330 A | 0.04 mH, 285 A | 0.25 mH, 270 A |
| SV008iS5-4 | 1 | ABS33b, EBS33 | GMC-12 | 2 (14) | 2 (14) | 2 (14) | 6 A | 8.63 mH, 2.8 A | 28.62 mH, 2.7 A |
| SV015iS5-4 | 2 | ABS33b, EBS33 | GMC-12 | 2 (14) | 2 (14) | 2 (14) | 10 A | 4.81 mH, 4.8 A | 16.14 mH, 4.6 A |
| SV022iS5-4 | 3 | ABS33b, EBS33 | GMC-22 | 2 (14) | 2 (14) | 2 (14) | 10 A | 3.23 mH, 7.5 A | 11.66 mH, 7.1 A |
| SV037iS5-4 | 5 | ABS33b, EBS33 | GMC-22 | 2 (14) | 2 (14) | 2 (14) | 20 A | 2.34 mH, 10 A | 7.83 mH, 10 A |
| SV055iS5-4 | 7.5 | ABS33b, EBS33 | GMC-22 | 3.5 (12) | 2 (14) | 3.5 (12) | 20 A | 1.22 mH, 15 A | 5.34 mH, 14 A |
| SV075iS5-4 | 10 | ABS33b, EBS33 | GMC-22 | 3.5 (12) | 3.5 (12) | 3.5 (12) | 30 A | 1.14 mH, 20 A | 4.04 mH, 19 A |
| SV110iS5-4 | 15 | ABS53b, EBS53 | GMC-22 | 5.5 (10) | 5.5 (10) | 8 (8) | 35 A | 0.81 mH, 30 A | 2.76 mH, 29 A |
| SV150iS5-4 | 20 | ABS103b, EBS103 | GMC-25 | 14 (6) | 8 (8) | 8 (8) | 45 A | 0.61 mH, 38 A | 2.18 mH, 36 A |
| SV185iS5-4 | 25 | ABS103b, EBS103 | GMC-40 | 14 (6) | 8 (8) | 14 (6) | 60 A | 0.45 mH, 50 A | 1.79 mH, 48 A |
| SV220iS5-4 | 30 | ABS103b, EBS103 | GMC-50 | 22 (4) | 14 (6) | 14 (6) | 70 A | 0.39 mH, 58 A | 1.54 mH, 55 A |
| SV300iS5-4 | 40 | ABS203b, EBS203 | GMC-65 | 22 (4) | 22 (4) | 14 (6) | 90 A | 0.287mH, 80A | 1.191mH, 76A |
| SV370iS5-4 | 50 | ABS203b, EBS203 | GMC-85 | 22 (4) | 22 (4) | 14 (6) | 110 A | 0.232mH, 98A | 0.975mH, 93A |
| SV450iS5-4 | 60 | ABS203b, EBS203 | GMC-100 | 38(2) | 38(2) | 22 (4) | 140 A | 0.195mH, 118A | 0.886mH, 112A |
| SV550iS5-4 | 75 | ABS203b, EBS203 | GMC-125 | 38(2) | 38(2) | 22 (4) | 170 A | 0.157mH, 142A | 0.753mH, 135A |
| SV750iS5-4 | 100 | ABS403a, EBS403 | GMC-150 | 60(2/0) | 60(2/0) | 22 (4) | 230 A | 0.122mH, 196A | 0.436mH, 187A |
193
SHORT CIRCUIT FUSE/BREAKER MARKING
Use Class H or K5 UL Listed Input Fuse and UL Listed Breaker Only. See the table below for the
Voltage and Current rating of the fuses and the breakers.
| External Fuse | Breaker | Internal Fuse | Input Voltage |
Motor [kW] |
Inverter | |||||
| Current [A] |
Voltage [V] |
Current [A] |
Voltage [V] |
Current [A] |
Voltage [V] |
Maker | Number Model | |||
| 0.75 | SV008 iS5-2 |
10 | 500 | 30 | 220 | 10 | 600 | Hin Elec ode | 660CF10 | 200V CLASS |
| 1.5 | SV015 iS5-2 |
15 | 500 | 30 | 220 | 15 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 660CF15 | |
| 2.2 | SV022 iS5-2 |
25 | 500 | 30 | 220 | 20 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 660CF20 | |
| 3.7 | SV037 iS5-2 |
40 | 500 | 30 | 220 | 30 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 660CF30 | |
| 5.5 | SV055 iS5-2 |
40 | 500 | 50 | 220 | 60 | 250 | Hinode Elec | 250FH-60 | |
| 7.5 | SV075 iS5-2 |
50 | 500 | 60 | 220 | 60 | 250 | Hinode Elec | 250FH-60 | |
| 11 | SV110 iS5-2 |
70 | 500 | 100 | 220 | 125 | 250 | Hinode Elec | 250GH-125 | |
| 15 | SV150 iS5-2 |
100 | 500 | 100 | 220 | 150 | 250 | Hinode Elec | 250GH-150 | |
| 18.5 | SV185 iS5-2 |
100 | 500 | 225 | 220 | 175 | 250 | Hinode Elec | 250GH-175 | |
| 22 | SV220 iS5-2 |
125 | 500 | 225 | 220 | 225 | 250 | Hinode Elec | 250GH-225 | |
| 30 | SV300 iS5-2 |
150 | 500 | 225 | 220 | 250 | 250 | Hinode Elec | 250SUL 250GH- | |
| 37 | SV370 iS5-2 |
220 | 500 | 225 | 220 | 250 | 250 | Hinode Elec | 250SUL 250GH- | |
| 45 | SV450 iS5-2 |
270 | 500 | 300 | 220 | 350 | 250 | Hinode Elec | 350SUL 250GH- | |
| 55 | SV550 iS5-2 |
330 | 500 | 350 | 220 | 350 | 250 | Hinode Elec | 350SUL 250GH- | |
| 0.75 | SV008 iS5-4 |
10 | 500 | 30 | 460 | 10 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 660CF10 | 400V CLASS |
| 1.5 | SV015 iS5-4 |
10 | 500 | 30 | 460 | 10 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 660CF10 | |
| 2.2 | SV022 iS5-4 |
15 | 500 | 30 | 460 | 15 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 660CF15 | |
| 3.7 | SV037 iS5-4 |
20 | 500 | 30 | 460 | 15 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 660CF15 | |
| 5.5 | SV055 iS5-4 |
20 | 500 | 30 | 460 | 35 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 660GH-35 | |
| 7.5 | SV075 iS5-4 |
30 | 500 | 30 | 460 | 35 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 660GH-35 | |
| 11 | SV110 iS5-4 |
35 | 500 | 50 | 460 | 63 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 660GH-63 | |
| 15 | SV150 iS5-4 |
45 | 500 | 60 | 460 | 80 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 660GH-80 | |
| 18.5 | SV185 iS5-4 |
60 | 500 | 100 | 460 | 100 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 660GH-100 | |
| 22 | SV220 iS5-4 |
70 | 500 | 100 | 460 | 125 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 660GH-125 | |
| 30 | SV300 iS5-4 |
100 | 500 | 100 | 460 | 125 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 600FH-125S | |
| 37 | SV370 iS5-4 |
100 | 500 | 225 | 460 | 150 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 600FH-150S | |
| 45 | SV450 iS5-4 |
100 | 500 | 225 | 460 | 200 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 600FH-200S | |
| 55 | SV550 iS5-4 |
150 | 500 | 225 | 460 | 200 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 600FH-200S | |
| 75 | SV750 iS5-4 |
200 | 500 | 225 | 460 | 125 | 600 | Hinode Elec | 600FH-125S |
194
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Council Directive(s) to which conformity is declared:
CD 73/23/EEC and CD 89/336/EEC
Units are certified for compliance with:
EN 61800-3/A11 (2000)
EN 61000-4-2/A2 (2001)
EN 61000-4-3/A2 (2001)
EN 61000-4-4/A2 (2001)
EN 61000-4-5/A1 (2001)
EN 61000-4-6/A1 (2001)
EN 55011/A2 (2002)
EN 50178 (1997)
IEC/TR 61000-2-1 (1990)
EN 61000-2-2 (2002)
EN 61000-2-4 (1994)
EN 60146-1-1/A1 (1997)
Type of Equipment: Inverter (Power Conversion Equipment)
Model Name: SV - iS5 Series
Trade Mark: LG Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.
| Representative: Address: |
LG International (Deutschland) GmbH Lyoner Strasse 15, Frankfurt am Main, 60528, Germany |
| Manufacturer: Address: |
LG Industrial Systems Co., Ltd. 181, Samsung-ri, Mokchon-Eup, Chonan, Chungnam, 330-845, Korea |
We, the undersigned, hereby declare that equipment specified above conforms to the Directives and Standards
mentioned.
| Place: | Frankfurt am Main Germany |
Chonan, Chungnam, Korea |
Mr. Ik-Seong Yang / Dept. Manager Mr. Jin Goo Song / General Manager
(Full name / Position) (Full name / Position)
(Signature/Date)
2002/11/26
195
TECHNICAL STANDARDS APPLIED
The standards applied in order to comply with the essential requirements of the Directives 73/23/CEE "Electrical material intended
to be used with certain limits of voltage" and 89/336/CEE "Electromagnetic Compatibility" are the following ones:
•EN 50178 (1997) “Electronic equipment for use in power installations”.
• EN 61800-3/A11 (2000) “Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC product standard
including specific methods”
• EN 55011/A2 (2002) “Industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio-frequency equipment. Radio disturbances
characteristics. Limits and methods of measurement”
• EN 61000-4-2/A2 (2001) “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques.
Section 2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test.
• EN 61000-4-3/A2 (2001) “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques.
Section 3: Radiated, radiofrequency, electromagnetic field immunity test.
• EN 61000-4-4/A2 (2001) “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques.
Section 4: Electrical fast transients / burst immunity test.
• EN 61000-4-5/A1 (2000) “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques.
Section 5: Surge immunity test.
• EN 61000-4-6/A1 (2001) “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques.
Section 6: Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields.
• CEI/TR 61000-2-1 (1990) “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 2: Environment. Environment description for
low-frequency conducted disturbances and signalling in public low voltages supply
systems”
• EN 61000-2-2 (2002)
(<22Kw)
“Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 2: Environment. Compatibility level for lowfrequency conducted disturbances and signalling in public low voltages supply
systems”
• EN 61000-2-4 (1997)
(>22Kw)
“Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 2: Environment. Compatibility level in
industrial plants for low-frequency conducted disturbances”
• EN 60146-1-1/A1 (1997)
(>22Kw)
“Semiconductor converters. General requirements and line commutated converters. Part
1-1: Specifications of basic requirements”
EMI / RFI POWER LINE FILTERS
196
RFI FILTERS
THE L.G. RANGE OF POWER LINE FILTERS FF (Footprint) – FE (Standard) SERIES, HAVE BEEN SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED WITH HIGH
FREQUENCY LG INVERTERS, THE USE L.G. FILTERS, WITH THE INSTALLATION ADVICE OVERLEAF HELP TO ENSURE TROUBLE
FREE USE ALONG SIDE SENSITIVE DEVICES AND COMPLIANCE TO CONDUCTED EMISSION AND IMMUNITY STANDARDS TO
EN50081 -> EN 61000-6-3:02 and EN 61000-6-1:02
CAUTION
IN CASE OF A LEAKAGE CURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES IS USED ON POWER SUPPLY, IT MAY BE FAULT AT POWER-ON OR OFF.
IN AVOID THIS CASE, THE SENSE CURRENT OF PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHOULD BE LARGER THAN VALUE OF LAKAGE CURRENT AT
WORST CASE IN THE BELOW TABLE.
RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
To conform to the EMC directive, it is necessary that these instructions be followed as closely as possible. Follow the usual safety
procedures when working with electrical equipment. All electrical connections to the filter, inverter and motor must be made by a
qualified electrical technician.
1-) Check the filter rating label to ensure that the current, voltage rating and part number are correct.
2-) For best results the filter should be fitted as closely as possible to the incoming mains supply of the wiring enclosure, usually directly after the
enclosures circuit breaker or supply switch.
3-) The back panel of the wiring cabinet of board should be prepared for the mounting dimensions of the filter. Care should be taken to remove
any paint etc... from the mounting holes and face area of the panel to ensure the best possible earthing of the filter.
4-) Mount the filter securely.
5-) Connect the mains supply to the filter terminals marked LINE, connect any earth cables to the earth stud provided. Connect the filter
terminals marked LOAD to the mains input of the inverter using short lengths of appropriate gauge cable.
6-) Connect the motor and fit the ferrite core (output chokes) as close to the inverter as possible. Armoured or screened cable should be used
with the 3 phase conductors only threaded twice through the center of the ferrite core. The earth conductor should be securely earthed at both
inverter and motor ends. The screen should be connected to the enclosure body via and earthed cable gland.
7-) Connect any control cables as instructed in the inverter instructions manual.
IT IS IMPORTANT THAT ALL LEAD LENGHTS ARE KEPT AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND THAT INCOMING MAINS AND
OUTGOING MOTOR CABLES ARE KEPT WELL SEPARATED.
EMI / RFI POWER LINE FILTERS
197
RFI Filters (Footprint - Standard) for iS5 SERIES
(x) (1) Industrial environment EN 50081-0 (A class) -> EN 61000-6-4:02
(2) Domestic and industrial environment EN 50081-1 (B class) -> EN 61000-6-3:02
iS5 series / Filtros Footprint / Footprint Filters
VARIADOR
INVERTER
POT.
POWER
CODIGO
CODE
INTENS.
CURRENT
TENSION
VOLTAGE
CORRIENTE
DE FUGAS
LEAKAGE
CURRENT
DIMENSIONES
DIMENSIONS
L W H
MONTAJE
MOUNTING
Y X
PESO
WEIGHT
TORNILLOS
DE FIJACION
MOUNT
CHOQUES
DE SALIDA
OUTPUT
CHOKES
| TRIFASICOS SV008iS5-2 |
THREE PHASE 0.8kW |
NOM. MAX.
| SV015iS5-2 SV022iS5-2 SV037iS5-2 SV055iS5-2 SV075iS5-2 SV110iS5-2 SV150iS5-2 SV185iS5-2 SV220iS5-2 |
1.5kW |
| 2.2kW 3.7kW FFS5-T020-(x) 5.5kW FFS5-T030-(x) 7.5kW FFS5-T050-(x) 11kW |
|
| 15kW | |
| 18kW | |
| 22kW |
| FFS5-T012-(x) | 12A | 250VAC | 0.3A 18A | 329 x 149.5 x 50 | 315 x 120 | M5 | FS – 2 |
20A
| 250VAC 250VAC 250VAC |
0.3A 18A 329 x 149.5 x 50 0.3A 18A 415 x 199.5 x 60 0.3A 18A 415 x 199.5 x 60 |
315 x 120 401 x 160 401 x 160 |
M5 FS – 2
30A M5 FS – 2
50A M5 FS – 2
| 100A | 250VAC | 0.3A 18A | FS – 3 |
120A 250VAC 0.3A 18A FS – 3
| SV008iS5-4 SV015iS5-4 SV022iS5-4 SV037iS5-4 |
0.8kW |
| 1.5kW | |
| 2.2kW | |
| 3.7kW FFS5-T012-(x) 12A 380VAC 0.5A 27A 329 x 149.5 x 50 315 x 120 M5 FS – 2 |
| FFS5-T006-(x) | 6A | 380VAC | 0.5A 27A | 329 x 149.5 x 50 | 315 x 120 | M5 | FS – 1 |
| SV055iS5-4 SV075iS5-4 SV110iS5-4 SV150iS5-4 SV185iS5-4 SV220iS5-4 |
5.5kW | ||||
| 7.5kW | |||||
| 11kW FFS5-T051-(x) 51A 380VAC 0.5A 27A 466 x 258 x 65 440.5 x 181 |
M8 | FS – 2 | |||
| 15kW 18kW FFS5-T060-(x) 22kW FFS5-T070-(x) |
|||||
| 60A 70A |
380VAC 380VAC |
0.5A 27A 541 x 332 x 65 0.5A 27A 541 x 332 x 65 |
515.5 x 255 515.5 x 255 |
M8 M8 |
FS – 2 FS – 2 |
| FFS5-T030-(x) | 30A | 380VAC | 0.5A 27A | 415 x 199.5 x 60 | 401 x 160 | M5 | FS – 2 |
iS5 series / Filtros Estándar / Standard Filters
VARIADOR
INVERTER
POT.
POWER
CODIGO
CODE
INTENS.
CURRENT
TENSION
VOLTAGE
CORRIENTE
DE FUGAS
LEAKAGE
CURRENT
DIMENSIONES
DIMENSIONS
L W H
MONTAJE
MOUNTING
Y X
PESO
WEIGHT
TORNILLOS
DE FIJACION
MOUNT
CHOQUES
DE SALIDA
OUTPUT
CHOKES
| TRIFASICOS THREE PHASE | NOM. MAX. | ||
| SV008iS5-2 SV015iS5-2 SV022iS5-2 SV037iS5-2 SV055iS5-2 SV075iS5-2 SV110iS5-2 SV150iS5-2 SV185iS5-2 SV220iS5-2 |
0.8kW | ||
| 1.5kW | |||
| 2.2kW 3.7kW FE-T020-( x ) |
0.3A 18A 270 x 140 x 60 0.3A 18A 270 x 140 x 60 0.3A 18A 270 x 140 x 90 |
||
| 20A 30A 50A |
250VAC 250VAC 250VAC |
258 x 106 258 x 106 258 x 106 |
|
| 15kW | |||
| 18kW FE-T120-( x ) 120A 250VAC 1.3A 180A 420 x 200 x 130 |
408 x 166 | --- | FS – 3 |
| 22kW |
| FE-T012-( x ) | 12A | 250VAC | 0.3A 18A | 250 x 110 x60 | 238 x 76 | --- | FS – 2 |
--- FS – 2
5.5kW FE-T030-( x ) --- FS – 2
7.5kW FE-T050-( x ) --- FS – 2
11kW
| FE-T100-( x ) | 100A | 250VAC | 0.3A 18A | 420 x 200 x 130 | 408 x 166 | --- | FS – 3 |
| SV008iS5-4 SV015iS5-4 SV022iS5-4 SV037iS5-4 |
0.8kW |
| 1.5kW | |
| 2.2kW | |
| 3.7kW FE-T012-( x ) 12A 380 VAC 0.5A 27A 250 x 110 x 60 238 x 76 --- FS – 2 |
| FE-T006-( x ) | 6A | 380 VAC | 0.5A 27A | 250 x 110 x 60 | 238 x 76 | --- | FS – 2 |
| SV055iS5-4 SV075iS5-4 SV110iS5-4 SV150iS5-4 SV185iS5-4 SV220iS5-4 |
5.5kW | ||||
| 7.5kW | |||||
| 11kW FE-T050-( x ) 50A 380VAC 0.5A 27A 270 x 140 x 90 |
258 x 106 | --- | FS – 2 | ||
| 15kW | |||||
| 60A 70A |
380VAC 380VAC |
0.5A 27A 270 x 140 x 90 0.5A 27A 350 x 180 x 90 |
258 x 106 338 x 146 |
--- --- |
FS – 2 FS – 2 |
| FE-T030-( x ) | 30A | 380 VAC | 0.5A 27A | 270 x 140 x 60 | 258 x 106 | --- | FS – 2 |
18kW FE-T060-( x ) 22kW FE-T070-( x )
EMI / RFI POWER LINE FILTERS
198
DIMENSIONS
Polígono Industrial de Palou
08400 Granollers (Barcelona)
SPAIN / ESPAÑA
Tel: +34 93 861 14 60
Fax: +34 93 879 26 64
E-mail: info@lifasa.com
vsd@lifasa.es
http: //www.lifasa.com
| TIPO | D | W | H | X | O |
| FS – 1 | 21 | 85 | 46 | 70 | 5 |
| FS – 2 | 28.5 | 105 | 62 | 90 | 5 |
| FS – 3 | 48 | 150 | 110 | 125 x 30 | 5 |
| FS – 4 | 58 | 200 | 170 | 180 x 45 | 5 |
RFI Filters (Standard) iS5 SERIES
| iS5 series / Filtros Estándar / Standard Filters | ||||||||||
| VARIADOR INVERTER |
POT. POWER |
CODIGO CODE |
INTENS. CURRENT |
TENSION VOLTAGE |
CORRIENTE DE FUGAS LEAKAGE CURRENT |
DIMENSIONES DIMENSIONS L W H |
MONTAJE MOUNTING Y X |
PESO WEIGHT |
TORNILLOS DE FIJACION MOUNT |
CHOQUES DE SALIDA OUTPUT CHOKES |
| TRIFASICOS THREE PHASE NOM. MAX. | ||||||||||
| SV300iS5-2 | 30kW | FE-T150-2 | 150A | 250VAC | 1.3mA 150mA | 480 x 200 x 160 | 468 x 166 | --- | FS – 3 | |
| SV370iS5-2 | 37kW | FE-T170-2 | 170A | 250VAC | 1.3mA 150mA | 480 x 200 x 160 | 468 x 166 | --- | FS – 3 | |
| SV450iS5-2 | 45kW | FE-T230-2 | 230A | 250VAC | 1.3mA 150mA | 580 x 250 x 205 | 560 x 170 | --- | FS – 4 | |
| SV550iS5-2 | 55kW | FE-T280-2 | 280A | 250VAC | 1.3mA 150mA | 580 x 250 x 205 | 560 x 170 | --- | FS – 4 | |
| SV300iS5-4 | 30kW | FE-T070-2 | 70A | 380VAC | 1.3mA 150mA | 350 x 180 x 90 | 338 x 146 | --- | FS – 3 | |
| SV370iS5-4 | 37kW | FE-T100-2 | 100A | 380VAC | 1.3mA 150mA | 425 x 200 x 130 | 408 x 166 | --- | FS – 3 | |
| SV450iS5-4 | 45kW | FE-T120-2 | 120A | 380VAC | 1.3mA 150mA | 425 x 200 x 130 | 408 x 166 | --- | FS – 3 | |
| SV750iS5-4 | 75kW | FE-T170-2 | 170A | 380VAC | 1.3mA 150mA | 480 x 200 x 160 | 468 x 166 | --- | FS – 3 |
SV550iS5-4 55kW
199
Revisions
| Publishing date | Changes to be made | S/W Version | Note | |
| 1 | Feb, 1999 | 1.00 | ||
| 2 | April, 2000 | 1.03 | ||
| 3 | March, 2001 | 1.05 | ||
| 4 | July, 2001 | 1.06 | ||
| 5 | May, 2002 | 1.07 | ||
| 6 | June, 2002 | 2.00 | ||
| 7 | Dec, 2002 | 2.01 | ||
| 8 | Jan, 2003 | Chapter 7. DB Unit, Appendix C |
2.01 | Models and description added. Peripheral devices added or changed. |
| 9 | April, 2003 | Sub-D board excluded |
2.01 | Sub-D not available. |
| 10 | July, 2003 | Declaration of Conformity (DOC) |
2.01 | CE models units ranging from 30kW to 75kW added to DOC. |
| 11 | Jan., 2004 | 2.01 | 1) Page 178, Group 3 DBU dimension revised 2) Page 192~195, DOC revised 3) Page 138, EXT -12 description revised 4) Page 122, [Exchange] diagram, AXBà AXC revised 5) Page 131, 132, CLOEDà CLOSED 6) Page 149, APP-24 7-segment display 23à24 7) Page 153, DB Unit, 15~30HPà 15~100HP 8) Page 181, MC Fail and Overspeed protection added |
|
| 12 | April, 2004 | S/W Update | 2.11 | 1) UL Marking added 2) Fuse and breakers specification added 3) Power/Control Terminal specification revised |
| 13 | Feb, 2005 | 2.11 | 1) Built-in DBU models included. 3) Overspeed & M/C Fail added. 4) Power Terminal explanation changed. |